Sunteți pe pagina 1din 510

T-Series Mid-Range Libraries

T200, T380, and T680

User Guide

SpectraLogic.com
Copyright Copyright © 2008–2009 Spectra Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. This item and the
information contained herein are the property of Spectra Logic Corporation.

Notices Except as expressly stated herein, Spectra Logic Corporation makes its products and
associated documentation on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, BOTH OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. In no
event shall Spectra Logic be liable for any loss of profits, loss of business, loss of use or
data, interruption of business, or for indirect, special, incidental or consequential
damages of any kind, even if Spectra Logic has been advised of the possibility of such
damages arising from any defect or error.
Information furnished in this manual is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no
responsibility is assumed by Spectra Logic for its use. Due to continuing research and
development, Spectra Logic may revise this publication from time to time without notice,
and reserves the right to change any product specification at any time without notice.
If you do not agree to the above, do not use this Spectra library; instead, promptly contact
Spectra Logic for instructions on how to return the library for a refund.

Trademarks Python, Spectra, SpectraGuard, Spectra Logic, TeraPack, and the Spectra Logic logo are
registered trademarks. BlueScale, Endura, EnergyAudit, PreScan, PostScan, RXT, T-Finity,
and Tape without Pain are trademarks of Spectra Logic Corporation. All rights reserved
worldwide. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their
respective owners.

Part Number 91010000 Revision D

Revision
History Revision Date Description
A January 2008 Initial release, T380 library.
B April 2008 Added T200.
C November 2008 ƒ Added T680.
ƒ Added information about MLM, HHM, Auto
Configuration Save, and Automatic Drive Cleaning
features
ƒ Updated information about encryption, AutoSupport,
and other topics throughout.
D December 2009 Updated/added information about MLM and HHM,
DLM, Auto Configuration Save, Auto Drive Clean,
BlueScale Vision, and other new features.

Note: To make sure you have the release notes for the most current version of
the BlueScale firmware, check the Spectra Logic Web site at
www.spectralogic.com/documents.

2
User Guide 91010000
License You have acquired a Spectra product that includes software owned or licensed by
Spectra Logic from one or more software licensors (“Software Suppliers”). Such
software products, as well as associated media, printed materials and “online” or
electronic documentation (“SOFTWARE”) are protected by copyright laws and
international copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties.
If you do not agree to this end user license agreement (EULA), do not use the Spectra
product; instead, promptly contact Spectra Logic for instructions on return of the Spectra
product for a refund. Any use of the Software, including but not limited to use on the
Spectra product, will constitute your agreement to this EULA (or ratification of any
previous consent).
Grant of License. The Software is licensed on a non-exclusive basis, not sold. This EULA
grants you the following rights to the Software:
ƒ You may use the Software only on the Spectra product.
ƒ Not Fault Tolerant. The Software is not fault tolerant. Spectra Logic has independently
determined how to use the Software in the Spectra product, and suppliers have relied
upon Spectra Logic to conduct sufficient testing to determine that the Software is
suitable for such use.
ƒ No Warranties for the SOFTWARE. The Software is provided “AS IS” and with all
faults. The entire risk as to satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort
(including lack of negligence) is with you. Also, there is no warranty against
interference with your enjoyment of the Software or against infringement. If you have
received any warranties regarding the SOFTWARE, those warranties do not originate
from, and are not binding on Software suppliers.
ƒ Note on Java Support. The Software may contain support for programs written in
Java. Java technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed, manufactured, or
intended for use of resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments
requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft
navigation or communications systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines,
or weapons systems, in which the failure of Java technology could lead directly to
death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage.
ƒ No Liability for Certain Damages. Except as prohibited by law, Software suppliers
shall have no liability for any indirect, special, consequential or incidental damages
arising from or in connection with the use or performance of the Software. This
limitation shall apply even if any remedy fails of its essential purpose. In no event shall
Software suppliers, individually, be liable for any amount in excess of U.S. two hundred
fifty dollars (U.S. $250.00).
ƒ Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation, and Disassembly. You may
not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Software, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this
limitation.
ƒ Software Transfer Allowed with Restrictions. You may permanently transfer rights
under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Spectra product,
and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA. If the Software is an upgrade, any transfer
must also include all prior versions of the Software.
ƒ Export Restrictions. Export of the Software from the United States is regulated by the
Export Administration Regulations (EAR, 15 CFR 730-744) of the U.S. Commerce
Department, Bureau of Export Administration. You agree to comply with the EAR in
the export or re-export of the Software: (i) to any country to which the U.S. has
embargoed or restricted the export of goods or services, which as May 1999 include, but
are not necessarily limited to Cuba, Iran, Iraq, Libya, North Korea, Sudan, Syria, and
the Federal Republic of Yugoslavia (including Serbia, but not Montenegro), or to any
national or any such country, wherever located, who intends to transit or transport the
Software back to such country; (ii) to any person or entity who you know or have
reason to know will utilize the Software or portion thereof in the design, development
or production of nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons; or (iii) to any person or
entity who has been prohibited from participating in U.S. export transactions by any
federal agency of the U.S. government. You warrant and represent that neither the BXA
nor any other U.S. federal agency has suspended, revoked or denied your export
privileges. For additional information see www.microsoft.com/exporting/.

3
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Warnings and Cautions

Warnings and Cautions


Risk of electrical shock. Hazardous moving parts. Use caution when removing the
Warning library’s front or side panels. Spectra Logic recommends turning off the power to
the library before removing the front or side panels.
German: Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages. Gefährliche bewegliche Teile. Seien
Sie vorsichtig, wenn Sie die Library der Vorder-oder Seitenwänden. Spectra Logic
empfiehlt Drehen Sie das Gerät in die Library, bevor Sie den Front-oder seitlichen
Platten.
Risk of electrical shock. To prevent the possibility of electrical shock, install cord
Warning locks on the AC power cords and a permanent grounding wire between the chassis
and earth ground.
German: Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages. Um zu verhindern, dass die
Möglichkeit eines elektrischen Schlages, der Installation von Kabel-Sperren auf
den AC Netzkabel und eine ständige Erdung Draht zwischen den Chassis und
Masse.
Tipping Hazard. The library must be installed in a standard 19-inch (48 cm) rack to
Warning prevent tipping. The rack must be located on a level, hard-surfaced floor such as
cement or tile.
German: Kipp-Gefahr. Die Library muss installiert sein, in einem Standard-Rack 48
cm blagerung zu verhindern. Das Rack muss sich auf eine ebene, harte Oberfläche
Stock wie Zement oder Fliese.
The T200 library weighs approximately 230 lb. (104 kg), the T380 library weighs
Warning approximately 305 lb. (138 kg), and the T680 library weighs approximately 765 lb.
(347 kg) without controllers, drives, and media installed. Use extreme caution
when moving it.
German: Die Library T200 wiegt ca. 104 kg, die Library T380 wiegt ca. 138 kg und
die Library T680 wiegt ca. 347 kg ohne Controller, Laufwerke und Medien installiert
werden. Verwenden Sie extreme Vorsicht walten lassen, wenn sie abwandern.
The library is very heavy. Always use four people, two on each side, when lifting or
Warning moving the library.
German: Die Library ist sehr schwer. Benutzen Sie immer vier Personen, zwei auf
jeder Seite, beim Heben oder Fortbewegen der Library.

Do not place the rack on a carpeted floor or anywhere else that poses risk for static
Caution discharge that could damage your library and its drives.
Use only the media approved by Spectra Logic for use in the drives installed in your
Caution library. Improper media will result in damage to the drives, library, and media.
If the library is loaded with media packs (RXT media packs or media in TeraPacks),
Caution Spectra recommends that the library not be moved. If you must move the library,
contact SpectraGuard Technical Support for recommendations before proceeding.

4
User Guide 91010000
Contacting Spectra Logic

Contacting Spectra Logic


To obtain general information
Spectra Logic Web Site: www.spectralogic.com
United States Headquarters European Office
Spectra Logic Corporation Spectra Logic Europe Ltd.
1700 North 55th Street Magdalen Centre
Boulder, CO 80301 Robert Robinson Avenue
USA Oxford Science Park
Phone: 1.800.833.1132 or 1.303.449.400 OXFORD
International: 1.303.449.6400 OX4 4GA
Fax: 1.303.939.8844 United Kingdom
Phone: 44 (0) 870.112.2150
Fax: 44 (0) 870.112.2175
SpectraGuard Support
Web Site: www.spectralogic.com/support
Knowledge Base: www.spectralogic.com/knowledgebase
United States and Canada Europe, Middle East, Africa
Phone: Phone: 44 (0) 870.112.2185
Toll free US and Canada: 1.800.227.4637 Email: support@spectralogic.com
International: 1.303.449.0160 Deutsch sprechende Kunden
Email: support@spectralogic.com Phone: 49 (0) 6028.9796.507
Email: spectralogic@stortrec.de
Mexico, Central and South America, Asia, Australia, and New Zealand
Phone: 1.303.449.0160
Email: support@spectralogic.com
Spectra Logic Sales
Web Site: www.spectralogic.com/shop
United States and Canada Europe
Phone: 1.800.833.1132 or 1.303.449.6400 Phone: 44 (0) 870.112.2150
Fax: 1.303.939.8844 Fax: 44 (0) 870.112.2175
Email: sales@spectralogic.com Email: eurosales@spectralogic.com
Media Sales
Email: media@spectralogic.com

5
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Contacting Spectra Logic

Notes

6
User Guide 91010000
Contents
About This Guide 17
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Register Your Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Chapter 1 – Library Overview 21


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Library Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
BlueScale Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Library Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Front Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Interior Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Rear Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Operator Panel and Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
TeraPack Access Port (TAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Library Control Module (LCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Quad Interface Processors (QIPs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
F-QIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
E-QIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
SCSI Bus Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Media Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
TeraPack Tape Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
RXT Media Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Chapter 2 – Architecture Overview 45


Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Data Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Cleaning Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Media Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Auto Drive Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Component Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

7
Contents

Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Transporter Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Drive Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Failover Using Direct-Attached LTO-4 Fibre Channel Drives . . . . . . 59

Chapter 3 – Installation Overview 61


Installation Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Unpack and Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Update Firmware and Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Changing the Library Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Updating or Servicing the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
System Configuration Settings Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Chapter 4 – Introducing the BlueScale User Interface 69


Overview of the BlueScale User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Access Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
User Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
User Interface Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Using the BlueScale User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Logging Into the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Logging Off or Switching Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Entering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Chapter 5 – Operating the Library 83


Turning the Library On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Power On the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Power Off the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Monitoring Your Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Checking Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Using Performance Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Using BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Viewing Drive Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Viewing a Fibre Channel Partition’s World Wide Name . . . . . . . . . 100
Using the BlueScale Vision Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

8
User Guide 91010000
Contents

Using a USB Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104


Continuing Library Operations While Using a USB Drive . . . . . . . . 105
Connecting a USB Drive to the LCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Saving Data From the Library to a USB Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Copying Data From a USB Drive to the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Using a Global Spare Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Using the Global Spare Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Reclaiming the Global Spare Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Restoring the Library Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Restoring the Library Configuration Using a
Saved Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Restoring the MLM Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Chapter 6 – Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media 119


Understanding the Media Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Viewing the Partition Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Preparing Media for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Tape Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
RXT Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Importing Media and Cleaning Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Overview of Import and Export Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or a Cleaning Partition . 128
Importing Media into a New Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Exporting or Exchanging Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Exporting or Exchanging Media in a Data Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Exporting or Exchanging Cartridges in a Cleaning Partition . . . . . 144
Importing Media To or Exporting Media From a Specific Location . . . 147
Moving Media Within a Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Locate the Desired Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Move the Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Updating the Media Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

9
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Contents

Chapter 7 – Media Lifecycle Management 155


BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Spectra-Certified Media with MLM-Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Media Auto Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
MLM Tracking and Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
MLM PreScan and PostScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Additional MLM Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Media Lifecycle Management Best Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Configuring Media Lifecycle Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Configure Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Configuring Media Auto Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Displaying MLM Capacity as Broadcast Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Configuring PostScan Blackout Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Getting Started with Using Media Lifecycle Management . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Media Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Initiating or Stopping Media Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Using Media Lifecycle Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Generating Media Lifecycle Management Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Saving an MLM Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Using MLM PreScan and PostScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Using PreScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Using PostScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Managing the MLM Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Backing Up the MLM Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Restoring the MLM Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Deleting Records From the MLM Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Downloading the MLM Database as a CSV File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Chapter 8 – Drive Lifecycle Management 195


BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Enabling Drive Lifecycle Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Use the Drive Health Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
View a Detailed Heath Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Using DLM to Test a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

10
User Guide 91010000
Contents

Chapter 9 – Using Partitions 205


Before you Begin... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Configuring a New Data Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Enter the Initial Partition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Choose the Robotic Control Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Configure Global Spare Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Configure a Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drive Partition . . . . . . . . 217
Configuring a Direct-Attach SCSI Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Configuring an F-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Configuring an E-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Configuring a Cleaning Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Enter the Initial Partition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Configure the Chambers for the Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Modifying an Existing Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Deleting a Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Chapter 10 – AutoSupport 247


AutoSupport Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Configuring AutoSupport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Configure Mail Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Configure AutoSupport Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Configure Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Configure Log Set Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Using AutoSupport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Creating New Support Tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Updating Existing Support Tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

11
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Contents

Chapter 11 – Configuring the Library 265


Configuring Library Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Adding a New User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Modifying an Existing User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Deleting an Existing User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Accessing the System Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Enabling Purchased Options and Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Determine the Library Hardware ID and Purchase the Option . . . 271
Enable the Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Modifying the Library Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Configuring System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Enabling and Disabling Performance Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Enabling and Disabling Soft Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Enabling the Camera Icon (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Configuring Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Configuring Mail Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Enabling Email for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature . . . 282
Configuring SNMP (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Backing Up the Library Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Use the Auto Save Configuration Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Back Up the Library Configuration Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Verify the Configuration Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Setting the Camera IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Configuring Emulation (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Configuring and Using Observatory (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Enabling and Configuring Observatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Using Observatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Configuring a Firmware Package Server (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Configuring Rotation Manager (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Configuring the Library for Use with StorNext Software (Optional) . . 301
Configure the Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Configure StorNext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

12
User Guide 91010000
Contents

Chapter 12 – Configuring and Using Encryption 305


BlueScale Encryption Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Site-Specific Decisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Site Security Example: Low Security Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Configuring Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Log Into the Encryption Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Configure the Encryption Initialization Mode and Password . . . . . 314
Create an Encryption Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Enable Encryption Using an F-QIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Enable Drive-Based Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Exporting and Protecting Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Export the Encryption Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Verify Backups of Encryption Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Protect the Encryption Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Restoring Encrypted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
The Required Key is Stored in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
The Required Key is Not Stored in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Using the Endura Decryption Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Deleting an Encryption Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Recycling Encrypted Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 13 – Library Troubleshooting 333


Capturing Traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Recovering a Media Pack after a Power Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Recovering a Cartridge From a Global Spare Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Resetting the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Resetting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Resetting the LCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Resetting a QIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Resetting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Troubleshooting Blockages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Accessing the Interior of the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Prepare the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Access the Interior from the Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Access the Interior from the Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

13
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Contents

Chapter 14 – Drive Troubleshooting 359


Resetting a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Using the Drives Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Using the Reset Controller Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Using the Power Drive On/Off Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Retrieving a Drive Dump File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Troubleshooting All Drive Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Troubleshooting LTO Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Interpreting the LTO Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Interpreting the Display Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Troubleshooting SDLT Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Interpreting the SDLT LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
SDLT Tape Drive Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Troubleshooting RXT Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Interpreting RXT Drive SCD Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Chapter 15 – Maintaining the Library & Drives 385


Maintaining the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Replacing the Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Updating Library Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Installing Cord Locks and Chassis Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Calibrating the Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Maintaining Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Cleaning a Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Updating Drive Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Adding or Replacing a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Appendix A – Best Practices 421


Backing Up the Spectra Library Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Back Up the Library Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Verify and Protect the Metadata Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Working with Tape Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Use Only Spectra Certified Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Labeling Tape Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Handling Tape Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Storing Tape Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Using Tape Media in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Tape Media Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

14
User Guide 91010000
Contents

Working with RXT Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433


RAID Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Optimizing Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Using RXT Media in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Handling RXT Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Storing RXT Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Operating in Gigabit Ethernet Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Best Practices for IP SANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Best Practices for iSCSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Appendix B – Media & Upgrades 441


Media and Media Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Spectra Certified Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Media and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
How To Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Library Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Service Contract Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Firmware Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Library Option Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Hardware Expansion and Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
How to Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Replaceable Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Appendix C – Service and Support 447


Problem Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
How to Open a Support Ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

Appendix D – Specifications 449


Library Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Data Storage Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Size and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Service Access Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Shipping and Storage Size and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Shock and Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

15
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Contents

Interoperability and Software Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459


Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Component Interface Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Network Interface Cable Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Ethernet Cable Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Tape Drive and Media Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
LTO Tape Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
SDLT Tape Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Tape Media Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Bar-Code Label Specifications for Half-Inch Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
RXT Drive and Media Pack Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
RXT Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
RXT Media Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Appendix E – Regulatory & Safety Standards 475


EU Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Korean Regulatory Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
FCC Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Safety Standards and Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
UL Accreditation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Hazardous Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Waste of Electronic and Electrical Equipment (WEEE) Directive . . 478
Restriction of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic
Equipment (RoHS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Measures for the Administration of the Control of Pollution by
Electronic Information Products (China) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

Glossary of Terms 481

Index 491

16
User Guide 91010000
About This Guide
This guide describes how to configure, use, maintain, and troubleshoot the
Spectra® T-Series Mid-Range libraries, the T200, T380, and T680. It also
provides specifications for the library.

INTENDED AUDIENCE
This guide is intended for data center administrators and operators who
maintain and operate backup systems. The information in this guide
assumes a familiarity with SCSI and Fibre Channel command protocols, as
well as with network connectivity protocols such as Fibre Channel,
Ethernet, and iSCSI (Gigabit Ethernet). It also assumes a knowledge of
technical tasks such as configuring operating systems and installing
drivers.

RELATED INFORMATION
This section contains information about this document and other
documents related to the T200, T380, and T680 libraries.

BlueScale User Interface Screens


The BlueScale interface changes as new features are added or other
modifications are made between firmware revisions. Therefore, the screens
on your library may differ from those shown in this document.

Additional Publications
For additional information about the Spectra T200, T380, and T680 libraries
and their drives, refer to the publications listed in this section.

Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries


This guide and the following documents related to the Spectra T200, T380,
and T680 are available as PDF files on Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Documentation and Software CD included with your library. They are also
available the Spectra Logic web site at www.spectralogic.com/documents.
ƒ The Spectra Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries Quick Reference Guide
provides a quick reference for the user interface and instructions for
performing day-to-day library operations such as powering on and off,
and preparing, importing and exporting media.

17
About This Guide

ƒ The Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries Site Preparation Guide
provides information about preparing your site for the installation of
the T200, T380, or T680 library.
ƒ The BlueScale Vision Camera User’s Guide provides detailed information
about installing and using the BlueScale Vision software.
ƒ The Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries Release Notes and
Documentation Updates provides the most up-to-date information about
the T200, T380, and T680 libraries, drives, and media.
Note: The release notes are not included on the Spectra T200, T380, and
T680 Libraries Documentation and Software CD.
ƒ The BlueScale Encryption User Guide provides detailed information
about using BlueScale Encryption Professional Edition. It also provides
useful information about encryption best practices and recycling
encrypted media.
ƒ The Spectra T-Series Library SCSI Developer Guide provides detailed
information about the SCSI and Fibre Channel commands used in the
library.

Drives
LTO Ultrium Tape Drives Check the IBM web site at www.storage.ibm.com/
tape/lto/oem/index.html to locate documentation for LTO Ultrium tape
drives.
SDLT Tape Drives Check the Quantum web site at www.quantum.com/
ServiceandSupport/Index.aspx to locate documentation for SDLT tape
drives.
SAIT Tape Drives Check the Sony web sit at sony.storagesupport.com/
node/26?product=3&name=S-AIT&tab2=drivers to locate drivers and
documentation for SAIT tape drives.
RXT Drives The following documents related to the RXT drives are
available as PDF files on the Spectra Logic web site at
www.spectralogic.com/documents.
ƒ The Spectra RXT150 User Guide provides information about operating
the RXT150 drive.
ƒ The Spectra RXT150 Release Notes provides the most up-to date
information about the RXT150, including information about the latest
firmware releases.
ƒ The Spectra RXT Troubleshooting Guide provides troubleshooting
information for RXT drives.
ƒ The Spectra RXT SCSI Differences Guide outlines differences between
RXT SCSI commands and LTO-2 (Ultrium-TD2) commands.

18
User Guide 91010000
Register Your Library

Typographical Conventions
This document uses the following conventions to highlight important
information:
Note: Read notes for additional information or suggestions about the
current topic.

Important Read text marked by the “Important” icon for information that will help you
complete a procedure or avoid extra steps.

Read text marked by the “Caution” icon for information you must know to avoid
Caution damaging the library, the tape drives, or losing data.

Read text marked by the “Warning” icon for information you must know to avoid
Warning personal injury.
German: Lesen Sie markierten Text durch die “Warnung”-Symbol für die
Informationen, die Sie kennen müssen, um Personenschäden zu vermeiden.

This document uses an arrow (>) to describe a series of menu selections.


For example:
Select Configuration > Partitions > New.
— means —
Select Configuration, then select Partitions, then select New.

REGISTER YOUR LIBRARY


Register your library quickly and easily on the Spectra Logic Web site, by
visiting www.spectralogic.com/register.

19
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
About This Guide

Notes

20
User Guide 91010000
Chapter 1
Library Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the Spectra® T200, T380, and T680
libraries features and components.

Topic Described beginning on...


Overview page 22
Library Features page 23
Library Components page 27
Operator Panel and Touch Screen page 33
TeraPack Access Port (TAP) page 34
Library Control Module (LCM) page 35
Quad Interface Processors (QIPs) page 39
Drives page 36
Media Handling page 42

21
Chapter 1 — Library Overview

OVERVIEW
The Spectra® T200, T380, and T680 libraries (the libraries) are highly
scalable, modular libraries that provide fast, affordable storage that meets
the stringent requirements for data integrity, data security, and high
reliability in the enterprise environment. The unique TranScale™ modular
design makes it possible to increase capacity or number of drives in the
library to meet the storage and performance needs as they evolve within an
organization.
With the exception of the maximum number of drives, the total storage
capacity, and the number of Quad Interface Controllers (QIPs) or bus
expansion modules each supports, the T200, T380, and T680 libraries are
functionally and operationally identical. The differences between the
libraries are noted where appropriate.

22
User Guide 91090000
Library Features

LIBRARY FEATURES
This section provides an overview of the library’s BlueScale™ user
interface and the hardware features that make the T200, T380, and T680
libraries highly versatile enterprise storage solutions.

BlueScale Software
The BlueScale software and firmware provide control over every aspect of
the library’s operation. The BlueScale software includes the following
features (listed in alphabetical order).

Auto Drive Clean


Auto Drive Clean lets you configure a dedicated cleaning partition to be
used for cleaning cartridges. The cleaning partition can be shared by
multiple data partitions and is used by the library to automatically clean
drives whenever necessary. See Using Auto Drive Clean on page 50 for
more information.

Auto-Save Configuration
Auto-Save Configuration automatically generates an auto-save file
containing a backup of the library configuration and MLM database and
stores it on the LCM compact flash once a week and whenever a partition
is created or modified. If desired, the library can automatically email the
auto-save file each time it is created. This external copy of the auto-save file
ensures that you can recover your MLM database and library configuration
in the event of a disaster. See Use the Auto Save Configuration Feature on
page 286 for more information.

AutoSupport
AutoSupport configures the library to automatically contact library users
with messages or when specific events occur. It can also be used to open or
update a support ticket and send it to a specified email recipient or to
SpectraGuard™ Support. See Chapter 10 – AutoSupport for detailed
information.

Drive Lifecycle Management


BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) helps you identify drives
that are experiencing high error rates or other problems. You can use this
information to determine whether the drive requires maintenance or
whether it needs to removed from the library. A health icon next to each
drive indicates the overall health of the drive. DLM is automatically
enabled when Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) is enabled.

23
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 1 — Library Overview

Encryption and Key Management


BlueScale Encryption and key management are tightly integrated into the
BlueScale environment. Encryption can be performed either through an
encryption-enabled Fibre Channel QIP, if installed, or through encryption-
capable LTO-4 drives using either LTO-3 or LTO-4 media. Encryption key
management is provided through the library’s BlueScale user interface. See
Chapter 12 – Configuring and Using Encryption for detailed information.
Note: BlueScale encryption is not supported with LTO-2 or earlier
media or with LTO-3 or earlier tape drives.

EnergyAudit™
BlueScale EnergyAudit lets you display and record actual power
consumption, giving you greater control of your data center and budget.
See Using Performance Metrics on page 88 for information.

Global Spare
Global Spare provides a way to remotely replace a failed drive in the
library. You simply configure an installed drive as a designated spare for
other drives in the library. This drive can then be substituted for a failed
drive in any partition that is configured to use the Global Spare drive.
When a drive fails, you simply log into the BlueScale web interface from
any location, select the Global Spare option for the failed drive, and
continue normal operations. You can then physically replace the failed
drive at your convenience. See Configure Global Spare Tape Drives on
page 213 and Using a Global Spare Tape Drive on page 107 for more
information.

Hardware Health Monitoring


BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) tracks maintenance
thresholds for key library components and notifies you when a
maintenance threshold is reached. When the maintenance icon appears in
the status bar, you can click on it to view the message. You can also choose
to send the AutoSupport Log (ASL) file to SpectraGuard Support so they
can review the log files and determine if any maintenance tasks are needed
to prevent future failures. See Using BlueScale Hardware Health
Monitoring on page 92 for more information.

IPv6 Support
The library supports link-local addressing from a web browser. When the
library connects to a routed IPv6 network it requests a link-local IPv6
address. You can then use this link-local address to connect to the library
without changing the IP address configuration settings in your library. See
Configuring Network Settings on page 278 for additional information.

24
User Guide 91090000
Library Features

Media Lifecycle Management


BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) helps you manage your
tape media by giving you tools to pro-actively detect potential media
errors well before they happen—all consolidated within the same
application you use to manage your library. When used in combination
with Spectra Logic Certified Media with MLM support, MLM lets you
manage, track, and report all facets of tape usage from creation to
retirement. When used with media that is not MLM-enabled, MLM tracks
and reports the general health of the media. See Chapter 7 – Media
Lifecycle Management for detailed information.

Shared Library Services (SLS) Partitioning


Shared Library Services™ (SLS) partitioning logically divides the library
into multiple virtual libraries. With SLS, one library can support multiple
media types and provide dedicated library services to multiple user
groups. See Partitions on page 45 and Chapter 9 – Using Partitions for
detailed information

Soft Power Control


The Soft Power option lets superusers disable the front panel power button
and instead enable a “soft power” button on the General Status screen of
the BlueScale user interface. It also provides a confirmation message before
power to the library is turned off. Enabling the Soft Power option gives
superusers exclusive control over powering the library off, preventing
other users from powering the library off from the front panel. See Use the
Soft Power Feature on page 85 for more information.

User Interface
The library’s BlueScale user interface lets you set configuration options,
view library and drive information and metrics, manage cartridges, and
monitor library operations. You can access the user interface using the
touch screen on the library’s operator panel, a direct connection to the
library controller module (LCM), or through the BlueScale web interface
using standard web browser. Access to the user interface is controlled by
assigning users to one of three groups, each with specific privileges. See
Chapter 4 – Introducing the BlueScale User Interface for detailed
information about the features and controls provided by the BlueScale user
interface.

25
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 1 — Library Overview

Hardware Features
The library’s unique modular design lets you tailor its to suit your current
data requirements and easily expand it to keep up with data growth and
technology changes by adding storage capacity and incorporating new
drive technology as it becomes available. The library includes the
following hardware features (listed in alphabetical order).

BlueScale Vision Camera


The BlueScale Vision™ camera lets you use the browser-based BlueScale
Vision software to view the interior of the library while it is operating. See
BlueScale Vision Camera on page 29 for more information.

Flexible Connectivity
The library’s transporter (the robotics) and drives connect to the host
systems using either of the following methods:
ƒ Direct-attach Fibre Channel or SCSI drives connect directly to the Fibre
Channel fabric or the host SCSI bus, respectively. One drive in each
partition provides pass-through connectivity to the transporter.
ƒ Intelligent controllers called a Quad Interface Processors (QIPs)
provide Fibre Channel or Gigabit Ethernet (iSCSI) network connectivity
for the transporter installed in the library.
QIPs serve as a bridge from the Fibre Channel or Gigabit Ethernet
(iSCSI) network environment to the transporter, eliminating the need
for external bridges or other specialized devices to handle data stream
translation.
Note: Connecting SCSI drives through a QIP is only supported as a
legacy solution.
See Connectivity on page 52 for more information.

High-Density TeraPack Media Storage


The library optimizes space usage by storing media on horizontal shelves.
This horizontal storage provides very high density by using space within
the library instead of the limited space provided by the vertical library
walls. Each horizontal shelf is divided into multiple equal-size media
storage chambers. Each chamber accommodates a single TeraPack
magazine or an RAID eXchangeable TeraPack (RXT™) media pack. See
Media Storage Chambers on page 29 and Media Handling on page 42 for
more information.

26
User Guide 91090000
Library Components

Support for Multiple Tape Formats


The library supports multiple generations of the high-performance, high-
capacity LTO and SDLT tape drives. Shared Library Services (SLS)
partitioning makes it possible to use multiple tape technologies a single
library. See Drives on page 36 for additional information.

LIBRARY COMPONENTS
The following sections show the locations of and briefly describe the major
front panel, internal, and rear panel components of the library.

Front Panel Components


Figure 1 shows the library front and side panel components.

Stylus
Operator Panel
(touch screen and
power button)

TeraPack Access
Port (TAP) Access panels

Front panel

Fans and air filter


(behind cover panel) Handles

Figure 1 Library front and side panel components (T380 shown).

Operator Panel The operator panel includes a color LCD touch screen and
the library power button. To learn more, see Operator Panel and Touch
Screen on page 33. A stylus for making selections and typing entries on the
touch screen can be conveniently stored near the screen.
TeraPack Access Ports (TAPs) The TAP functions as an entry/exit port that
lets you import media into or remove media from the library. The T200 and
T380 each have a single TAP; the T680 has two TAPs, one above the other.
To learn more about the TAP, see TeraPack Access Port (TAP) on page 34.

27
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 1 — Library Overview

Fans and Air Filters The air filters on the front of the library prevent
particulate contaminants from being pulled into the library by the air
circulation system. Fans behind the filters circulate clean air throughout
the library for climate control inside the library.
Access Panels and Handles The removable panels on each side of the
library provide service access to the interior components of the library. The
access panels are equipped with safety interlocks that power down the
library robotics when removed. Two handles on each side of the library
simplify moving and lifting the library when installing it in a rack.
Note: Most service procedures can be done through the front of the
library while it is installed in a rack. Using a rack that provides
side access simplifies many of these procedures.
The side panels on the T680 rack can be removed to
expose the access panels.
Doors (not shown) Doors on the T680 rack enclose the front of the library.

Interior Components
Figure 2 shows the interior components of the library.
Note: The interior components are shown for reference only. They are
not accessible during normal operation.

Media
chambers

DBA cover

Media chambers
(also behind fan
assembly)

Transporter with
bar code reader
Fan assembly

Figure 2 Library interior components (T380 shown).

28
User Guide 91090000
Library Components

Media Storage Chambers The media storage chambers hold all of the
media stored in the library. Each chamber provides storage for one TeraPack
magazine or one RXT media pack. TeraPack magazines, individual
cartridges, and the RXT media packs can all be labeled with unique bar
codes for easy identification.
In addition to the chambers indicated in Figure 2, chambers can also be
installed in the flex bays at the back of the library (see Rear Panel
Components on page 30). The maximum amount of media that can be
stored in the library depends on the type of media and the number of
drives installed (see Data Storage Capacity on page 450).
Transporter The robotic transporter moves a TeraPack magazine or RXT
media pack from one location to another in the library. A picker on the
transporter removes an individual cartridge from a magazine and inserts it
in a tape drive. When the tape drive is finished using the cartridge, the
picker retrieves the cartridge and returns it into the original magazine.
The transporter moves along the vertical and horizontal axes to perform
all media movement within the library. The integrated bar-code reader
mounted on the transporter reads the bar-code labels on individual
TeraPack magazines, cartridges, and RXT media packs. The library uses
the bar-code label information to maintain an inventory of the media
currently stored inside the library.
BlueScale Vision Camera The BlueScale Vision camera is mounted at the
top rear of the library. Two LEDs illuminate the interior of the library. The
camera lets you can observe import and export operations, tape mounts,
cartridge moves, and robotic operations in real time using the browser-
based BlueScale Vision viewer software. The ability to view the interior of
the library without removing the side access panels provides an additional
level of monitoring for your library.

LEDs (one on each


side of camera)

Camera lens

Ethernet and
power cables

Figure 3 The BlueScale Vision camera and LEDs.

29
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 1 — Library Overview

Rear Panel Components


Figure 4 shows the library’s rear panel components.

Tool storage

Chambers (3)
(behind cover)

Empty drive bay


(cover removed)

Drive
Flex bays (for DBAs
or TBAs)

Empty controller bay


(cover removed)

Drive Bay Assembly QIP or bus


(DBA) expansion module

Library Control BlueScale Vision


Module (LCM) camera connector

Power supply Main AC power cord


Bay connector and switch

Figure 4 Library rear components (T380 2N redundant power supply option


shown).

Flex bays Depending on requirements, flex bays let you increase the
number of drives or amount of media installed in the library. Flex bays can
accommodate additional drive bay assemblies (DBAs) for increased
performance or TeraPack Bay Assemblies (TBAs) for increased storage
capacity.
Drive Bay Assemblies (DBAs) Modular drive bay assemblies house the
drives and QIPs installed in the library. Each DBA accommodates up to
four full-height tape drives or four RXT drives and provides the electrical
and internal interface connections for the drives. Each DBA also includes a
bay for a QIP to the right of the drives. Use of a QIP or bus expansion
module is optional, depending on how the drives in the DBA connect to
the network.

30
User Guide 91090000
Library Components

A minimum of one DBA must be installed in the library. One additional


DBA can be installed in the flex bay above the first DBA in the T200 library;
up to two additional DBAs can be installed in the T380 and T680 library.
TeraPack Bay Assemblies (TBAs) Modular TeraPack bay assemblies
accommodate four TeraPack magazines or RXT media packs. Each TBA
contains four chambers and occupies the same physical space as a single
DBA. Depending on the library configuration, a TBA can replace a drive
bay assembly (DBAs) to provide increased storage capacity.
Library Control Module (LCM) A dedicated on-board computer module
runs the BlueScale firmware that controls all aspects of the library
operation. To learn more, see Library Control Module (LCM) on page 35.
Power Supply Bay The power supply bay accommodates two sets of three
power supply modules. Figure 5 shows the location of the AC power
connectors, main AC power switches, and the power supply modules in
the power supply bay.
Note: Any slots that do not have power supply modules installed have
covers installed to maintain proper air circulation through the
library.

Power supply bay with AC power cord


Main AC switch six power supply modules with cord lock

DC power
status

AC power
status
Ground
wire

Figure 5 The library power supply components (2N configuration shown).

ƒ Power supply modules convert the AC input power to the DC power


used by the robotics, drives, and QIP installed in the DBAs. They also
provide power to the LCD operator panel.
The standard configuration uses one power supply module per DBA. A
second power supply per DBA, in combination with the dual AC power
inputs, provides 2N redundancy and failover protection. Connecting
each AC input to a separate circuit provides failover protection in the
event of a power failure in one of the circuits. The failover feature
requires the 2N power redundancy option. The power supply modules
needed for the 2N power redundancy configuration are an option you
can purchase separately or when you order the library.

31
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 1 — Library Overview

Each power supply module has two indicator LEDs (shown in


Figure 5), one for AC power status and one for DC power status. The
color of the LED indicates the status:
ƒ Green—The power is on and functioning normally.
ƒ Orange—The power supply has a fault condition.
ƒ Off—The power is not on or the power supply module is not
functioning normally
ƒ Each set of three power supply modules has its own AC power
connector. The AC switch above the connector turns the main AC
power to the power supply modules on and off.
ƒ The AC connector and switch on the right side of the chassis control
power to the three power supply modules to the immediate left of
the connector. If you are not using 2N redundant power supplies,
these modules are typically installed first.
ƒ The AC connector and switch on the left side of the chassis control
power to the power supply modules installed to the immediate
right of the connector.
ƒ Cord locks on each power cord secure the cord to the library to
prevent it from being inadvertently disconnected.
ƒ A permanent ground wire is connected to the power supply bay to
ensure that the library is properly grounded at all times.
Tool storage. The compartment above the DBAs can be used to store the
tool kit that is included with the library.
Drives The library accommodates multiple generations of the high-
performance, high-capacity full-height LTO drives and SDLT tape drives, as
well as RXT drives. The drives are installed in modular Drive Bay Assemblies
(DBAs), each accommodating up to four drives. Drives are hot-swappable to
provide uninterrupted operation. To learn more, see Drives on page 36.
Note: Any drive bays that do not have drives installed have covers
installed to maintain proper air circulation.
Quad Interface Processors (QIPs) QIPs connect the library’s SCSI
transporter and drives to a Fibre Channel or Gigabit Ethernet (iSCSI)
network environment. QIPs are installed in the vertical controller bays to
the right of the drives in each DBA. To learn more, see Quad Interface
Processors (QIPs) on page 39.
Bus expansion module. When using direct-attach SCSI drives, a bus
expansion module is required. Like QIPs, bus expansion modules are
installed in the vertical controller bays to the right of the drives in each
DBA. To learn more, see SCSI Bus Expansion Module on page 41.
BlueScale Vision Connector The dedicated Ethernet port for the BlueScale
Vision camera lets you connect the camera to an Ethernet network and use
the web-based BlueScale Vision software to monitor the interior of the
library.

32
User Guide 91090000
Operator Panel and Touch Screen

Additional Components In addition to the components shown in Figure 4


on page 30, the following additional components are present on the rear
panel during normal operation.
ƒ A DBA cover (shown in Figure 2 on page 28) is installed over the drives
in the T200 and T380 libraries.
ƒ Doors on the T680 rack enclose the back of the library.
ƒ Cord locks are installed to prevent the AC power cords from being
disconnected (see Figure 5 on page 31).
ƒ A permanent grounding wire is connected to the chassis (see Figure 5
on page 31).
Any bays that do not contain components have covers installed to
maintain proper air circulation through the library.

OPERATOR PANEL AND TOUCH SCREEN


The operator panel and touch screen on the front of the library provides
local access to the BlueScale user interface through the Library Controller
(LC). You can select options and enter information by simply touching the
appropriate location on the screen. For detailed information about using the
BlueScale user interface through the touch screen, see Chapter 4 –
Introducing the BlueScale User Interface.

LCD touch Power button


screen
Figure 6 The library operator panel displaying the General
Status screen of the BlueScale user interface.

LCD touch screen The 8.4-inch color LCD touch screen operator panel lets
you monitor library operations and select configuration options using the
BlueScale user interface.

33
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 1 — Library Overview

Power Button The power button provides front panel on/off control of the
library.
Stylus (not shown) A stylus for making selections and typing entries on
the touch screen can be conveniently stored near the screen.

TERAPACK ACCESS PORT (TAP)


The TeraPack Access Port (TAP) is used to move TeraPack magazines into
and out of the library. A TeraPack magazine can contain one or more
cartridges or it can be empty. The T200 and T380 libraries each have one
TAP; the T680 has two TAPs.

TeraPack
magazine

TAP Door

Figure 7 The library TAP with a TeraPack magazine loaded.

When you request an import operation from the BlueScale user interface,
the library opens the TAP door and waits for you to insert a magazine
containing one or more cartridges. After you insert the magazine and close
the door, the transporter moves the magazine to a chamber in the library.
When the move is complete, the library updates its inventory to include the
newly imported media.
Similarly, when exporting media from the library, the transporter delivers
the magazine containing the requested media pack to the TAP. You can
then remove the entire magazine from the TAP or you can remove one or
more cartridges from the magazine.
During import or export operations involving more than one magazine,
the TAPs on the T680 library alternate so that the operation completes
more quickly.

34
User Guide 91090000
Library Control Module (LCM)

Using the TAP to move media in and out of the library provides these key
advantages:
ƒ Data Security. Media is never stored in the TAP. A newly inserted
TeraPack magazine is automatically moved into the library and placed
in a storage chamber. A magazine already in the library is only moved
to the TAP when you request an export operation through the user
interface. Data security and backup integrity are enhanced because the
media stored in the library can only be accessed using the password-
protected BlueScale user interface.
ƒ Convenience. Instead of individually importing or exporting multiple
single cartridges as you would with a traditional entry/exit port, using
a TAP lets you handle up to ten cartridges in a single operation, thus
reducing the time spent on import and export tasks.

LIBRARY CONTROL MODULE (LCM)


The library uses a dedicated on-board computer module, the Library
Control Module (LCM), to run the BlueScale software and firmware that
controls all aspects of the library operation.
The BlueScale software running on the LCM provides user interface used
to perform all configuration, import/export, and management functions.
The BlueScale user interface is accessed locally through library's touch
screen. An embedded web server provides remote access to the BlueScale
web interface using a standard web browser.
The BlueScale firmware running on the LCM controls the operation of the
robotics, drives, and QIPs. As part of this function, the LCM stores all of
the information relating to the logical library, including information about
the location and status of each element in the library, as well as the raw
media inventory in its non-volatile memory.

Keyboard Compact flash card


connector Reset Monitor connector (behind cover) Fan

Mouse USB port Ethernet connector


connector
Figure 8 The connectors and components on the LCM.

35
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 1 — Library Overview

In addition to providing the user interface and robotics control, the LCM
maintains and stores the MLM database, system logs, and other
information related to the current system status. It also stores the auto-
configuration save file and handles emailing it and AutoSupport logs to
preconfigured recipients.
Keyboard, Mouse, and Monitor Connectors For convenience, you can
connect a PS2 mouse, PS2 keyboard, and an SVGA monitor to the
appropriate connectors on the LCM and use them to access the user
interface. This connection provides access to all of the options available
from the library’s front panel touch screen.
Compact Flash Card The compact flash card in the LCM stores the library’s
configuration information, which includes option keys, system settings,
and partition settings, as well as other configuration information.
Ethernet Connector If desired you can use the Ethernet connector (the web
server port) on the LCM to connect the library to an Ethernet network and
access the library through the BlueScale web interface using the Remote
Library Controller (RLC). The BlueScale web interface provides access to
all of the options available from the library’s operator panel except those
that require physical interaction with the library (for example, importing
or exporting media).
USB Port The USB port is used to connect a USB drive to the LCM for
transferring encryption keys, saving configurations, and uploading
firmware packages.
Notes: ƒ The USB port cannot be used to connect a keyboard or mouse
to the LCM.
ƒ The USB port on the RCM is used when capturing motion
traces.

DRIVES
The library supports the following media technologies.
ƒ IBM LTO Ultrium tape drives (LTO-2 through LTO-4). See LTO Tape
Drive Specifications on page 462 for information about the transfer
rates and storage capacities of LTO drives.
ƒ Quantum SDLT 600 tape drives. See SDLT Tape Drive Specifications
on page 465 for information about the transfer rates and storage
capacities of SDLT drives.

36
User Guide 91090000
Drives

ƒ Spectra Logic RXT150 drive and RXT media packs. No changes to


backup strategy are necessary, because the RXT drive appears as an
LTO tape drive to the backup software. See RXT Drive and Media Pack
Specifications on page 471 for information about the transfer rates and
storage capacities of RXT drives and media.

Important RXT drives and media packs are only supported as legacy devices. They are no
longer available for purchase.

The library’s drives are installed in modular drive bay assemblies (DBAs).
Each DBA has four drive bays and can accommodate up to four full-height
tape drives or four RXT drives. Drives are hot-swappable to provide
uninterrupted operation.
Each drive is mounted in a drive sled which provides the electrical and
logical connections to the library. The drive sled circuitry includes
intelligence which assigns an identifier to the drive based on its location in
the library. This identifier is used both by the library and by any backup
software that accesses the drive. Because this identifier is location-based, it
remains constant even if the physical drive is replaced by a new drive. The
new drive assumes the location-based identifier, making drive replacement
completely transparent to the backup software.
In addition to the electrical and logical connections for the drive, the drive
sled includes interface connections for the drive, a handle to simplify
sliding the drive into or out of a drive bay, and a lock to prevent the drive
from being accidentally pulled out of the library.

Fibre Channel Handle Lock SCSI terminator Handle Lock


connectors (2) release release
Figure 9 The Fibre Channel drive sled. Figure 10 The SCSI drive sled.

37
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 1 — Library Overview

The method used to connect the library’s tape drives to the network
depends on the type of network and the drive interface. The tape drives
used in the library have either a native Fibre Channel interface or an
Ultra320 SCSI interface. RXT drives have an internal Ultra320 SCSI
interface.
ƒ Fibre Channel drives in the library connect directly to the Fibre Channel
network. Each drive has two dual-channel ports (Port A and Port B)
that can be used to connect the drive directly to a Fibre Channel
network. See Partitions Using Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drives on
page 55 for information about using direct-attach Fibre Channel tape
drives.
ƒ Connecting SCSI tape drives directly to a SCSI bus requires a bus
expansion module to provide the second SCSI bus connection for each
drive. An LVD SCSI terminator is installed on the single LVD SCSI
connector on the drive sled. To learn more about the bus expansion
module, see Partitions Using Direct-Attach SCSI Drives on page 55.
Connecting SCSI drives to a Fibre Channel network requires an F-QIP.
See Partitions Using QIP-Attached SCSI Drives on page 57 for
information about using SCSI drives.

Important Connecting SCSI drives through a QIP is only supported as a legacy solution.

Depending on the type of drive, the drive sled includes the one of the
interface connector types shown in the following table. See Component
Interface Connectors on page 460 additional information.

Drive Interface Type Connector


Fibre Channel Two multi-mode optical SC connectors (see Figure 9). Used to connect direct-
attach Fibre Channel tape drives to a Fibre Channel network.
SCSI a Ultra-3 SCSI “LVD” 68-pin Micro D female connector. A SCSI terminator is
installed on the connector (see Figure 10).
a. Requires either a QIP or a bus expansion module to connect to the network.

38
User Guide 91090000
Quad Interface Processors (QIPs)

QUAD INTERFACE PROCESSORS (QIPS)


Intelligent controllers called Quad Interface Processors (QIPs) can be used
to provide the control path for SCSI motion commands from the host to the
transporter. QIPs are also required to provide the Fibre Channel or Gigabit
Ethernet connectivity to any SCSI drives installed in the library. To learn
more about the role QIPs play in the library, see Drive Connectivity on
page 55.

Important Connecting SCSI drives through a QIP is only supported as a legacy solution.

Note: QIPs are mounted in the vertical controller bay along the right
side of each DBA. The QIPs in Figure 11 and Figure 12 are
shown in a horizontal position for reference only.

F-QIP
A Fibre Channel QIP (F-QIP) can be used to connect the transporter to a
Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric. The F-QIP has two integrated dual-
channel ports (Port A and Port B), which can be used to provide
connections to two separate networks or to provide redundant connections
to a single network. One F-QIP in each partition provides the Fibre
Channel connectivity to the transporter. Each F-QIP port also provides
any-to-any connections to SCSI drives housed in the DBA where the F-QIP
is installed.
Activity LEDs indicate SCSI bus activity (data transfer to or from the
attached drives). Another LED indicates whether the data passing to the
attached drives is being encrypted or decrypted.

Fibre Channel ports Activity LEDs QIP Reset


Figure 11 The Quad Interface Processor (F-QIP).

39
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 1 — Library Overview

In addition to providing Fibre Channel network connectivity between the


drives and the host, the F-QIP can encrypt data before it is written to tape.
This capability is useful if the SCSI drives installed in the library cannot
perform encryption. Encryption key management is provided through the
library’s BlueScale user interface (see Chapter 12 – Configuring and Using
Encryption).
Note: The encryption performed by the QIP is not compatible with
LTO-4 encryption. Data encrypted by the QIP cannot be
decrypted by an encryption-enabled LTO-4 drive and vice versa.

E-QIP

Important Ethernet QIPs (E-QIPs) are only supported as legacy devices. They are no longer
available for purchase.

Using SCSI drives on a Gigabit Ethernet (iSCSI) network requires an


Ethernet QIP (E-QIP). The E-QIP has two integrated dual-channel ports
(Port A and Port B), which can provide connections to two separate
networks or redundant connections to a single network. Each port
provides an any-to-any connection to the four tape drives controlled by the
E-QIP. Activity LEDs indicate SCSI bus activity (data transfer to or from
the attached drives).

Gigabit Ethernet ports Activity LEDs QIP Reset


Figure 12 The Quad Interface Processor (E-QIP).

40
User Guide 91090000
SCSI Bus Expansion Module

SCSI BUS EXPANSION MODULE


When using direct-attach SCSI drives, a bus expansion module must be
installed in the controller bay to the right of the drives in the DBA. The bus
expansion module has four Ultra-3 SCSI “LVD” Fast & Wide, 68-pin
Micro D female connectors to provide the second SCSI bus connection for
each drive. To learn more about the role the bus expansion module plays
when using direct-attach SCSI drives, see Partitions Using Direct-Attach
SCSI Drives on page 55.
Note: The bus expansion module is mounted vertically along the right
side of the DBA. The bus expansion module in Figure 13 is
shown in a horizontal position for reference only.

LVD SCSI connectors


Figure 13 The SCSI bus expansion module.

41
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 1 — Library Overview

MEDIA HANDLING
Spectra’s TeraPack media architecture provides support for both
traditional tape media and RXT media.

TeraPack Tape Media


The library uses TeraPack magazines to import and export cartridges
through the TAP and to store cartridges inside the library. Each magazine
holds up to 10 LTO cartridges or 9 SDLT cartridges. The magazine has
guides along each side and grooves on the bottom to ensure proper
alignment when it is inserted in the TAP. TeraPack magazines can be
purchase preloaded with Spectra Certified Media. You can also purchase
empty magazines.

Figure 14 TeraPack with bar-code labeled cartridges and plastic dust cover.

Storing and handling cartridges in TeraPack magazines helps eliminate


errors resulting from mishandling individual tapes, which is the leading
cause of tape damage. When inside the library, TeraPack magazines are
stored in semi-enclosed chambers. When not in the library, a clear plastic
dust cover snaps onto the magazine to protect the cartridges. The
cartridges are continually protected by the TeraPack magazine, both inside
and outside the library.
Using TeraPack magazines offers the following advantages:
ƒ Bar code labeling. All of the cartridges in a TeraPack magazine, as well
as the magazine itself, are bar-code labeled for easy identification. The
bar-code information is stored by the library as part of its inventory
data in non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM). Even after a
power-down and restart, the library retains its inventory.

42
User Guide 91090000
Media Handling

ƒ Grouped media. The cartridges in a TeraPack magazine are treated as a


unit during import and export operations. This grouped media
handling simplifies media management tasks by eliminating the need
to import or export cartridges one by one. TeraPack magazines
eliminate at least 90 percent of operator time spent on these types of
tasks.
ƒ Mixed media support. If multiple drive types are installed in the
library, individual TeraPack magazines can be loaded with media and
imported into separate partitions to support each drive type. Media
types cannot be mixed within a single TeraPack magazine.

RXT Media Packs

Important RXT drives and media packs are only supported as legacy devices. They are no
longer available for purchase.

An RXT media pack is the same size and shape as a TeraPack magazine.
Each RXT media pack contains multiple Serial ATA (SATA) disks sealed in
a sturdy protective enclosure, as shown in Figure 15. RXT media is set to
the RAID level specified when the pack was ordered.

Status LEDs

Write-protect switch
Alignment guides
Figure 15 An RXT media pack and its internal disk drives.

ƒ The media pack has guides along each side to ensure proper alignment
when it is inserted in the TAP.
ƒ LEDs along the front edge of the media pack indicate the operational
status of the drives.
ƒ A write-protect switch can be set to prevent data from being written to
or erased from the media pack.
The transporter moves an RXT media pack and loads it into an RXT drive
in much the same manner as a tape cartridge is loaded into a tape drive. As
with a TeraPack magazine filled with cartridges, RXT media can easily be
moved off-line and off-site.

43
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 1 — Library Overview

Notes

44
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 2
Architecture Overview
The T200, T380, and T680 libraries are designed to provide maximum
configurability and ease of use. This chapter provides an overview of the
software and hardware architecture behind this versatility.

Topic Described beginning on...


Partitions this page
Media Pools page 48
Auto Drive Clean page 49
Component Identifiers page 51
Connectivity page 52

PARTITIONS
Partitions divide the library logically, so that the partitioned library looks
to the enterprise environment like one or more physical libraries—one
library per configured partition. The library uses Shared Library Services
(SLS) virtualization technology to partition the library. Partitioning
simplifies storage consolidation through the creation of virtual libraries,
each with its own drives and media. SLS support is a keyed option you can
add to the library by purchasing an activation key from Spectra Logic.
When partitions are configured, each partition:
ƒ Has exclusive access to the tape drives and media storage assigned to it.
ƒ Can control the transporter to move media within the partition.

45
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview

The library supports two types of partitions, data partitions and cleaning
partitions. The library requires, at a minimum, one data partition. Each
data partition must have at least one drive assigned to it. Up to eight data
partitions, plus one or more cleaning partitions, can be configured in a
single library. A single cleaning partition can be associated with multiple
data partitions. The cleaning partitions do not count against the eight
partition maximum.
Figure 16 shows a conceptual illustration of a library configured with two
data partitions and a shared cleaning partition.

Storage Pool chambers


(each with a loaded
TeraPack magazine)

Entry/exit pool chambers


(each with an empty
TeraPack magazine)

Entry/exit pool chambers


(each with an empty
TeraPack magazine)

Cleaning partition
shared by Partition 1
and Partition 2

Partition 2 drives

Partition 1 drives

Storage pool chambers


(each with a loaded
TeraPack magazine)

Partition 1 – Virtual library 1


Partition 2 – Virtual library 2

Figure 16 A library (T680) with two partitions and a shared cleaning partition.

46
User Guide 91090000
Partitions

Data Partitions
In some environments, using multiple data partitions is crucial to data
center efficiency and growth. For example, multiple partitions are
extremely useful in the following situations:
Multiple Backup Software Packages If groups within your company use
different backup software packages, each software package requires its
own dedicated library. Instead of maintaining multiple physical libraries—
one per backup package—the data center can use a single Spectra Logic
library with multiple partitions, in which each partition appears to the
software as a dedicated library.
Multiple Databases f your company uses multiple databases, partitioning
the library preserves the backup processes associated with each type of
database.
Shared Resources f each department in the company must keep their data
segregated, partitioning the library supplies this segregation, as well as the
subsequent integrity of the data set. Each partition can only access the
drives and cartridge locations assigned to it. Data from other partitions
cannot become intermixed with the data stored on the media in the
partition’s inventory.
Multiple Network Protocols If your company uses multiple network
protocols, such as Fibre Channel and Gigabit Ethernet, then each protocol
is assigned to its own partition within the same physical library.
Multiple Drive Technologies If your data center uses both LTO and SDLT
drive technologies, then the media associated with each drive technology
must have its own partition.
Encryption If you do not want to encrypt all of your backups but only
some of them, your can partition the library into an Encryption partition
and non-encryption partition to segregate which data to encrypt.

Cleaning Partitions
Cleaning partitions provide permanent storage for cleaning cartridges
inside the library when using the Auto Drive Clean feature (see Auto Drive
Clean on page 49). These special-purpose partitions do not have an entry/
exit pool or any drives associated with them.
Tape drives that are configured in a data partition that has an associated
cleaning partition are cleaned automatically when cleaning is required. In
addition, you can use the BlueScale user interface to initiate a manual
cleaning using a cleaning cartridge stored in the cleaning partition.

47
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview

A single cleaning partition can be used with every data partition that has a
drive type that is compatible with the cleaning cartridges in the cleaning
partition. Multiple cleaning partitions are required only when the data
partitions use different drive technologies. For example, if one data
partition uses LTO-4 drives and another uses SDLT 600 drives, two
cleaning partitions are required, one with LTO cleaning cartridges and one
with SDLT cleaning cartridges.
Cleaning cartridges must be identified with “CLN” at the beginning of the
bar code sequence on their labels. They must be stored in specially labeled
Maintenance TeraPack magazines. The cleaning cartridges are imported
into and exported from a cleaning partition through the TAP in the same
way that data cartridges are. The library automatically prevents importing
cleaning cartridges and magazines that are not properly identified into a
cleaning partition.
Cleaning partitions are not accessible to the application software that uses
the media in the data partitions. This means that software-initiated drive
cleaning operations cannot use the cleaning cartridges in the cleaning
partition.

MEDIA POOLS
Inside the library, media is logically grouped through the use of pools. The
library has three different types of pool, each of which has a different
purpose.
Free pool Chambers that are not assigned to a partition are in the free
pool. These chambers can be assigned to a data partition or a cleaning
partition. Media in the free pool is not accessible through the BlueScale
user interface or the backup software until it is added to a partition.
Entry/Exit pool Chambers in the entry/exit pool provide an interim
storage location for media during import and export operations. Media is
not accessible to the backup software for writing or reading data while it is
in the entry/exit pool.

Important Although a entry/exit pool for importing and exporting the media in a partition is
not required, configuring one is highly recommended. The code load tapes used
for updating drive firmware can only be imported into a partition’s entry/exit pool.

The media in the entry/exit pool either:


ƒ Was ejected from the storage pool by the backup software and is
waiting to be exported from the library through the TAP.
—OR—
ƒ Was imported into the library through the TAP and is waiting to be
moved into the storage pool by the backup software.

48
User Guide 91090000
Auto Drive Clean

When media is exported by the backup software it is not moved to a


physical entry/exit port for immediate removal. Instead, it is moved to the
internal entry/exit pool, where it is temporarily stored until it is removed
from the library. When it is time to remove media from a library, the
operator simply uses the Import/Export screen on the library’s user
interface to move the TeraPack magazine to the TAP, where it can be
removed. Together, the entry/exit pool and the TAP function as a
configurable entry/exit port. Using an entry/exit pool greatly speeds tape
cartridge exports because the operator does not have to handle individual
cartridges.
Similarly, the entry/exit pool speeds up import operations. Instead of
loading individual tapes into slots in an entry/exit port, the operator inserts
full media packs through the TAP. The media packs are moved to the
entry/exit pool, from which they are later imported into the storage pool
using the backup software. Using TeraPack magazines makes it possible to
load multiple cartridges into the library using a single operation.
Storage pool Chambers in the storage pool contain the media for the data
partition. This media is available to the backup software for writing or
reading data.
When you configure a partition, you assign a certain number of chambers
to the partition. If the partition is a data partition, you specify how many
chambers are assigned to the storage pool and how many chambers are
assigned to the entry/exit pools.

AUTO DRIVE CLEAN


Auto Drive Clean is an option that provides library-based tape drive
cleaning with minimal user intervention. Automated drive cleaning results
in fewer failed tape read/write operations and is the preferred method for
cleaning drives. When you enable MLM and use MLM-enabled cleaning
cartridges, the library tracks the number of uses for each cartridge and
notifies you when a cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life. This helps
prevent failed cleanings resulting from using an expended cleaning
cartridge. See Chapter 7 – Media Lifecycle Management for detailed
information about the library’s Media Lifecycle Management (MLM)
feature.

49
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview

Using Auto Drive Clean


Tape drives that are configured in a data partition that has an associated
cleaning partition are cleaned automatically when cleaning is required. In
addition, you can use the BlueScale user interface to initiate a manual
cleaning. The option to perform a manual cleaning operation using a
cleaning cartridge in a cleaning partition is only available with drives that
are in data partitions associated with a cleaning partition.
Note: If a cleaning partition is not configured, you must either use
your backup software to perform the cleaning or import a
cleaning cartridge into the data partition (see Manually Cleaning
a Tape Drive on page 411).
Requirements The Auto Drive Clean feature requires a cleaning partition
to be associated with the data partition (see Configuring a Cleaning
Partition on page 236). The cleaning partition is assigned to the data
partition when the data partition is configured (see Configure the Drives
and Chambers for the Partition on page 215).
How Auto Drive Clean Works When a drive is unloaded in response to a
host request and the data cartridge is moved to its storage location, the
library queries the drive to determine if it needs cleaning. If cleaning is
required, the library delays notifying the host that the SCSI move
command for the unloaded data cartridge is complete until an automatic
drive cleaning is performed.
The library then determines which cleaning cartridge to use, retrieves the
cleaning cartridge from the cleaning partition, inserts it in the drive, and
then returns it to the cleaning partition after the cleaning is complete. The
library then notifies the host that the move is complete.
Expired Cleaning Cartridges When an expired cleaning cartridge is loaded
into a drive it is immediately ejected without completing the cleaning. The
library then flags the cleaning cartridge as expired. The library generates
system messages to notify you of expired cleaning cartridges, completed
automatic drive cleanings, and failed automatic drive cleanings.
If the cleaning partition contains other, good cleaning cartridges, a cleaning
that failed because the cleaning cartridge was expired will be re-attempted
the next time the host unloads a data cartridge from the drive. Drives in a
partition with Auto Drive Clean enabled are cleaned no more than once in
any 12 hour period. If you want to clean the drive immediately, you can
initiate a manual cleaning.

MLM Tracking of Cleaning Cartridges


When you use MLM-enabled cleaning cartridges in a cleaning partition,
the library stores usage information, which includes the number of cleans
remaining and the cartridge health (good, near expiration or expired), in
the MLM database. This information is retained in the MLM database even
when a cleaning cartridge is exported from the library.

50
User Guide 91090000
Component Identifiers

The library does not maintain any information about non-MLM cleaning
cartridges in the MLM database. However the library does mark an expired
cleaning tape and does not attempt to use it again as long as it remains in the
library. If an expired cartridge is exported and then reimported into the
library, it is identified as expired the next time it is loaded into a tape drive.

COMPONENT IDENTIFIERS
The library’s BlueScale interface identifies a drive or QIP based on its
location relative to the drive bay assembly (DBA) where it is installed.
Figure 17 shows the relationship between the DBAs and the drives and
QIPs installed in them.

Drive 3 Drive 4 QIP


DBA 3 3
Drive 1 Drive 2

Drive 3 Drive 4 QIP


DBA 2 2
Drive 1 Drive 2

Drive 3 Drive 4 QIP


DBA1
1
Drive 1 Drive 2

Figure 17 The relationship between QIPs and drive locations and their identifiers (T380 shown).

51
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview

QIP Identifiers
Quad Interface Processors (QIPs) are identified in the library’s BlueScale
interface as DBAx/Y-QIPx, where:
ƒ DBAx is the number of the drive bay assembly (DBA) containing the
QIP (see Figure 17).
ƒ Y is the QIP type (F for Fibre Channel or E for Gigabit Ethernet).
ƒ QIPx is the number of the controller bay in the DBA. Each DBA contains
one controller bay, so x is always 1.

Drive Identifiers
The library’s BlueScale interface uses the following identifiers for drives
(see Figure 17). Drive identifiers appear as DBAx/Y-DRVx, where Y is a
drive type and x is a number.
ƒ DBAx is the number of the drive bay assembly (DBA) containing the
drive.
ƒ Y is the drive type (either LTO, SDLT, or RXT)
ƒ DRVx is the number of the drive bay in the DBA, as viewed from the
back of the library.

CONNECTIVITY
The transporter and drives in the library are typically connected to the
hosts through a Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric or, less often, over a
SCSI bus. These connections carry two types of information:
ƒ The data being transferred to and from a drive by the host
ƒ The commands from the backup software that control the transporter
motion and the read/write operation of the drives

Transporter Connectivity
The transporter requires either a direct-attach drive or a QIP to provide the
control path for SCSI motion commands issued by the host to control the
robotics.
ƒ When no QIP is present, a direct-attach Fibre Channel or SCSI drive
provides the robotics control path, as described in Control Path
Through a Direct-Attach Drive.
ƒ When a QIP is present, it can be used to provide the robotics control
path, as described in Control Path Through a QIP on page 54.

52
User Guide 91090000
Connectivity

Control Path Through a Direct-Attach Drive


In a direct-attach drive configuration, one drive in a data partition is
designated as the exporting or master drive. The SCSI commands to control
the motion of the transporter within the partition are sent from the host to
the master drive’s logical unit number 1 (LUN 1). The master tape drive
passes the robotic control commands to the transporter. SCSI commands to
control the operation of the master drive are sent from the host to LUN 0 of
the drive.
Figure 18 is a simple representation of how the drives and robotics in a
library with a single direct-attach Fibre Channel partition are connected to
a Fibre Channel SAN through a switch or hub.

Figure 18 An example of a direct-attach Fibre Channel partition


with the robotic control path provided by Drive1 in DBA1.

53
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview

Control Path Through a QIP

Important Ethernet QIPs (E-QIPs) are only supported as legacy devices. They are no longer
available for purchase.

In a QIP-based configuration, one QIP in a partition provides the


connectivity for the transporter. This QIP is referred to as the exporting
QIP. Depending on the configuration, one or both of the external ports on
the exporting QIP provide the network connectivity for the transporter.
See Figure 21 on page 58 for an example of a partition that uses an F-QIP to
provide the robotics control path.
Depending on the configuration, the exporting QIP can support multiple
partitions, with each partition appearing as a unique physical library to the
hosts connected to the library. For example, if the library contains two
partitions, each with two drives connected to the exporting QIP, the
exporting QIP provides the robotic control path for both partitions.
As part of providing network connectivity, QIPs perform the following
additional functions within the library.
ƒ Each F-QIP presents a unique, location-based identifier to the network.
This identifier is based on the physical location of the F-QIP in the
library and a unique identifier for the library. Because the identifier is
location-based, it remains constant even if the physical F-QIP is
replaced. When a new F-QIP is installed, it assumes the existing
location-based identifier, making QIP replacement completely
transparent to the backup software.
Each F-QIP is identified by a World Wide Name (WWN). Each port on
the F-QIP has a World Wide Port Name (WWPN), which is derived
from the WWN. The WWPN is used by the host software to address the
drives and robotics controlled by the QIP.
ƒ Optionally, F-QIPs can use BlueScale encryption to encrypt data before
it is written to tape, thereby extending encryption to drive technologies
that do not have native encryption capabilities. BlueScale encryption is
not compatible with the encryption performed by encryption-enabled
LTO-4 tape drives. You must use one type of encryption or the other.
ƒ Each port on an E-QIP is identified by an iSCSI target name. The iSCSI
target name is used by the host software to address the drives and
robotics controlled by the QIP.
Note: The E-QIP does not have BlueScale encryption capability. You
must rely on the tape drive’s encryption capabilities, if present.

54
User Guide 91090000
Connectivity

Drive Connectivity
The drives in the library can have either a Fibre Channel interface or a SCSI
interface.
ƒ Fibre Channel drives connect directly to the host using a Fibre Channel
arbitrated loop or fabric, as described in Partitions Using Direct-Attach
Fibre Channel Drives.
ƒ SCSI drives can be connected directly to a SCSI HBA in the host
through a bus expansion module, as described in Partitions Using
Direct-Attach SCSI Drives. Each DBA provides the internal SCSI bus
that connects the drives to the bus expansion module. The terminator
for each SCSI bus is installed on the drive’s external LVD SCSI
connector.
—OR—
They can be connected to a Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric
using an F-QIP, as described in Partitions Using QIP-Attached SCSI
Drives on page 57.
Keep in mind that all of the Fibre Channel drives on an arbitrated loop or
SCSI bus must share the data transfer capacity (bandwidth) of the
interface. Having multiple devices on the same loop or bus can negatively
impact the performance of all the devices.

Partitions Using Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drives


When a partition includes Fibre Channel drives, the drives are connected
directly to the Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric. Figure 18 on page 53
is a simple representation of how direct-attach Fibre Channel drives
connect to the network and provide the robotics control path.

Partitions Using Direct-Attach SCSI Drives


When using direct-attach SCSI drives in the library, a bus expansion
module is required to create the wide LVD SCSI bus within the DBA.
Although the bus expansion module resembles a QIP, it does not provide
any functionality beyond supplying a second SCSI connection to each SCSI
drive in the SCSI DBA (the SCSI drives only have one external SCSI
connector). The bus expansion module does not handle robotic control
commands from the host nor does it provide any encryption capability. If
you use direct-attach SCSI tape drives, you must rely on the tape drive’s
encryption capabilities, if present.

55
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview

Each SCSI bus expansion module has four external SCSI connectors which
provide SCSI bus connections to the four SCSI drives in the DBA, as
illustrated in Figure 19. Each drive in a DBA is on a separate SCSI bus and
can only be accessed by the host that is connected to it through the bus
expansion module. If a partition contains multiple drives, each drive
connection requires a separate SCSI HBA in the host.

Important Spectra Logic does not support daisy-chaining multiple SCSI drives on a single
SCSI bus, nor does it support daisy-chaining other devices on the same SCSI bus
as a drive.

Important Although a maximum of 15 devices can be connected to a single wide LVD SCSI
bus, attaching more than two devices (including the SCSI HBA) to a single SCSI bus
can potentially have a negative impact on the performance of all devices on the
bus.

Note: One of the drives in a partition also provide the robotic control
path.

Drive Bay Assembly (DBA)


Drive 3 Drive 4

Bus expansion
module
Drive 1 Drive 2

Internal SCSI bus


External Wide SCSI connector
Figure 19 The internal SCSI bus architecture in the bus expansion
module.

Because the bus expansion module does not provide any control function,
it is not assigned an identifier by the BlueScale interface. As a result, it is
not listed as an available controller when configuring a partition with
direct-attach SCSI drives (see Choose the Robotic Control Path on
page 212).

56
User Guide 91090000
Connectivity

Partitions Using QIP-Attached SCSI Drives

Important Connecting SCSI drives through a QIP is only supported as a legacy solution.

When a partition includes SCSI drives, a QIP can be used to provide the
connectivity to the host. Each DBA provides the internal SCSI bus that
connects the drives to the QIP. The terminator for each SCSI bus is installed
on the drive’s external LVD SCSI connector.
The F-QIP (or E-QIP) acts as a bridge to connect SCSI drives in the DBA to
a Fibre Channel fabric or arbitrated loop (or Gigabit Ethernet network).
Each QIP has two external ports and provides connectivity for up to four
SCSI drives. If a partition contains more than four drives, additional QIPs
are required to provide the connectivity for those drives.
Note: One QIP in the partition also provides the robotic control path.
As illustrated in Figure 20, a QIP provides any-to-any connectivity to the
SCSI drives it controls. Every drive (target) is potentially visible to servers
through both ports on the QIP. This permits flexibility in configuring
which servers can access which drives (target visibility).

Drive Bay Assembly (DBA)

Drive 3 Drive 4

QIP

Drive 1 Drive 2

Internal cabling
Fiber port (Fibre Channel or Gigabit Ethernet)

Figure 20 The QIP architecture.

For example, a QIP can be configured so that Drives 1 and 2 are only
accessible through Port A and Drives 3 and 4 are only accessible through
Port B. As a result, Drive 1 and Drive 2 can only be accessed by the host
connected to Port A; Drive 3 and Drive 4 can only be accessed by a host
connected to Port B.

57
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview

To consolidate port usage on a switch, all four drives can be configured for
access through a single port. In a more complex configuration, the QIP can
be configured so that all drives are visible through both ports. Such a
configuration is typically used in a shared storage environment or an
environment with failover capabilities.

Important If drives are visible to multiple servers, your backup software must support this
visibility. Otherwise server contention for a single drive can create network and
system problems.

When a partition includes SCSI drives connected through a QIP, the QIP
provides the connectivity to the drives. Figure 21 is a simple representation
of how the drives and robotics in a library with a single QIP-based
partition are connected to a Fibre Channel arbitrated look or fabric through
a switch or hub.

Figure 21 An example of a QIP-based partition with


QIP-attached drives connected to a SAN.

In this example, the 12 SCSI drives in the partition (four drives per DBA)
are connected to the Fibre Channel arbitrated look or fabric through Port B
of the F-QIP in the DBA. Port A of F-QIP 3 provides the path over which
the SCSI commands to control the motion of the robotics within the
partition are sent from the host. These commands are relayed to the LCM,
which in turn controls the motion of the robotics.
This configuration minimizes the number of switch ports required to
access all of the drives in the partition and takes advantage of the partition
and connectivity features provided by a QIP. The configuration is
especially useful for providing Fibre Channel or Gigabit Ethernet
connectivity for drives that do not support these protocols directly.

58
User Guide 91090000
Connectivity

Failover Using Direct-Attached LTO-4 Fibre Channel Drives


The LTO-4 Fibre Channel drives used with the library are equipped with
two Fibre Channel ports. Although the two ports on an LTO-4 Fibre
Channel drive cannot be used simultaneously, they can be used to provide
failover capability in the event that communication to the port currently in
use is interrupted. This failover can be can be accomplished several ways,
including:
ƒ Manually disconnect the fiber optic cable from the failed port and
connect it to the other port. You may need to reconfigure your host
software to recognize the alternate port.
ƒ Connect each port on the drive to a separate Fibre Channel HBA in the
host. You can also use a dual-port Fibre Channel HBA. Configure one
HBA (or HBA port) as the primary connection and the other HBA (or
HBA port) as the failover connection. Install failover software on the
host computer to control the transfer of I/O from one HBA (or HBA
port) to the other in case of a failure. You may also need to configure
your backup software to correctly recognize both ports. Refer to your
failover software, HBA, and backup software documentation for
instructions.
ƒ Connect each port on the drive to a separate Fibre Channel switch or
hub. Configure one switch (or hub) as the primary connection and the
other switch (or hub) as the failover connection. Install failover
software on the host computer to control the transfer of I/O from one
connection to the other in case of a failure. You may also need to
configure your backup software to correctly recognize both
connections. Refer to your failover software, switch or hub, and backup
software documentation for instructions.

59
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview

Notes

60
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 3
Installation Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the hardware installation and initial
configuration performed by the Spectra-Logic-certified field engineer who
installed your library. A checklist at the end of the chapter provides space
for recording your library configuration settings for future reference.

Topic Described beginning on...


Installation Steps this page
Changing the Library Hardware page 64
Configuration
Updating or Servicing the Library page 64
System Configuration Settings Checklist page 65

Important The information in this chapter is for reference only. It provides a high-level
summary of the installation steps but is not intended for use as an installation
guide.

INSTALLATION STEPS
During installation, the engineer performs the procedures described in the
following sections.

Unpack and Set Up


1. Confirm that all of the pre-installation requirements, as specified in the
T-Series Mid-Range Libraries: T200, T380, and T680 Site Preparation Guide,
have been met. This includes ensuring the installation site is located
near easily accessible AC power outlets and away from potential
sources of static discharge (for example, carpeted flooring).
2. Move all of the components to the installation location.
3. Uncrate the library and all additional components.
4. Verify that there was no shipping damage to any of the components
5. Remove all packing materials from the interior of the library.

61
Chapter 3 — Installation Overview

6. Install the BlueScale Vision camera if it was ordered with the library.
Note: The BlueScale Vision camera is pre-installed in the T680 library.
7. Install the library in a standard four-post, 19-inch rack at the requested
location, ensuring that it is located near an easily accessible AC power
outlet and away from potential sources of static discharge (for example,
carpeted flooring).
Note: The T680 library is shipped already installed in its own rack.
For stability, the library is installed at the bottom of the rack.

Tipping Hazard. The library must be installed in a standard 19-inch (48 cm) rack to
Warning prevent tipping. The rack must be located on a level, hard-surfaced floor such as
cement or tile.
German: Kipp-Gefahr. Die Library muss installiert sein, in einem Standard-Rack
48 cm Ablagerung zu verhindern. Das Rack muss sich auf eine ebene, harte
Oberfläche Stock wie Zement oder Fliese.

Do not place the rack on a carpeted floor or anywhere else that poses risk for static
Caution discharge that could damage your library and its drives.
If the library is loaded with media packs (RXT media packs or media in TeraPacks),
Spectra recommends that the library not be moved. If you must move the library,
contact SpectraGuard Technical Support for recommendations before proceeding.

8. Install the QIPs, drives, and power supply modules that were ordered
with the library. Ensure that the LCM and all of the RCMs are installed.
9. Connect cables and attach the power cords to the library. Install cord
locks and attach a permanent grounding wire to the library.
ƒ Interface cables—See Rear Panel Components on page 30 for the
locations of the interface cable connections. In addition to the
network connections to the QIPs and drives, each BlueScale vision
camera requires a separate Ethernet connection.
ƒ AC power inputs—The library comes with dual AC power inputs.
If the library uses 2N redundant power supply modules, each of
these inputs is connected to a separate 15 Amp circuit, which allows
for failover in the event of a power failure in one of the circuits.
ƒ Cord lock and grounding wire—Install the provided cord locks to
keep the power cords from becoming disconnected from the AC
input plugs. Install the grounding wire to provide additional chassis
grounding. See Installing Cord Locks and Chassis Grounding on
page 403 for installation instructions.
10. Power on the library and allow it to complete its initialization process.
See Turning the Library On and Off on page 84 for power-on
instructions.

62
User Guide 91090000
Installation Steps

Update Firmware and Configure


1. Configure user profiles (user name, password, and user group), the
library IP address, the BlueScale Vision camera IP addresses, email
notification profiles, and AutoSupport.
See Chapter 11 – Configuring the Library if you need to update or
change any of these settings.
2. Verify that you can access the library user interface using the BlueScale
web interface through a standard web browser.
See BlueScale Web Interface on page 70 for information about accessing
the library from a remote location.
3. Update the library and drive firmware to the most current versions, if
necessary.
If you need to update the library or drive firmware after your library is
installed, see Updating Library Firmware on page 388.
4. Install the license keys for all of the options you purchased. At a
minimum, the licensed options include the initial BlueScale Software
Support key and the capacity key.
If you purchase additional options, see Enable the Option on page 271
to learn how to enter license keys and enable the options for use.
5. Configure one or more library partitions to meet your requirements.
The library must have a minimum of one partition configured.
See Chapter 9 – Using Partitions if you want to add new partitions or
modify existing partitions.
6. Import all prepared TeraPack magazines and RXT media packs (if
used).
Chapter 5 – Operating the Library provides detailed information about
importing and exporting all types of media.
7. Use the library diagnostics to test the transporter by moving media to
and from all locations in the library, including the drives.
8. Connect the library to the hosts in your operating environment. If using
partitions, ensure that the transporter and appropriate drives are
accessible to each host.
See Chapter 9 – Using Partitions for information about setting visibility.
9. Use backup software or other application software to perform a read/
write test to each drive. See your software documentation for
information about reading and writing data.

Important Some operating environments require you to install device drivers before the
application software can correctly communicate with the drives.

63
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 3 — Installation Overview

CHANGING THE LIBRARY HARDWARE CONFIGURATION


Installing Additional Drives
Installing an additional drive into a partially filled DBA causes the library
to reassign element addresses. To avoid errors, reconfigure your backup
software after adding a new drive (refer to your software documentation
for instructions).

Moving the Library


The library hardware is configured to ensure proper thermal control, air
flow, and dust filtering. After the library is installed, do not move the
library. Do not remove the doors from the back of the T680 library or any
library components (except TeraPack magazines or RXT media packs).
In the event a change is required, make sure that you have instructions for
performing the procedure and you either:
ƒ Have been instructed to do so by SpectraGuard Support, or
ƒ Have a support contract such as Assisted Self-Maintenance (ASM).

UPDATING OR SERVICING THE LIBRARY


Contact SpectraGuard Support before making any changes to your library
hardware or performing any service operations.
You must have a current support agreement and corresponding BlueScale
Software Support key entered in the library before you can update the
library’s firmware, which includes the BlueScale software. If you do not
have a current support agreement and the relevant documentation, contact
SpectraGuard Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).

Important Updating the library firmware and BlueScale software requires a current service
contract with SpectraGuard Support. The BlueScale Software Support key
associated with your service contract must be stored in the library by entering it
into the System Configuration screen. See Enabling Purchased Options and
Upgrades on page 270 for additional information.
If you have questions about your service agreement, contact SpectraGuard
Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).

64
User Guide 91090000
System Configuration Settings Checklist

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SETTINGS CHECKLIST


If desired, use the following form to record the configuration settings for
your library for future reference.

Component Description Value


Network The network on which the library operates Library IP address
Settings uses either DHCP addressing or static IP _______ . _______ . _______ . _______
addressing to determine the IP address of
the library. Subnet mask
If the network uses static IP addressing, _______ . _______ . _______ . _______
record the library IP address, subnet mask,
and network gateway (see Configuring Network gateway
Network Settings on page 278). _______ . _______ . _______ . _______

IPv6 link address


______::______:______.______:______

Web server port number ____________


Library The name used to identify the library, Library name
Name regardless of library size or subsequent
expansion (see Modifying the Library
Configuration Settings on page 273).
Mail The library can be configured to Email address 1
Recipients automatically send email messages to notify __________________________________
specified users about specific library
conditions (see Configuring Mail Users on Notification Types
page 280). ˆ Fatal
ƒ Identify the mail users to receive email ˆ Error
notifications and AutoSupport ˆ Warning
information. ˆ Informational
ƒ Specify the types of notification(s) the
library should send automatically. SMPT Server IP Address
ƒ Specify the library name so that the _______ . _______ . _______ . _______
recipient of the message knows which
library originated the message.
Email address 2
ƒ Specify the IP address of the SMTP server
__________________________________
used to send the email.

Notification Types
ˆ Fatal
ˆ Error
ˆ Warning
ˆ Informational

SMPT Server IP Address


_______ . _______ . _______ . _______

65
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 3 — Installation Overview

Component Description Value


AutoSupport The library can be configured to Customer/Contract Number
Profiles automatically send AutoSupport __________________________________
information (see Configure AutoSupport
Profiles on page 251). Profile 1
Contact Name (First and Last)
__________________________________

Primary Phone Number


__________________________________

Email address 1
__________________________________

ˆ AutoSupport Profile

Mail To
ˆ autosupport@spectralogic.com
__________________________________
__________________________________
__________________________________

Profile 2
Contact Name (First and Last)
__________________________________

Primary Phone Number


__________________________________

Email address 1
__________________________________

ˆ AutoSupport Profile

Mail To
ˆ autosupport@spectralogic.com
__________________________________
__________________________________
__________________________________
Camera IP If a BlueScale Vision camera is installed, it
Addresses uses a separate, static IP address for _______ . _______ . _______ . _______
accessing the camera through the web-based
Network Camera viewer (see Setting the
Camera IP Address on page 290).

66
User Guide 91090000
System Configuration Settings Checklist

Component Description Value


SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol System Contact
(SNMP) is a widely used protocol for __________________________________
monitoring the health and welfare of your System Location
library by using integrated alerts (see __________________________________
Configuring SNMP (Optional) on page 283). Communities
__________________________________
__________________________________

Trap Destinations

Community 1
__________________________________
Description
__________________________________
IP Address
_______ . _______ . _______ . _______

Community 2
__________________________________
Description
__________________________________
IP Address:
_______ . _______ . _______ . _______

67
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 3 — Installation Overview

Notes

68
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 4
Introducing the BlueScale User
Interface
This chapter describes the library’s BlueScale user interface and how it is
used.

Topic Described beginning on...


Overview of the BlueScale User Interface page 70
Access Options page 70
User Security page 71
User Interface Features page 72
Using the BlueScale User Interface page 70
Logging Into the User Interface page 79
Logging Off or Switching Users page 81
Entering Information page 81

69
Chapter 4 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface

OVERVIEW OF THE BLUESCALE USER INTERFACE


The BlueScale user interface lets you set configuration options, view
library and drive information and metrics, manage media, monitor library
operations, and perform maintenance operations.

Access Options
The BlueScale user interface is accessed using either the touch screen on
the library operator panel or through the BlueScale web interface.

Touch Screen Interface


The touch screen on the library’s operator panel lets you select options and
enter information by simply touching the appropriate location on the
screen. The touch screen interface includes a soft keyboard that you can
use to enter alphanumeric characters into text fields. This soft keyboard
can be accessed from the keyboard icon that displays whenever text input
is required.
In addition to using the touch screen, you can access the local user interface
using a monitor, keyboard, and mouse connected directly to the LCM (see
Figure 8 on page 35).

BlueScale Web Interface


The BlueScale web interface lets you access the user interface through the
Remote Library Controller (RLC) using a standard web browser. Simply
enter the library’s IP address into the browser running on a computer
connected to the library’s LCM over an Ethernet network.
The BlueScale web interface provides access to the same features and
functions that are available through the touch screen, excluding functions
that involve physical interaction with the library (for example, using the
TAP to import or export a TeraPack magazine).

Important When accessing the library remotely through a web browser, do not use the Enter
key on your keyboard when making selections in the BlueScale user interface.
Various web browsers handle the Enter key differently, causing inconsistent
behavior in the BlueScale interface.
Always use your mouse to make selections and click the buttons in BlueScale
screens instead of using your keyboard.

70
User Guide 91090000
Overview of the BlueScale User Interface

When using the web interface, keep the following requirements in mind:
Number of Sessions The BlueScale web interface does not support using
more than two simultaneous sessions. When you attemptto establish more
than two simultaneous web interface sessions, the existing session with the
longest idle time is terminated.
Supported Browsers Remote access to the library through the web
interface is only supported using the following web browsers:
ƒ Microsoft ®Internet Explorer® versions 6.0 and above
ƒ Mozilla® Firefox® versions 1.0.7 and above
Using an unsupported browser may result in the BlueScale web interface
not displaying or operating as expected.

User Security
Library users are assigned to one of three groups, each with its own set of
pre-defined library privileges (also known as permissions). These
privileges determine the type of operations a user can perform on the
library. These privileges are the primary means for configuring library
security. See Configuring Library Users on page 266 for information about
adding users.
The following table describes the three user groups and the privileges of
each.

User Group Type Description Default User Name


Superuser Controls all aspects of library use and configuration. Users su
assigned to the Superuser group can control all aspects of
the library’s configuration and operation, including
defining other library users and their groups.
Note: The library requires a minimum of one superuser.
You cannot delete the last member of the Superuser group.
Administrator Configures and uses the library. With the exception of administrator
creating or modifying library users, users in the
Administrator group have the same privileges as users in
the Superuser group.
Operator Performs day-to-day operations. Users assigned to the operator
Operator group can move, import, and export media, but
cannot access the more sensitive library operations such as
configuration, diagnostics, and security.

71
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 4 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface

User Interface Features


The following sections describe the common features that appear in all
screens in the user interface.

Current
toolbar

Additional
tool bars

Status bar

Figure 22 The BlueScale user interface (T680 shown).

Toolbars
The toolbar panel appears along the left edge of each screen (see Figure 22)
and lets you navigate through the available toolbars to select options.
Clicking on a toolbar expands it to display the available options. The
screen for the previously selected option remains displayed until you select
another option, either from the same toolbar or another one.

72
User Guide 91090000
Overview of the BlueScale User Interface

The following table provides an overview of the options available under


each toolbar. Figure 23 on page 75 shows the sequence of the screens under
each option.

Toolbar Available Options


General The General toolbar (shown in Figure 22 on page 72) accesses the most
frequently used library screens and controls:
ƒ General Status—Displays the current status for all of the major library
components for the selected library partition. Moving the cursor over the
name of the component highlights the component in the system graphic.
ƒ Click on Drives to display the Drives screen for more detailed information
about the status of the drives (see Viewing Drive Status Information on
page 98).
ƒ Click on Media to display the Inventory screen to view the library’s
physical inventory information (see Viewing the Partition Inventory on
page 120).
ƒ Inventory—Displays controls for viewing the library’s media inventory and
moving media from one location in the library to another. See Understanding
the Media Inventory on page 120 to learn about using the options available
from this screen.
ƒ Import/Export—Displays controls for importing and exporting media. See
Importing Media and Cleaning Cartridges on page 127 to learn about using
the options available from this screen. This option is not available when using
the BlueScale web interface.
ƒ Metrics—Displays metrics for tape drive performance, power consumption,
and storage density for the media types in the library. See Using Performance
Metrics on page 88 for information about the metrics available for the library.
ƒ Media Lifecycle Management—Displays controls for generating media
lifecycle reports. See Using Media Lifecycle Management on page 175 to
learn about using the options available from this screen.

73
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 4 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface

Toolbar Available Options


Configuration The Configuration toolbar accesses controls for configuring all aspects of the
library’s operation:
ƒ Partitions—Displays information about the currently selected partition and
lets you define new partitions or modify existing partitions. See Chapter 9 –
Using Partitions to learn about configuring and using both data and cleaning
partitions in your library.
ƒ Drives—Displays information about the drives installed in the library. If the
Automatic Drive Cleaning feature is enabled and a cleaning partition is
associated with a drive’s partition, you can also use the Drives screen to
launch a manual cleaning operation. A status icon next to each drive
provides at-a-glance information about the general health of the drive. See
Chapter 8 – Drive Lifecycle Management to learn about using the options
available from this screen.
ƒ Controllers—Displays information about the QIPs installed in the library.
ƒ System—Provides controls for enabling purchased library options and
configuring the library’s system-wide operating parameters. See Chapter 11 –
Configuring the Library for information about using the controls available
from this option.
ƒ Media Lifecycle Management—Displays controls for enabling MLM and
selecting the media lifecycle management events for which you want alerts.
See Chapter 7 – Media Lifecycle Management to learn about using the
options available from this screen.
Maintenance The Maintenance toolbar accesses maintenance and troubleshooting options for
the library and drives.
ƒ Package Update—Displays the version of the currently running firmware and
provides controls for updating and managing firmware packages, as well as
for configuring and managing servers used for loading firmware package
updates for multiple libraries. See Updating Library Firmware on page 388
for detailed information.
ƒ Tools—Accesses utilities for viewing firmware versions, calibrating the touch
screen, and generating operational traces of various library components for
use during troubleshooting procedures. See Chapter 13 – Library
Troubleshooting for more information.
ƒ Diagnostics—Accesses diagnostic tests to be used for testing the library and
during troubleshooting procedures. See Chapter 13 – Library
Troubleshooting for more information.
ƒ AutoSupport—Provides controls for creating and maintaining AutoSupport
profiles and for opening and updating support tickets. See Chapter 10 –
AutoSupport for detailed information about configuring and using
AutoSupport.
ƒ Media Lifecycle Management—Displays controls for manually starting and
stopping the MLM media discovery process. See Using MLM PreScan and
PostScan on page 181 to learn about using the options available from this
screen.

74
User Guide 91090000
Overview of the BlueScale User Interface

Toolbar Available Options


Security The Security toolbar accesses options for creating and managing users. If you
purchased the BlueScale Encryption option for your library, the Security toolbar
also provides access to the BlueScale Encryption options.
ƒ Switch User—Displays the Login screen to allow a different user to log into
the library.
ƒ Edit Users—Provides tools for adding, deleting, and managing users. See
Configuring Library Users on page 266 for detailed information.
ƒ Encryption—Accesses the BlueScale Encryption options, including the
library’s built-in encryption key management. BlueScale Encryption Basic
Edition capability is included with the library. BlueScale Encryption
Professional Edition provides additional encryption capabilities. Refer to
Chapter 12 – Configuring and Using Encryption for information about
configuring and using encryption with the library.

General General (Cont.) Configuration Configuration (Cont.) Configuration (Cont.)

General Status O, A, S Metrics O, A, S Partitions A, S Drives (DLM) A, S Media Lifecycle


General Status Metrics Shared Library Services Drives Management A, S

Partition Status Metric New Add 1 Media Lifecycle Management


– Drives > Drives screen – Power Consumption Summary Remove 1 Settings
1
– Media > Inventory screen (EnergyAudit) Edit Replace
– Drive Write Performance Enable MLM
Robotics Status Delete Clean
– Drive Read Performance Enable Alerts for Non-Certified
Power Status Global Spare Detail
– Storage Density Media
Fans Status – Global Spare Usage — Drive Lifecycle Management Report
Display parameters Enable Alerts for Load Count
TAP Status (two for T680) Name and Media Type Test
Discrepancies
Power Usage Name Reset
Media Lifecycle Minimum Cleaning Passes
Density <Media Type> (data partition) Before Warning
Management O, A, S Clean (LTO only) Controllers A, S
Maximum Tape Loads Before
Advanced Controllers Warning
Inventory Media Lifecycle Management
O, A, S – Emulation Add 1 Enable Media Auto Discovery
Report
Inventory Partition Robotic Control Path Remove 1 Convert to Broadcast Hours
2
Partition
Report Spare Drives (Global Spares) Replace 1 PostScan Blackout Periods
Source (for media move) Release 1
– Media Health Ethernet Protocol (E-QIP only)
Destination (for media move)
– Remaining Capacity Chambers and Drives
Move Queue (defined moves) – Load Count System A, S
– Delete (selected move) – Write Errors Encryption (If logged in)
– Delete All (moves) System Setup
– Cleans Remaining MLM Media Verification
View Source Slot Enable PreScan Option Enablement
– Born on Date
Find by Barcode Scan After Time (Days) 2 Hardware ID 3
– Exported Media
Start Moves (defined moves) Scan After Write
2 Key
– Last Write Time
Scan After Read
2 – Save
– Last Read Time
Import/Export 1 O, A, S
Save Report
Currently Installed Keys
Fibre Channel Loop IDs
Import/Export TeraPack Cases Find by Barcode Other Settings
(Direct-Attach FC drives)
Data Partition Library Name
Storage pool (superuser only) SCSI IDs (Direct-Attach SCSI Web Server Port
– Import drives) Refresh Rate
– Export/Exchange Partition Users Auto Logout Timeout
– Import Robotic Path Visibility Online Access to Spectra
Entry/Exit Pool Logic
Drive Visibility (QIP-Attach Drive Performance Monitoring
– Import
drives only) Power Consumption
– Export/Exchange (Full Chambers)
– Export/Exchange (Pop. Chambers) QIP Configuration Settings Monitoring
Cleaning Partition (depend on QIP type and use) Soft Power Control
– Import Save Library Configuration Enable SNMP Agent
– Export/Exchange SNMP Settings
Save Partition BlueScale Vision IP Address
– Export/Exchange Expired
Rotation Manager Network Settings
Recycle Encrypted Media Go to Configuration (Cont.) Mail Users
Advanced Auto Configuration Save
– Advanced Import/Export Routine Maintenance
Date and Time
Go to General (Cont.)
Go to Configuration (Cont.)

Maintenance Maintenance (Cont.) Security Status Bar


Refresh
Package Update A, S AutoSupport A, S Switch User O, A, S
HHM Notification (when maintenance
Package Update Send Log Set threshold is reached)
Begin Package Update Select Profile to Send Edit Users A, S Send AutoSupport Ticket > Send Log Set
Manage Packages Log Set Library Users System Status
Manage Package Select Ticket Type Users System Messages
Servers Profile Summary – Delete – Delete Selected
Confirm and Submit – Edit – Delete All
Tools A, S Ticket Add/Update User
Manage Profiles Remote Support
Utilities – User
Upload Backup Configuration New Profile – Password BlueScale Vision Camera (when
Basic Utilities Remove – User Type enabled)
– Show Advanced Edit Profile Last Refresh (time and date)
– Basic Utilities List Configure Alarms Encryption S BlueScale Software Version
Advanced Utilities 4 Log Forwarding Encryption User Login Library IP Address (local access)
– Advanced Utilities List – OR–
Encryption Configuration
– Save MLM Database Media Lifecycle Library Name (remote access)
Configure
– Restore MLM Database
Management A, S – Single User Mode
– HHM: View Data
– Multi-User Mode (BlueScale
– Show Basic Media Lifecycle Management Encryption Pro only) Notes:
Traces Tools Check Key Files
System Traces Discover Media 1) Available only on the touch screen.
Import Key
– Select Partition 2) Available only with direct-attach Fibre Channel drives.
2 Add Key
Diagnostics A, S Stop Discovery (only visible – Moniker 3) The Hardware ID is needed to purchase new options.
when running) Export Key 4) Do not use any Advanced Utilities except those listed here unless instructed
Motion Diagnostics
Pause PostScan (only visible 2 Delete Key to do so by SpectraGuard Support.
Motion Diagnostics List
when running)
Previous Results 2
Manual PostScan
– Select Tapes Library user types: Superuser, Administrator, and Operator
Go to Maintenance (Cont.) – Submit Feature Availability: This feature is available to this user type:
Delete MLM Records S) Superuser – Controls all aspects of library use, configuration, and security.
– Select Records A) Administrator – Performs all actions except creating or editing library users,
– Delete Selected and accessing encryption.
Download MLM Database
O) Operator – Moves, imports, and exports media.
(remote access only)
– Save as CSV file

Figure 23 Map of BlueScale Toolbar options.

75
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 4 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface

Status Bar
The status bar is located along the bottom edge of most screens. The
information and icons displayed on the status bar depend on the status of
the system and whether you are using the using the operator panel or the
BlueScale web interface.

System
Status

Refresh Last refresh time BlueScale IP address


display and date software version (or library name)
Figure 24 The basic BlueScale status bar.

Refresh Button Refreshes (updates) the information currently displayed


on the user interface. If you set a long interval for the refresh rate or
disabled the automatic screen refresh by setting the refresh rate to zero (see
Refresh Rate on page 274), you can refresh the screen manually by
selecting the refresh button.
System Status Icon Indicates the status of library components. The
BlueScale user interface uses the following icons to indicate the status of
library components. Click the status icon to view system messages (see
Checking Messages on page 88 for information about these messages).
Note: These status icons also display next to the major system
components shown on the General Status screen (see Figure 22
on page 72).

Icon Description Meaning


A check mark (9) in a All system components are functioning correctly.
green circle

An i in a blue circle. An informational message about a system component is available.


Check messages to determine the component.

An exclamation point A system component requires attention. Check messages to


( ! ) in a yellow triangle. determine the component.

An X in a red circle. A system component has experienced an error condition. Check


messages to determine the component.

76
User Guide 91090000
Overview of the BlueScale User Interface

Last Refresh Time and Date shows when the displayed information was
last updated. The library refreshes different screens at different rates,
depending on the type of data displayed. The screen refresh rate can be set
for a specific interval or disabled (see Refresh Rate on page 274). The
displayed information can be refreshed manually by selecting the Refresh
button.
BlueScale Software Version Shows the version of the BlueScale software
being run by the library.
IP Address or Library Name Shows the IP address or name for the library. If
you are managing the library from the touch screen operator panel, the
library’s IP address is displayed on the status bar. If you are using the
BlueScale web interface, the library’s name is shown instead of the IP
address.
Note: If you are using the BlueScale web interface and you have not set
the library name, the right-hand side of the status bar is blank.
If you need to view or set the library’s IP address, see Configuring
Network Settings on page 278. See Library Name on page 274 for
information about setting the library name.

Additional Status Bar Icons


The status bar can also include the following additional icons.
Remote Support Icon Provides you with online access to the support
section of the Spectra Logic web site where you can search the Knowledge
Base, access the Product Documentation, and download firmware and
drivers. If you need additional assistance, contact SpectraGuard Support
(see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).

Remote
support

Figure 25 The BlueScale status bar.

The remote support icon is also used to activate secure remote access
capabilities using Cisco WebEx™ technology. This remote access helps
SpectraGuard Support provide faster resolution of support calls. This
capability is only enabled on an as-needed basis during a support call.
Notes: ƒ The remote support icon is only visible when you are
accessing the library through the BlueScale web interface.
ƒ When SpectraGuard Support needs to launch a WebEx
session to access your library, they will send you a link via
email.

77
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 4 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface

HHM Icon When the library or one of its components reaches its
maintenance threshold the Hardware Health Monitor (HHM) icon appears
in the status bar. You can click on the icon to view information about the
notification. If desired, you can send the Hardware Health Monitoring
notification and an AutoSupport Log (ASL) file to a contact person or to
SpectraGuard Support so they can review the logs and determine if any
maintenance tasks are needed to prevent future failures (see Responding to
HHM Notifications on page 93).
Note: The HHM icon only displays if an HHM threshold has been
reached. After any required tasks are complete, the threshold
can be reset. The HHM icon disappears until the next threshold
is reached.

HHM icon
Figure 26 The Status bar showing the HHM icon.

Camera Icon If the P address for the BlueScale Vision camera is entered
into the BlueScale user interface (see Enabling the Camera Icon (Optional)
on page 277), a camera icon appears in the status bar. Click on the icon to
launch the web-based Network Camera viewer and use it to observe the
interior of the library over an Ethernet network or the internet (see Using
the BlueScale Vision Camera on page 102).
Note: The Camera icon only appears on the BlueScale web interface; it
does not appear on the front panel touch screen interface.

Camera icon
Figure 27 The Status bar showing the Camera icon.

Progress Bar
When the library is busy processing a command, a horizontal progress bar
displays above the status bar. Do not use the touch screen (or access the
user interface from the BlueScale web interface) until the progress bar
disappears.

78
User Guide 91090000
Using the BlueScale User Interface

USING THE BLUESCALE USER INTERFACE


The library’s BlueScale user interface lets you set configuration options,
view library and drive information and metrics, manage media, and
monitor library operations.
Note: Unless otherwise specified, references to the user interface
screens apply to both the touch screen on the library operator
panel and the screens presented through the BlueScale web
interface.
The following sections describe the library controls and options available
through the user interface.

Topic Described beginning on...


Logging Into the User Interface page 79
Logging Off or Switching Users page 70
Entering Information page 81

Logging Into the User Interface


Before you can manage or configure the library, you must log into the
BlueScale user interface. The Login screen displays on the library operator
panel after the library completes its power-on initialization. The Login
screen also displays when you switch users.

Touch the keyboard icon


to open the soft keyboard.

Touch the icon with the stylus to


switch between letters and numbers.
Figure 28 The user interface main login screen.

79
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 4 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface

Use the following steps to log into the library.


1. If you are connecting to the library remotely, enter the library’s IP
address in the address bar of your web browser. The Login screen
displays when the connection is established.
2. Select the User text box. A cursor appears in the box.
Note: When using the touch screen on the library operator panel,
touch the keyboard icon (Figure 28) on the Login screen to
activate the soft keyboard on the library’s touch screen. Use the
stylus or your finger to select fields and to type information
using the soft keyboard.
Selecting the keyboard icon again closes the soft keyboard.
3. Type your user name (su is the default user name for a superuser).
The options and controls provided through the user interface depend
on to which user group you belong. See Configuring Library Users on
page 266 for information about user groups.
4. Type your password in the Password text box. If you log in as the
default superuser su, the password is blank (unless you changed it).
Note: By default, passwords are not required to log into the library. If
you want to password-protect access to the library, set
passwords for each user as described in Configuring Library
Users on page 266.
5. Click the Login button. After you log in, the library completes its
initialization and displays the library’s General Status screen.

Figure 29 The BlueScale user interface General Status


screen.

6. If Encryption is enabled on your library and you have set the


Encryption login password, you will be prompted to enter that
password as well (see Log Into the Encryption Application on page 313
for detailed information).

80
User Guide 91090000
Using the BlueScale User Interface

Logging Off or Switching Users


1. If a screen other than the Login screen is displayed, select the Security
toolbar to display the Security options..

Security toolbar

Switch User

Figure 30 The Security toolbar.

2. Select Switch User to display the Login screen. Select Switch User to log
out the currently logged in user and redisplay the Login screen.
3. If desired, log in again using a different user name and password.

Entering Information
Entering information on a user interface screen requires using one of the
following methods.

BlueScale Web Interface


The BlueScale web interface lets you use your computer keyboard to enter
information into the user interface (see BlueScale Web Interface on
page 70). Using the web interface is the most convenient way to enter large
amounts of information when you are configuring the library.

Important When accessing the library remotely through a web browser, do not use the Enter
key on your keyboard when making selections in the BlueScale user interface.
Various web browsers handle the Enter key differently, causing inconsistent
behavior in the BlueScale interface.
Always use your mouse to make selections and click the buttons in BlueScale
screens instead of using your keyboard.

Note: Functions that require physical interaction with the library (for
example, importing or exporting media packs) are not available
when BlueScale web interface.

81
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 4 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface

Soft Keyboard
When using the touch screen on the operator
panel, select the keyboard icon in the lower right
corner of any screen to activate the on-screen keyboard. When the
keyboard is extended, an icon in the lower right corner lets you choose
between alphabetic or numeric characters. Use a stylus or your finger to
select fields and enter alphanumeric information using the keyboard.
Touching the keyboard icon again closes the keyboard.

Use an External Keyboard and Mouse Connected to the


LCM
You can connect a standard USA-type PS2 keyboard to the keyboard
connector on the LCM (see Figure 8 on page 35). You can also connect a
PS2 mouse to the LCM and use it for making selections on the user
interface. Using an external keyboard and mouse is the most convenient
way to enter large amounts of information if you cannot use the BlueScale
web interface. The user interface options available when you use an
external keyboard connected to the LCM are the same as when you use the
library’s touch screen operator panel.

Important Not all characters on a PS2 keyboard are supported in the BlueScale user interface.
If a character does not appear on the soft keyboard, then its use is not supported.

Note: If using a non-USA type keyboard, you will need to find the
equivalent for some characters like the back slash or forward
slash.

82
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 5
Operating the Library
This chapter describes the following procedures for day-to-day operation
of your library:
Topic Described beginning on...
Turning the Library On and Off page 84
Monitoring Your Library page 87
Checking Messages page 88
Using Performance Metrics page 88
Using BlueScale Hardware Health page 92
Monitoring
Viewing Drive Status Information page 98
Viewing a Fibre Channel Partition’s page 100
World Wide Name
Using the BlueScale Vision Camera page 102
Using a USB Drive page 104
Using a Global Spare Tape Drive page 107
Using the Global Spare Tape Drive page 108
Reclaiming the Global Spare Tape Drive page 110
Restoring the Library Configuration page 111

83
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library

TURNING THE LIBRARY ON AND OFF


Before powering on the library, make sure that one or both of the library’s
power cables are plugged into AC outlets and the main AC breakers
switches on the back library are set to the on position (see Figure 6 on
page 33).

Power On the Library


Press and hold the front panel power button until the button’s LED
illuminates. Wait while the library completes its power-on sequence, which
initializes all of installed components. When initialization is complete, the
BlueScale login screen displays.

Power button

Figure 31 Press and hold the front panel power button.

Power Off the Library


Before powering off the library, use the following steps to prepare for shut-
down.
1. Use your backup software to stop any backups running to the library.
2. Use your backup software to move any cartridges that are currently in
tape drives back their storage locations.
If you cannot use your backup software, then move the cartridges as
described in Moving Media Within a Partition on page 150.
3. Pause PostScan if it is running (see Pause the PostScan Process on
page 186). Any tapes currently being scanned are returned to their
storage locations.
4. Power off the library using one of the methods described in the
following sections.

84
User Guide 91090000
Turning the Library On and Off

Using the Front Panel Power Button


To power off the library, press and hold the front panel power button until
the button’s LED starts flashing. The library begins its power-off sequence,
which allows the BlueScale firmware and components to shut down
gracefully.
Note: If you intend to leave the library powered down for an extended
length of time, set the AC breaker switches on the back of the
library to the off position.

Use the Soft Power Feature


The Soft Power feature disables the physical power button on the library
front panel and enables the soft power button on the General Status screen.
Using the Soft Power feature gives superusers exclusive control over
powering the library off, preventing other users from powering the library
off from the front panel. The Soft Power feature requires a confirmation
before power to the library is turned off.
Notes: ƒ The Soft Power feature is only available from library’s front
panel touch screen interface; it is not available through the
BlueScale web interface.
ƒ The Soft Power feature must first be enabled via the
configuration menu (see Enabling and Disabling Soft Power
on page 276). The feature can only be enabled or disabled by
a superuser
Follow these steps to power off the library using the Soft Power feature.
1. Log into the library as a superuser.
2. From the toolbar, access the General Status screen.

85
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library

3. Using the stylus, touch the blue power button on the picture of the
library.

Soft power
button

Figure 32 The Soft Power button on the General Status screen.

When the cursor comes near the button, it changes to a pointing finger,
as shown in Figure 32.
4. When you touch the button, the Soft Power Shutdown confirmation
screen displays after a brief delay. Select Continue to send a command to
the power control module (PCM) to power off the library.

Figure 33 The Soft Power Shutdown confirmation screen.

86
User Guide 91090000
Monitoring Your Library

MONITORING YOUR LIBRARY


The BlueScale user interface provides a number of tools for monitoring the
health and performance of the library, its components, and its media.
ƒ Icons and bar graphs on the General Status screen (Figure 22 on
page 72) provide at-a-glance information about the status of major
system components and resource usage, respectively.
ƒ The icons in the status bar (see Status Bar on page 76) provide
additional system-level status information.
ƒ System messages provide important information about the library and
its operation. See Checking Messages on page 88 for details.
ƒ Performance metrics let you monitor the performance of your library
and its drives. See Using Performance Metrics on page 88 for details.
ƒ Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) tracks maintenance thresholds
for key library components and alerts you when a component reaches
its maintenance threshold. See Using BlueScale Hardware Health
Monitoring on page 92 for details.
ƒ The Drive Status screens provide information about cleaning status,
firmware level, and tools for using a Global Spare drive, manually
cleaning an individual drive, and removing or replacing a drive. The
Drive Details for each Fibre Channel drive shows the World Wide
Name (WWPN) for the drive.
See Viewing Drive Status Information on page 98 and Using a Global
Spare Tape Drive on page 107 for details.
ƒ When a partition includes an F-QIP, the Shared Library Services screen
shows the WWN of the F-QIP that provides the robotic control path
(the exporting F-QIP). See Viewing a Fibre Channel Partition’s World
Wide Name on page 100 for details.
ƒ The BlueScale Vision camera lets you view the interior of the library.
See Using the BlueScale Vision Camera on page 102 for detailed
information.
ƒ Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) provides an array of tools for
monitoring the usage and health of the MLM-enabled media in the
library. See Chapter 7 – Media Lifecycle Management for detailed
information.
ƒ Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) provide tools for monitoring the
usage and health of the LTO tape drives in the library. It also provides
tools for generating reports and testing a drive. See Chapter 8 – Drive
Lifecycle Management for detailed information.

87
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library

Checking Messages
Check the library’s system messages regularly. These messages provide
important information about the library and its operation. Reviewing the
messages, which provide important information about library problems, is
also the first step in troubleshooting.
Use the following steps to view messages.
1. Log into the library.
2. Select the System Status icon on the status bar. The System Messages
screen displays.
See Status Bar on page 76 for the location and description of the System
Status icon.

Figure 34 The System Messages screen.

3. Read the message(s), and follow any recommended steps.


If you need assistance, contact SpectraGuard Support (see Contacting
Spectra Logic on page 5).
4. When you are finished reading the messages and have completed the
appropriate actions, you can select and delete individual messages or
you can delete all of the messages.

Using Performance Metrics


The library includes the following metrics for monitoring the performance
of your library and its drives. These metrics must be enabled before they
can be used (see Enabling and Disabling Performance Metrics on
page 276).
ƒ Drive Performance on page 89
ƒ Power Consumption on page 91
ƒ Storage Density on page 91

88
User Guide 91090000
Monitoring Your Library

Drive Performance
The Drive Performance metric lets you monitor the performance of your
drives. This innovative feature helps you optimize drive performance
through load-balancing, tuning your SAN, and identifying performance
bottlenecks. The Drive Performance Monitoring screen provides a
graphical display of drive performance.
The Drive Performance Monitor displays the following for the selected
drive set:
ƒ Drive performance in MB/second
ƒ Data transferred in total MBs
ƒ Summary information for the displayed graphs
Use the following steps to view the performance data for the drives
installed in the library.
1. Select General > Metrics from the toolbar menu. The screen for the last
metric you viewed displays.
2. Select the drive performance you want to view from the available
options:
ƒ Total Library
ƒ Partition n
ƒ A specific drive
3. Select either Drive Write Performance or Drive Read Performance from the
Metric pull-down menu.
Note: If you enabled or disabled the Drive Performance Monitor
option when a drive contains a cartridge, the drive is reported as
empty.

89
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library

4. Select Go. A screen showing the selected metric displays.

Figure 35 Drive Performance Monitor screen (Write


Performance shown).

5. Alternatively, you can view the Drive Performance metrics by selecting


Configuration > Drives and then selecting the Drive Performance button
in the upper right of the screen.

Figure 36 The Drives screen.

90
User Guide 91090000
Monitoring Your Library

Power Consumption
In addition to the Power bar graph on the General Status screen, the
BlueScale EnergyAudit feature provides a configurable graphical display
of the library’s power consumption.
Use the following steps to view the power consumption data for the
library.
1. Select General > Metrics from the toolbar menu. The screen for the last
metric you viewed displays.
2. Select which power consumption metric you want to view from the
Metric pull-down menu:
ƒ Power Consumption (kWh)
ƒ Power Consumption (kWh/Ft2)
ƒ Power Consumption (kWh/Ft3)
ƒ Power Consumption (kWh/TB)
3. Select Go. A screen showing the selected metric displays.

Figure 37 The Power Consumption metrics screen.

Storage Density
The Storage Density metric lets you to monitor the amount of data your
library is capable of storing based on the amount of the selected media
type is currently in the library.
Use the following steps to view the power consumption data for the
library.
1. Select General > Metrics from the toolbar menu. The screen for the last
metric you viewed displays.
2. Select Storage Density from the Metric pull-down menu.

91
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library

3. Select the media type for which you want the density metrics and the
unit of measure for the density values.
4. Select Go. The Storage Density screen showing the selected metrics
displays.

Figure 38 The Storage Density metrics screen.

Using BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring


BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) tracks maintenance
thresholds for key library components. When a component reaches the
maintenance threshold, an HHM icon displays on the status bar.

HHM icon

Figure 39 The Status bar showing the HHM icon.

ƒ To send an AutoSupport log to a contact person, see Responding to


HHM Notifications on page 93.
ƒ To view a report showing the current HHM data, see Viewing
Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) Data on page 96.

92
User Guide 91090000
Monitoring Your Library

Responding to HHM Notifications


Use the following steps to send the Hardware Health Monitoring
notification and AutoSupport Log (ASL) file to the contact person in a
predefined AutoSupport profile. You can also choose to send the ASL files
to SpectraGuard Support so they can review the logs and determine if any
maintenance tasks are needed to prevent future failures.
1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. If not already completed, configure the mail recipients who should
receive AutoSupport information. Also configure one or more
AutoSupport profiles.
ƒ Mail recipients—See Configure Mail Recipients on page 251. At a
minimum, configure SpectraGuard Support as a mail recipient if
you want the library to email AutoSupport ticket requests to Spectra
Logic.
ƒ AutoSupport profiles—See Configure AutoSupport Profiles on
page 251. You can configure one of the mail recipients to receive
critical alarm log sets automatically sent by the library.
3. Select the HHM icon (see Figure 39). The Hardware Health Monitoring
screen displays.

Figure 40 The Hardware Health Monitoring screen.

4. If you want to save the AutoSupport ticket information to a USB drive,


insert the USB drive into the USB port on the LCM (see Using a USB
Drive on page 104).
Note: The option to save the ticket to USB is only available if you plug
a USB drive in to the USB port before you select Send
AutoSupport Ticket.

93
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library

5. Select Send AutoSupport Ticket. The main AutoSupport screen displays.

Figure 41 The main AutoSupport screen.

6. Select Send Log Set. The Select Profile to Send Log Set screen displays.

Figure 42 AutoSupport Profiles screen.

7. Click the Select button next to the profile for the main contact person
for HHM issues. The Select Ticket Type screen displays.

Figure 43 The Select Ticket Type screen.

The Create a New Hardware Health Monitor ticket option is automatically


selected. The options for entering an existing support ticket number
and a problem description are not available.

94
User Guide 91090000
Monitoring Your Library

8. If you do not need to make any changes to the contact person’s


information for this support ticket, skip to Step 9.
If you need to temporarily change the contact person’s information for
this ticket, select Profile Data. The Profile Summary screen displays (see
Figure 163 on page 260). Make any necessary changes in the Profile
Summary screen. Select Use Settings to save your changes and return to
the Select Ticket Type screen.
9. Select Next. The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen displays.

Figure 44 The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen.

10. Verify that all information is correct.


ƒ To save the ticket information to a USB drive instead of emailing it
from the library, check the box at the top of the screen (shown in
Figure 44).
Note: The USB option is only available if you plugged a USB drive in
to the LCM’s USB port in Step 4 on page 93.
ƒ If all of the information is correct, proceed to Step 11.
ƒ If something needs to be changed, select Previous to return to the
Select Ticket Type screen and make any necessary changes.

95
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library

11. Select Submit to send the Hardware Health Monitor ticket to the
selected recipient. Select Cancel to return to the AutoSupport Profiles
screen.
A progress screen indicates that the ticket request (with log
information) is being sent. When completed, the AutoSupport Profiles
screen displays.

Viewing Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) Data


The advanced utility called HHM: View Data generates a report showing
the current status of the HHM counters. This information includes
information about the following:
ƒ Library serial number and name (if configured)
ƒ Information about key library components monitored by HHM,
including the type of reminder generated when the component reaches
its maintenance threshold
ƒ Transporter moves: Drive To Drive Moves, Drive To Slot Moves, Slot To
Slot Moves, Slot To Drive Moves, Tap In Moves, and Tap Out Move.

In addition to the HHM: View Data utility, two additional HHM utilities configure
Caution the HHM counters and thresholds for the monitored components. Do not change
the values for any counters or thresholds unless specifically instructed to do so by
SpectraGuard Support.

Use the following steps to view the current HHM data.


1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
3. If you want to save the HHM report to a USB drive, insert the USB drive
into the LCM’s USB port; otherwise, skip to the next step.
Note: The option to save the HHM report to USB is only displayed if
you plug a USB drive in to the LCM’s USB port before you select
Show Advanced (see Using a USB Drive on page 104).
4. Select Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen
displays.
5. Select Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced
utilities.

96
User Guide 91090000
Monitoring Your Library

6. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select HHM: View Data.
The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility.

Figure 45 The HHM: View Data utility.

7. If you want to save the results from the utility, use the check boxes at
the top of the screen to select the location; otherwise skip to Step 8.

Selecting this
option... Saves the report...
Mail results to As an attachment to an email sent to the specified mail recipient. Use the drop-
down list to select the recipient for the report file.
To send the email with the attached library configuration file to someone who is
not already listed as a library user, you must first configure that person as an
email recipient (see Configure Mail Recipients on page 251).
Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient
unless SpectraGuard Support specifically instructs you to do so. Spectra Logic
does not save emailed HHM report files unless they are specifically requested
for troubleshooting.
Save results to To the library’s compact flash card in the LCM.
Compact Flash file Note: Select this option only if specifically instructed to do so by SpectraGuard
Support.
Save to USB To a USB drive connected to the USB port on the LCM.
Note: This option is only available if you inserted a USB drive in Step 3 on
page 96.

97
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library

8. Select Run Utility.


After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen displays the current HHM
data. Scroll as necessary to view all of the data.

Figure 46 The HHM: View Data Utility Results screen.

9. If you chose to save the file to a USB drive, a message displays showing
file name for the trace file (tracen.txt, where n increments each time
the file is saved to the same location).
10. Select Previous to return to the list of advanced utilities.

Viewing Drive Status Information


The drives status icon on the General Status screen indicates the overall
status of the library’s drives. If the status icon indicates that a drive is
experiencing a problem, view the Drive Details screen detailed information
about as specific drive. The Drive Details screen includes the drive
firmware version and manufacture’s serial number, as well as more
detailed status information. From the Drive Details screen you can access
the Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) report for the drive.
1. Select Configuration > Drives. The Drives screen displays (see Figure 36
on page 90.

98
User Guide 91090000
Monitoring Your Library

2. Select Detail next to the drive you want to check. The Drive Details
screen displays.

Figure 47 The Drive Details screen.

For Fibre Channel drives, the Drive Details screen also shows the
drive’s World Wide Name (WWN).
Note: The WWN is actually the World Wide Node Name (WWNN) for
the drive.
Beginning with BlueScale 10.4, the format for the drive WWN is:
2n xy 00 90 a5 00 zz zz, where n, x, y, and zz zz are variables.
Variable Equals...
n The port number, which is determined as follows:
Port A = the frame number (always=1)
Port B = the frame number + 1
x The DBA number (1 – 6), as numbered from the bottom of the
library to the top
y The drive number in the DBA (1 – 4)
zz zz The frame ID of the library, where each z is a hexadecimal
number from 0 – F.

In Figure 47 the WWNN indicates that the drive is located in DBA 1,


and connected to the network using Port A.
3. From the Drive Details screen select DLM to access the Drive Lifecycle
Management (DLM) report for the drive (see View a Detailed Heath
Report on page 198).

99
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library

4. Use the information on the Drive Details screen and the DLM report to
troubleshoot drive problems. If the drive is in an error state, contact
SpectraGuard Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
ƒ Troubleshooting All Drive Types on page 364
ƒ Troubleshooting LTO Tape Drives on page 365
ƒ Troubleshooting SDLT Tape Drives on page 379
ƒ Troubleshooting RXT Drives on page 381

Viewing a Fibre Channel Partition’s World Wide Name


When monitoring connections to multiple libraries through a Fibre
Channel switch, knowing the World Wide Name (WWN) for a data
partition is useful for identifying a particular library.
Note: Each data partition defined in the library appears as an
independent library connected to the Fibre Channel arbitrated
loop or fabric.
To view the WWN for each data partition configured in the library, select
Configuration > Partitions. The Fibre Channel WWN for each data
partition is shown on the Shared Library Services screen.

Figure 48 The WWN assigned to the partition.

100
User Guide 91090000
Monitoring Your Library

The format for the partition WWN is: 2xyf0090a500zzzz, where x, y, and
zzzz are variables.
Variable Equals...
x 1 – when the library is connected through Port A on the F-QIP
2 – when the library is connected through Port B on the F-QIP
Note: The Shared Library Services screen only shows the WWN for
Port A of the F-QIP, regardless of whether Port B is in use or not.
y The DBA number (1 – 6), as numbered from the bottom of the
library to the top
zzzz The frame ID of the library, where each z is a hexadecimal
number from 0 – F.

For example, in Figure 48 the WWN for Partition 1 indicates that the
exporting F-QIP is located in DBA 1 and that it is connected to the Fibre
Channel arbitrated loop or fabric using Port A.
Notes: ƒ When one of the direct-attach Fibre Channel drives in the
partition provides the robotics control path, the partition
WWN is the same as the drive’s WWN (see Viewing Drive
Status Information on page 98).
ƒ The partition WWN is actually the World Wide Port Name
(WWPN) for port on the exporting F-QIP.
ƒ If multiple partitions use the same F-QIP port to provide the
robotics control path, all of the partitions have the same
World Wide Name (WWN).
ƒ If Port A and Port B are used by separate partitions, the
WWNs for the two partitions are identical except for the
second digit from the left (x). Only the WWN for Port A is
shown on the Shared Library Services screen.
ƒ See Spectra Logic Knowledge Base article 373 for more
information about the WWNs for F-QIPs.

101
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library

Using the BlueScale Vision Camera


The BlueScale Vision camera and web-based BlueScale Vision viewer lets
you see the interior of the library to observe import / export operations,
tape mounts, cartridge moves, and robotic operations in real time.
Note: Using the camera icon to connect to the BlueScale Vision viewer
is not required. You can also connect to the viewer directly by
entering the IP address for the desired camera in your web
browser’s Address bar.
Use the following steps to launch BlueScale Vision viewer application.
1. Connect an Ethernet cable from camera’s Ethernet port on the back of
the library to an Ethernet network.

BlueScale Vision
camera connector

Figure 49 Location of the camera Ethernet port.

2. Connect to the BlueScale Vision viewer application.


Using the Camera Icon
a. Using a remote connection, log into the library’s BlueScale web
interface using a standard web browser (see Logging Into the User
Interface on page 79).
b. Select the Camera icon in the status bar.

Camera icon
Figure 50 The Status bar showing the Camera icon.

Note: The camera icon used to launch the BlueScale Vision viewer is
not present until you enter the IP address for the camera in the
System Configuration screen (see Enabling the Camera Icon
(Optional) on page 277).

102
User Guide 91090000
Monitoring Your Library

Using a Web Browser


a. Determine the IP address of the camera (see Setting the Camera IP
Address on page 290).
b. Enter the camera’s IP address in your browser’s Address field.
3. The start page for the BlueScale Vision viewer opens in a new web
page.

Figure 51 The BlueScale Vision viewer start page.

4. Select View Video to see the camera’s view of the library’s interior.

Figure 52 The interior of the library as viewed by the


BlueScale Vision camera.

103
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library

Buttons on the screen let you control the motion of the camera lens.
Click this
button... To...
Move the camera lens through the Preset positions in the sequence
defined by the Camera Administrator.
Pan the camera lens from left to right automatically.

Move the camera lens to the Motion Detection Preset position.

Point the camera lens to the position corresponding to the arrow


on the button. There may a short delay after clicking the desired
icon. Wait a couple of seconds instead of clicking again.

5. Read the BlueScale Vision Camera User’s Guide, included on the Product
Documentation and Software CD that came with your library, for detailed
information about configuring and using the BlueScale Vision camera.
This guide also describes installing and using the camera’s Viewing/
Recording Utility.
To view the camera documentation:
a. Insert the library’s Product Documentation and Software CD in the
CD/DVD drive of a Windows-based computer. Adobe® Reader®
launches automatically and opens the welcome.pdf file.
b. Select the BlueScale Vision Camera link on the opening page to
display links to the camera documentation and descriptions of the
camera software included on the CD.

USING A USB DRIVE


You can plug a USB drive into the USB port on the library’s operator panel
or into the LCM to copy the following types of information to and from the
library.

Use Description
Configuration Saving and restoring the library configuration and MLM database.
information
AutoSupport tickets Saving AutoSupport tickets and log files
Traces Saving results of traces run on the library and its components.
Firmware Transferring firmware to the library for updating the library and its
components.
Encryption export Exporting a BlueScale encryption key for safekeeping.
Encryption import Importing a previously exported BlueScale encryption key

104
User Guide 91090000
Using a USB Drive

Continuing Library Operations While Using a USB Drive


When using a USB drive, keep the following requirements in mind:

It is... to continue library operations, such as data backup, while...


Safe exporting or importing a BlueScale encryption key using a USB drive.
saving library configurations and other information to a USB drive.
capturing traces (trace results are the data most often saved to a USB drive).
Not Safe restoring a saved library configuration and other information from a USB drive.
the library is performing a firmware update using a firmware package
previously copied to the library.

Do not run backups while the library is performing a firmware update. Updated
Caution components automatically reset (including a library reset) when updates are
complete, which could interrupt a backup operation.

Connecting a USB Drive to the LCM


Notes: ƒ Not all USB drives are compatible with the library. If you are
unable to access a USB drive from the library, remove it and
use a different one. If the LCM stops responding after you
insert an incompatible USB drive, reboot the LCM as
described in Resetting the LCM on page 338.
ƒ Plug the USB drive into the LCM before beginning a
procedure that reads or writes data to allow time for device
recognition. For many utilities, the option to read or write
data from a USB drive is not available if one has not been
plugged into the LCM before you select the utility.
ƒ Do not leave a USB drive plugged into the LCM indefinitely,
unless directed to do so by SpectraGuard Support.
Use the following steps to connect a USB drive to the LCM.
1. Locate the LCM (see Figure 4 on page 30).
2. Plug the USB drive into the USB port on the LCM.

USB port

Figure 53 Location of the USB port on the LCM.

105
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library

Saving Data From the Library to a USB Drive


You can save (upload) the following types of data from the library to a USB
drive:

This type of data... Saves...


Library The library configuration whenever you modify the configuration of the library
configurations or a partition. The library gives you the option to save the configuration
whenever you create or modify a partition. The library user interface also
includes a utility for saving the configuration to a USB drive. See Backing Up
the Library Configuration on page 285 for more detailed information.
MLM reports The MLM reports so you can maintain an external record of the health of the
media in your library. See Generating Media Lifecycle Management Reports on
page 175 for information about the types of reports you can generate.
MLM database A backup of the MLM database. Backup the MLM database regularly so that
you can easily restore it instead of rebuilding it in the event of a disaster. See
Backing Up the MLM Database on page 187 for detailed information.
Note: The MLM database also includes the Drive Lifecycle Management data.
BlueScale An exported encryption key. Export encryption keys as soon as possible after
encryption keys you create them. Store the exported keys in a safe, secure location so that you
can import a key back into the library if needed. Exporting and Protecting Keys
on page 320 provides instructions for exporting BlueScale encryption keys.
System and System logs and AutoSupport logs (ASLs) for use when troubleshooting library,
AutoSupport logs drive, or media problems.
Trace results Trace results, which include diagnostic information that can be used to
troubleshoot library problems. Trace results saved to a USB drive can be
reviewed from any device that can read data from a USB drive. See Capturing
Traces on page 334 for additional information.

106
User Guide 91090000
Using a Global Spare Tape Drive

Copying Data From a USB Drive to the Library


You can copy (download) the following types of data from a USB drive to
the library:

Data Description
Firmware package Save downloaded firmware package updates to USB drive and then copy the
updates package to the library. The library executes the updates after they are copied to
the library (see Updating Library Firmware on page 388).
CAUTION! Wait until all currently running backup processes are complete
before executing a firmware update. If necessary, use your backup software to
stop the backup processes.
Saved library Use a previously saved library configuration to restore a lost configuration. (see
configuration Restoring the Library Configuration on page 111).
You can also copy a previously emailed Auto Save Library Configuration,
which contains the MLM database to a USB drive and use it to restore the
library (see Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File on page 111).
MLM database Use a previously saved backup to restore the MLM database instead of
rebuilding the database by loading each cartridge into a drive (see Restoring the
MLM Database on page 190).
Exported BlueScale Import a deleted an encryption key from the library so that you can decrypt
encryption key data stored on cartridges that were encrypted with the deleted key (see
Restoring Encrypted Data on page 326).

USING A GLOBAL SPARE TAPE DRIVE


The Global Spare option lets you replace a failed drive remotely using a
spare drive in the library. You simply configure an installed drive to
designate it as a replacement (spare) so it is available, if needed. Using a
Global Spare allows you to continue your backup operations and replace
the failed drive the next time you are physically present at the library.
Requirements Before you can use the Global Spare option, the following
requirements must be met.
ƒ The Global Spare option is only available for direct-attach Fibre
Channel tape drives.
ƒ A Global Spare drive of the same technology generation as the failed
drive must be available. For example, if the partition uses direct-attach
Fibre Channel LTO-4 drives, a direct-attach Fibre Channel LTO-3 drive
cannot be used as a spare for that partition.
ƒ The library partition with the failed drive must be idle with respect to
the failed drive before the Global Spare drive is used.
ƒ If the only available Global Spare drive is in use by the MLM
PostScan™ process, you must pause PostScan to make the spare drive
available. See Using PostScan on page 182 for detailed information.

107
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library

Setup. The Global Spare tape drive must already be configured in the
partition where the failed drive is located (see Configure Global Spare Tape
Drives on page 213).

Important The tape drives that are configured as Global Spares must be connected to the
network. If they are not connected to the network, they will not be accessible to the
application software.
You may need to reconfigure your switch to access the spare tape drive.

Backup Application Guidelines Follow these backup application


guidelines:
ƒ Backup Exec™ v12.5 software running on a Windows server—After
sparing or unsparing a tape drive, you must restart the Backup Exec
Device and Media Service for the software to function properly with
the spared tape drive.
ƒ General guidelines—In a few rare cases, your backup may fail if a
cartridge is loaded into any tape drive in the partition at the same time
that the library is in the process of assigning a Global Spare tape drive
for use (as described in this section). Most applications will initiate the
backup again, but some will fail the backup operation. If your backup
operation fails, wait for the library to complete the Global Spare
assignment and re-start the backup.

Using the Global Spare Tape Drive


Follow these steps to use a Global Spare tape drive as a temporary
replacement for a failed tape drive.
1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions to display the
Shared Library Services screen.

Figure 54 The Shared Library Services screen with a Global


Spare.

108
User Guide 91090000
Using a Global Spare Tape Drive

3. Select Global Spare > Use Spare to display the Global Spare Usage
screen and substitute the partition’s spared drive for the failed drive.

Figure 55 The Global Spare Usage screen (Use Spare).

Notes: ƒ When you select the drive to replace, the BlueScale firmware
disables the failed drive and configures a Global Spare drive
to report the same WWN and Serial Number as the failed
drive.
ƒ The Global Spare drive “logically” replaces the failed drive,
which can then be removed and replaced the next time you
are physically at the library.
ƒ If you have more than one available Global Spare tape drive,
the library automatically selects a drive in no particular order.
4. Wait for the library to complete the sparing operation.
5. If desired, select Configuration > Drives to view the Drives screen. The
drive icons on the screen change to indicate the failed drive and the
Global spare that replaced it.

Failed drive

Available
Global Spare
drive

Global Spare
replacing
failed drive

Figure 56 The Drives screen with a failed drive replaced by a Global Spare.

109
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library

6. Use your backup application to bring the new tape drive online. Refer
to your backup application documentation for instructions.

Important Replace the failed tape drive as soon as possible and reconfigure the spare tape
drive to return it to a Global Spare configuration.

Reclaiming the Global Spare Tape Drive


Follow these steps to begin using the replacement drive and return the
Global Spare to the pool of available spare drives.
1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. Replace the failed tape drive with the new tape drive that you received
from Spectra Logic (see Adding or Replacing a Drive on page 419).
3. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
4. Stop all backup application activity to the tape drive. Refer to your
backup application documentation for instructions.
5. Ensure that the Global Spare tape drive does not contain a cartridge. If
necessary, use your backup software to eject the cartridge the tape drive
and return it to its slot. Refer to your backup application
documentation for instructions.
6. Take the failed tape drive offline. Refer to your backup application
documentation for instructions.
7. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions to display the
Shared Library Services screen.
8. Select Global Spare > Undo Spare to display the Global Spare Usage
screen and make the spared drive available for use as a spare for
another drive.

Figure 57 The Global Spare Usage screen (Undo Spare).

Note: The BlueScale firmware disables the spare and reconfigures the
original tape drive back into the partition. The Global Spare is
then available to be used again, as needed.
9. Use your backup application to bring the newly installed tape drive
online. Refer to your backup application documentation for
instructions.

110
User Guide 91090000
Restoring the Library Configuration

RESTORING THE LIBRARY CONFIGURATION


If you have valid backups of the library’s configuration and MLM
database, you can use them to restore the library in the event of a disaster.
You can also uses these backups to restore the library if problems require
you to replace the LCM or the LCM’s compact flash card.
ƒ Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File
ƒ Restoring the Library Configuration Using a Saved Configuration on
page 115
ƒ Restoring the MLM Database on page 117

Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File


The advanced utility called Restore Library Configuration From Auto Save
lets you restore the library configuration and MLM database using the
auto-save configuration file that the library generates automatically (see
Use the Auto Save Configuration Feature on page 286).

Before restoring your system using the auto-save file, check the time stamp
Caution included in the file name to ensure that you have the most current file.

Important The library does not automatically save a backup when you make changes to any
of the library configuration settings other than those for partitions. Changes will be
saved during the next weekly automatic configuration save operation.

Restore the Library Configuration and MLM Database


Use the following steps to restore the library configuration and MLM
database using an auto-saved configuration file. If the auto-save
configuration file is not available on the LCM compact flash, use the auto-
save file you saved to a USB drive or sent as an email attachment.
1. If you plan to restore using the zip file containing the auto-save file that
was sent as an email attachment, use the following instructions to copy
it to a USB drive; otherwise, skip to Step 2.
a. Create a folder called \autocfgsave on a USB drive.
b. Copy the zip file you received in the email to the \autocfgsave
folder on the USB drive.
c. Connect the USB drive to the USB port on the LCM before
continuing.
2. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
3. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.

111
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library

4. Select Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen


displays.
5. Select Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced
utilities.
6. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select Restore Library
Configuration from Auto Save. The screen refreshes to show the details
for the utility.

Figure 58 The Restore Library Configuration from Auto Save


utility.

7. Use the Select a restore time stamp drop-down list to choose the auto-
save file you want to use. The auto-save files are named
<date-time>cfg.zip, where <date-time> is the time stamp for when
the file was created.
Unless you have replaced the LCM or its compact flash, the first file
listed (\hard disk\lc\autocfgsave) is the auto-save zip file stored
on the LCM compact flash.
Note: If available, the auto-save zip file stored on the LCM compact
flash always contains the most recently saved library
configuration information and MLM database.
8. Select Run Utility.
After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen appears, showing that the
configuration was restored.

112
User Guide 91090000
Restoring the Library Configuration

Restore Other Configuration Changes


The library does not automatically save a backup when you make changes
to any of the library configuration settings other than those for partitions. If
you have a manual backup of the library configuration that is more current
than the auto-save configuration file you used, you can use it to restore the
updated configuration (see Restoring the Library Configuration Using a
Saved Configuration on page 115). If you do not have a manual backup
available, you will need to restore the following changes manually:
ƒ If you made configuration changes after the creation date of the auto-
save file you used, you will need to use the options in the Configuration
menu to repeat those changes after the restore is complete.
ƒ If you entered option keys after the creation date of the auto-save file
you used, you will need to use the Option Enablement pane of the
System Configuration screen to re-enter those keys (see Enable the
Option on page 271).
ƒ If you imported magazines into empty chambers in a partition’s storage
pool after the auto-save file you used was generated, the library does
not recognize the imported magazines as belonging to the partition
after you restore the configuration. Instead, the library notifies you that
there are unused magazines in the free pool.
Use the partition wizard to update the library inventory to reflect the
correct number of magazines assigned to the partition.
1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions. The Shared
Library Services screen displays.
3. Select either Summary or Edit for the partition to which the unassigned
magazines should belong. Either option can be used when modifying a
partition.
Note: If you select Summary, select Edit on the Partition Setting screen
to modify the partition.

113
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library

4. Select Next to advance through the partition configuration screens until


you reach the Chambers and Drives screen.

Figure 59 The Chambers and Drives screen.

5. Decrease the number of storage chambers assigned to the partition by


the number of missing magazines.
6. Select Next to advance through the remainder of the screens without
making any additional changes until you reach the Save Library
Configuration screen.
7. Select Save. The Share Library Services screen redisplays.
8. Repeat Step 2 through Step 6, this time increasing the number of
storage chambers assigned to the partition by the number of missing
magazines.

114
User Guide 91090000
Restoring the Library Configuration

9. Review the information on the screen and confirm that all settings are
correct for this partition’s configuration.
ƒ If the configuration information is correct, proceed to Step 10.
ƒ If the configuration information is not correct, either:
ƒ Select Cancel to configure the partition again from the beginning.
ƒ Select Previous to move backward through the configuration
screens until you reach the settings that need correction. Make
any necessary corrections, then select Next to move forward
through the screens and return to the Save Partition screen.
10. Select Save. The library requires several minutes to store the
configuration information, after which the Shared Library Services
screen redisplays.
Note: When you make a change to a partition, the library generates an
auto-configuration file and saves it to the LCM compact flash. If
you configured the auto-save email option, an email containing
the updated library configuration and the MLM data base will
be sent to the specified recipient (see Enabling Email for the
Automatic Configuration Save Feature on page 282).

Restoring the Library Configuration Using a Saved Configuration


If you previously saved the library configuration to a USB drive or
uploaded the configuration to a file on a computer (see Back Up the
Library Configuration Manually on page 286), use the following steps to
restore the configuration.
1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
3. Select Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen
displays.
4. Select Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show the Advanced
Utilities.

115
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library

5. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select one of the
following, as applicable for your situation. The screen refreshes to show
the details for the selected restore utility.
Note: The Advanced Utilities screen lists the utilities in alphabetical
order. The following table lists the utilities in most-frequently-
used order.
Use this Restore
Option... To...
Restore Library Use this option to restore auto-save configuration file that you previously
Configuration from stored on a USB drive (see Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File on
Auto Save page 111).
Note: The auto-save configuration file contains both the library configuration
and the MLM database.
Restore Library Use this option to restore a library configuration file previously stored on a
Configuration from USB drive.
USB Note: Before starting this procedure, insert the USB drive into the USB port on
the LCM.
Upload Backup Select the Upload Backup Configuration button at the top of the screen to upload
Configuration a b a configuration file that you previously saved to a location that is accessible to
the computer you are using to a temporary location in the library memory.
When the upload is complete, you must then run the Restore Library
Configuration from Backup Configuration File utility to restore the library
configuration.
The Upload Backup Configuration button is only available when you access the
library through the BlueScale web interface.

Restore Library Use this option to complete the restore process after using the Upload Backup
Configuration from Configuration button to upload a saved configuration file from a computer.
Uploaded File b Note: This option is used in conjunction with Upload Backup Configuration,
which must be run first.
a. This option may not be possible until you configure your library network settings.
b. This option is only available when you access the library using the BlueScale web interface.

6. Select Run Utility.


After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen appears, showing that the
configuration file was uploaded and/or the configuration restored.
7. If you imported magazines into empty chambers in a partition’s storage
pool after you generated the backup configuration file, see Restore
Other Configuration Changes on page 113.

116
User Guide 91090000
Restoring the Library Configuration

Restoring the MLM Database


Use the following steps to restore the MLM database from a previously
saved backup that was created using the Save MLM Database utility (see
Backing Up the MLM Database on page 187).
1. If you plan to restore using the MLM database backup file that was sent
as an email attachment, use the following instructions to copy the file to
a USB drive; otherwise, skip to Step 2.
a. Create a folder called SavedMLMDB on a USB drive.
b. Copy the cminfo_<date-time>.dat file to the SavedMLMDB folder
on the USB drive.
2. If you plan to restore the MLM database using a backup file stored on a
USB drive, plug the USB drive into the USB port on the LCM before
continuing.
3. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
4. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
5. Select Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen
displays.
6. Select Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show the advanced Utilities
screen.
7. Scroll down and select Restore MLM Database from USB. The screen
refreshes to show the details for the utility.

Figure 60 The Restore MLM Database from USB utility.

8. Use the drop-down list to select the file name of the backup you want to
use for the restore.
9. Select Run Utility. After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen displays,
showing that the database was restored.

117
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library

Notes

118
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 6
Importing, Exporting, and Moving
Media
This chapter describes the following procedures for importing, exporting,
and moving the media used in your T200, T380, and T680.

Topic Described beginning on...


Understanding the Media Inventory page 120
Viewing the Partition Inventory page 120
Preparing Media for Use page 123
Tape Media page 123
RXT Media page 126
Importing Media and Cleaning Cartridges page 127
Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool page 128
or a Cleaning Partition
Importing Media into a New Partition page 135
Exporting or Exchanging Media page 140
Exporting or Exchanging Media in a page 141
Data Partition
Exporting or Exchanging Cartridges in a page 144
Cleaning Partition
Importing Media To or Exporting Media page 147
From a Specific Location
Moving Media Within a Partition page 150
Locate the Desired Media page 150
Move the Media page 152
Updating the Media Inventory page 154

119
Chapter 6 — Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media

UNDERSTANDING THE MEDIA INVENTORY


The inventory is a record of all the media stored in the library and its
current location (for example, in a specific slot in a TeraPack magazine, in a
drive, or in the TAP). As media is imported into the library, the bar-code
reader on the transporter reads the bar-code labels on the individual
cartridges, the magazines, and RXT media packs (if used). The library uses
this bar-code information to update its physical inventory, which is stored
on the LCM compact flash card.
The Inventory screen, available from the General toolbar, lets you view the
library’s physical inventory information. You can determine whether a
specific piece of media is located in a data partition’s storage pool, its entry/
exit pool, a drive, or the TAP. You can also identify cleaning cartridges in
any cleaning partitions and determine whether they are expended. See
Chapter 2 – Architecture Overview, beginning on page 45 for information
about partitions and pools.
The Inventory screen also lets you find, select, and move media from one
location to another within a partition.
Note: Media can refer to either tape cartridges or RXT media packs.

VIEWING THE PARTITION INVENTORY


The Inventory screen, available from the General toolbar, lets you view the
library’s physical inventory information. You can determine whether a
specific piece of media is located in the storage pool, the entry/exit pool, a
drive, or the TAP.
Note: See Moving Media Within a Partition on page 150 for
information about using the Inventory screen to find, select, and
move media from one location to another within a partition.

120
User Guide 91090000
Viewing the Partition Inventory

Use the following steps to view a partition’s inventory.


1. From the toolbar menu, select General > Inventory. The Inventory
screen displays, showing the full inventory of the partition that was last
viewed.
Note: The Inventory screen only displays information for the currently
selected partition.

Current Partition

Figure 61 The Inventory screen.

2. If you want to view the inventory information for a partition other than
the one currently displayed, select the desired partition from the
Partition drop-down list.
3. Select Go to display inventory information for the selected partition.

121
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 6 — Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media

4. From the Source drop-down list, select the type of location for which
you want to view the inventory, then select Go.
The Source pane refreshes to display a list of the media for the
requested location type. The list shows the slot number (if the location
contains a magazine) and the bar-code label information for the media
in that location. See Moving Media Within a Partition on page 150 for
information about the Source and Destination options.
Note: If an asterisk (*) appears next to the slot number in the source list
for a cleaning partition, the cleaning cartridge is expired.

List media
by source

Figure 62 Select the Source of the media you want to move.

ƒ View Source Slot —Type the number of the slot you want to view,
then select Go. The Source inventory list refreshes to show the
requested slot selected at the top of the Source list.
ƒ Find by Barcode —Type the barcode information for the cartridge
you want to locate, then select Find. The Source inventory list
refreshes to show the requested media selected at the top of the
Source list
Notes: ƒ Make sure that you type the bar-code label information
correctly to avoid selecting the wrong cartridge.
ƒ Only the slots beginning with the first one displayed in the
source list are searched. To ensure that all of the slots are
searched, scroll to the top of the source list before selecting
Find.

122
User Guide 91090000
Preparing Media for Use

PREPARING MEDIA FOR USE


Before loading media into the library, make sure that it is properly labeled
and that the write-protect switch is properly set. For normal backup
operations, the write protect switch is set to the write-enabled or unlocked
position. The write-protect switch is typically set to the write-protect or
locked position when the media is removed from the library for storage
and during restore operations.

Important Before loading media into the library, allow it to stabilize to the ambient
environment for 24 hours.

Tape Media
Cartridges (tape media) are stored in TeraPack magazines while they are
inside the library. For best performance, use Spectra Logic Certified Media,
which guarantees media compatibility and the media itself over the
media’s lifetime. To learn more about the tape media supported by the
library, see Tape Drive and Media Specifications on page 462.
When preparing tape media for use (both data cartridge and cleaning
cartridges), keep the following in mind:
ƒ To ensure that the library can properly maintain its media inventory,
make sure that all cartridges have unique bar-code labels.
For your convenience, MLM-enabled media, like all Spectra Logic
Certified Media, is available pre-labeled with sequential bar-code
labels. Optional custom bar-code sequences can be ordered, if desired.
Each magazine holds up to 10 LTO or 9 SDLT cartridges. Maintenance
TeraPack magazines pre-loaded with Spectra Logic Certified cleaning
cartridges are also available.
ƒ For LTO-3 or LTO-4 data and cleaning cartridges, Spectra Logic
recommends that you use only MLM-enabled Spectra Logic Certified
Media to take advantage of the library’s Media Lifecycle Management
(MLM) features. See Chapter 7 – Media Lifecycle Management for
detailed information about using MLM to monitor the health of data
and cleaning cartridges.
ƒ You can read data from unencrypted LTO-2 or LTO-3 cartridges using
an encryption-enabled LTO-4 drive. You cannot write data to these
cartridges using an encryption-enabled LTO-4 drive.

123
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 6 — Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media

ƒ If you plan to use Auto Drive Clean, the cleaning cartridges in the
cleaning partition must be identified with “CLN” at the beginning of
the bar-code sequence on their labels. This requirement applies to both
standard and custom bar-code labels. The cleaning cartridges must be
stored in Spectra Maintenance TeraPack magazines, which are
identified by Spectra-unique labels.
The library automatically prevents importing cleaning cartridges and
magazines that are not properly identified into a cleaning partition by
reopening the TAP door without moving the magazine into the
cleaning partition.

Important The cleaning cartridges in the cleaning partition are inaccessible to the application
software running on the host. Make sure you disable any automated drive cleaning
done by the software to prevent repeated requests to import a cleaning cartridge.

ƒ If your backup software supports automated drive cleaning and you


have not associated a cleaning partition with the data partition, store a
TeraPack magazine containing one or more cleaning cartridges in the
data partition’s storage pool. The backup software can then access the
cleaning cartridges when needed.
Before importing cartridges into the library, prepare and load the
individual cartridges into a TeraPack magazine as follows:
1. If your cartridges are unlabeled, prepare and affix a bar-code label to
each cartridge. Position each label in the indented area on the cartridge,
as illustrated in Figure 63. See Bar-Code Label Specifications for Half-
Inch Media on page 468 for detailed information about bar-code labels.
Note: Depending on the type of cartridge, the position of the label area
may differ from that shown in Figure 63.

bar-code label

Write-protect switch

Figure 63 Attach bar-code labels to cartridges and check write-protect


switch setting (LTO cartridge shown).

124
User Guide 91090000
Preparing Media for Use

2. Depending on whether you plan to write data to a cartridge or restore


data from a cartridge, make sure the write-protect switch on the
cartridge is set for the desired operation.
Note: Cleaning cartridges do not have a write-protect switch.

If the switch... the cartridge is...


does not cover the opening write-enabled. Data can be written to or read
from the tape.
does cover the opening write-protected. Data can be read from the tape.
Data cannot be written to or erased from the tape.

3. Insert the prepared cartridges into the magazine. Make sure that the
cartridges are oriented with the hub side toward the front of the
magazine.

Important Do not put data cartridges in a Maintenance TeraPack magazine. The Maintenance
TeraPack magazine, with properly labeled cleaning cartridges, can only be used in
a cleaning partition.

Cartridge bar-code label

Cartridge hub

Front of TeraPack magazine


(note textured surface on each side)

Alignment guides

Figure 64 Insert prepared cartridges into the TeraPack magazine


(LTO cartridges shown).

125
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 6 — Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media

RXT Media

Important RXT drives and RXT media packs are supported as legacy devices. They are no
longer available for purchase.

Depending on whether you plan to write data to the RXT media or restore
data from a the RXT media, set the write-protect switch for the desired
operation before you import the RXT media pack into library.

Bar-code label
Write-protect switch

Figure 65 Setting the RXT media pack write-protect switch.

To set the switch, use a small flat-head screwdriver to move the switch to
either the unlocked or locked position, as desired.
Icon Meaning Use
Unlocked Position the switch next to the Unlocked icon. Data can be
written to the pack.
Locked Position the switch next to the Locked icon. Data cannot be
written to the pack (that is, the pack is write-protected).

126
User Guide 91090000
Importing Media and Cleaning Cartridges

IMPORTING MEDIA AND CLEANING CARTRIDGES


This section provides instructions for the following import/export
procedures:
Topic Described beginning on...
Overview of Import and Export Operations this page
Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or page 128
a Cleaning Partition
Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool page 129
Importing Cleaning Cartridges into the page 132
Cleaning Partition
Importing Media into a New Partition page 135
Importing Media into the Storage Pool page 136
for a Partition
Preparing the Entry/Exit Pool (for Tape page 139
Media Only)

Overview of Import and Export Operations


Moving media into the library (importing) and out of the library (exporting)
are the primary interactions you will have with the physical library. Import
and export operations must always be performed from the local user
interface, either using the library touch screen or using a monitor, keyboard,
and mouse connected directly to the LCM (see Figure 8 on page 35).
Media includes both the TeraPack magazines and the individual cartridges
in them. It may also include RXT media packs and cleaning cartridges that
are periodically used during tape drive maintenance. Cartridges are
always imported and exported using a TeraPack magazine, whether you
are moving an individual cartridge or a group of cartridges.
Notes: ƒ You can only import TeraPack magazines or RXT media packs.
When you want to import a single cartridge, you must first put
the cartridge in a magazine, then import the magazine.
ƒ You cannot import media into a partition if the library is actively
running a PreScan™ or PostScan operation. You must pause
or stop the operation before you can continue.
ƒ Select Stop Discovery on the Media Lifecycle Management
Tools screen (see Figure 88 on page 175) to stop the
PreScan operation.
ƒ Select Pause PostScan on the Media Lifecycle
Management Tools screen (see Figure 88 on page 175) to
pause the PostScan operation for one hour.

127
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 6 — Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media

The library automatically updates its physical inventory whenever media


is imported into a partition. However, the inventory maintained by the
backup software is not automatically updated when the library’s physical
inventory changes. Refer to your software documentation for information
about updating the inventory maintained by the software.

Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or a Cleaning Partition


During normal operations, media is typically imported to the entry/exit
pool and then moved to the storage pool using your backup software. This
process ensures that the media inventory maintained by the backup
software is accurate.
When using the Auto Drive Clean option, Maintenance TeraPack
magazines containing one or more cleaning cartridges are imported
directly into the cleaning partition (see Importing Cleaning Cartridges into
the Cleaning Partition on page 132).

Before You Begin...


When importing media into the library, keep the following in mind:
ƒ A partition must already be created before you can import media into
it. See Chapter 9 – Using Partitions for detailed information about
creating data and cleaning partitions.
ƒ If you are importing media into a newly created partition, it is easier to
import media directly into the partition’s storage pool, as described in
Importing Media into a New Partition on page 135.
If your backup application requires all media import operations to be
performed using the entry/exit pool, use the steps in this section
instead.
ƒ Make sure that you import only the type of media for which the
partition is configured. Label each tape cartridge, TeraPack magazine,
and RXT media pack with a unique bar code.
The bar-code labels on Spectra Logic certified media contain
information about the media type. If you try to import the wrong media
type into a partition, the library rejects the media pack by reopening the
TAP door without moving the media pack to the specified location.

128
User Guide 91090000
Importing Media and Cleaning Cartridges

Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool


When you import media into a partition’s entry/exit pool, the storage pool
must contain empty locations to accommodate the imported media. The
General Status screen (Figure 29 on page 80) shows the number of empty
slots available in the storage pool for the selected partition.
ƒ If you are importing tape media, the empty locations are empty slots in
magazines already in the storage pool. An empty slot is required for
each cartridge you plan to import.
ƒ If you are importing RXT media packs, the empty locations are
chambers in the storage pool. Each slot corresponds to one chamber.

If there are no empty locations available in the storage pool, first do one of
the following:
ƒ If the partition has empty chambers in the storage pool, import empty
TeraPack magazines into the storage pool (see Importing Media into the
Storage Pool for a Partition on page 136).
ƒ Use your backup software to eject media from the storage pool to the
entry/exit pool, then export the media from the library (see Exporting
Media from the Entry/Exit or Storage Pool on page 141).
ƒ Exchange a full magazine in the storage pool for one containing empty
slots (see Exchanging Media on page 143).
When the storage pool contains sufficient locations for the media you plan
to import, use the following steps to import the media packs into the entry/
exit pool for a selected partition.
1. Before beginning, have on hand the media that you want to import into
the partition. If necessary, prepare the media as described in Preparing
Media for Use on page 123.
2. Log into the library.
Note: All users can import media into or export media from the entry/
exit pool.

129
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 6 — Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media

3. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export. The Import/
Export TeraPack Cases screen displays.
Notes: ƒ The General > Import/Export option is only available when
accessing the user interface from the library’s operator panel.
It is not available when accessing the library’s user interface
through a remote connection to the BlueScale web interface.
ƒ The options to import, export or, exchange media in the
storage pool are only available if you are logged in with
administrator or superuser privileges.

Figure 66 Importing media using the Import/Export TeraPack


Cases screen.

4. From the Partition drop-down list, select the partition into which you
want to import the media, then select Go.
The Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen refreshes to show the current
status of the chambers assigned to the selected partition.
5. Select Import next to the Empty Chambers in the Entry/Exit section of
the screen.
The TAP opens and a Feedback Required screen displays instructing
you to place a TeraPack in the TAP and close the door.

130
User Guide 91090000
Importing Media and Cleaning Cartridges

6. Insert a media pack into the open TAP, making sure that it is oriented
correctly, as shown in Figure 67.
The alignment guides on each side of the media pack (see Figure 64 on
page 125) slide easily into the grooves on either side of the TAP
opening. If the media pack does not slide into place easily, remove and
reinsert it.

Texture
Handle

The textured surface on each side of a TeraPack The handle on the front of the RXT media pack faces
magazine faces outward, away from the library. outward, away from the library.

Figure 67 Correct insertion of a TeraPack magazine (left) and RXT media pack (right).

7. Manually raise the TAP door until it latches closed, moving the media
pack into the TAP.
Note: Close the TAP door firmly, but do not use force to close it.
8. Choose one of these options:
ƒ Continue—Choose this option if you plan to import another
magazine after the one currently in the TAP. The transporter
retrieves the magazine from the TAP and moves it to a chamber in
the entry/exit pool.
If there are still empty chambers available, the TAP door opens
again, ready for the next import.
Note: On a T680 library, the TAP doors alternate as you continue to
import media.
The import process continues automatically as long as there are
empty chambers available in the entry/exit pool. Simply continue to
insert magazines into the TAP and select Continue for each one.
When there are no empty chambers remaining, the process stops
automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen
displays.
ƒ Stop Importing—Choose this option if the magazine you placed in
the TAP is the last one you will be importing.

131
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 6 — Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media

9. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 to import the remaining magazines. The


import process continues until you choose the Stop Importing option or
there are no empty chambers left in the entry/exit pool (or storage
pool).
10. When you finish importing media packs into the entry/exit pool, use
your backup software to move the media to empty locations in the
partition’s storage pool and update the inventory maintained by the
software.
Note: If you are using tape media, leave at least one empty Terapack
magazine in the entry/exit port pool for future export operations.
If you are using RXT media, leave at least one empty chamber in
the entry/exit pool.
11. If you need to import more media than the entry/exit pool can
accommodate:
a. If necessary, exchange the empty magazines in the entry/exit pool
for full ones to import the next set of media packs into the entry/exit
pool (see Exchanging Media on page 143).
b. Repeat Step 5 through Step 10 until you have imported all of the
media into the storage pool. If you are using tape cartridges, leave
the last set of empty Terapack magazines in the entry/exit port pool.

Importing Cleaning Cartridges into the Cleaning Partition


The cleaning partition is a special-purpose partition that is only used with
the Auto Drive Clean option. Cleaning cartridges stored in the cleaning
partition are not accessible to the application software running on the host.
See Configuring a Cleaning Partition on page 236 for information about
creating and using a cleaning partition.
When importing cleaning cartridges into a cleaning partition, keep the
following in mind:
ƒ The cleaning cartridges in a cleaning partition can only be used for
drives in a data partition that is configured to use that cleaning
partition. Associating a cleaning partition with the drives in a data
partition enables the Auto Drive Clean feature for that partition.
ƒ Cleaning cartridges used in a cleaning partition must be stored in
Spectra Maintenance TeraPack magazines, which are identified by
Spectra-unique labels. The library automatically prevents importing
cleaning cartridges and magazines that are not properly identified into
a cleaning partition.
Note: Maintenance TeraPack magazines filled with appropriately
labeled cleaning cartridges are available from Spectra Logic.
ƒ Make sure the Maintenance TeraPack magazine does not contain any
data cartridges. The library rejects any Maintenance TeraPack magazine
containing data cartridges by reopening the TAP door without moving
the magazine into the cleaning partition.

132
User Guide 91090000
Importing Media and Cleaning Cartridges

ƒ Make sure the cleaning cartridges are identified with “CLN” at the
beginning of the bar-code sequence on their labels. This requirement
applies to both standard and custom bar-code labels. The cleaning
cartridges must be stored in Spectra Maintenance TeraPack magazines,
which are identified by Spectra-unique labels.
ƒ Make sure that you import only cleaning cartridges that are compatible
with the tape drives in the data partition associated with the cleaning
partition. If you try to import the wrong cleaning cartridge type into a
cleaning partition, the library rejects the magazine by reopening the
TAP door without moving the magazine to the cleaning partition.
Use the following steps to import one or more Maintenance TeraPack
magazines containing properly labeled cleaning cartridges into the
cleaning partition.
1. Before beginning, have on hand the cleaning cartridges and properly
labeled magazines that you want to import into the cleaning partition.
If necessary, prepare the media as described in Preparing Media for Use
on page 123.
2. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
3. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export. The Import/
Export TeraPack Cases screen displays.
Note: The General > Import/Export option is only available when
accessing the user interface from the library operator panel. It is
not available when accessing the library using the BlueScale web
interface.

133
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 6 — Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media

4. From the Partition drop-down list, select the cleaning partition into
which you want to import the cleaning cartridges, then select Go.
The Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen refreshes to show the current
status of the chambers assigned to the selected cleaning partition.
Note: The Import, Export/Exchange, and Export/Exchange Expired
buttons on the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen display
only if those actions can be performed given the current
inventory for the partition. For example, if the cleaning partition
does not contain any known-expired cleaning cartridges, the
Export/Exchange Expired button is not displayed.

Figure 68 Importing cleaning cartridges using the Import/


Export TeraPack Cases screen.

5. Select Import.
The TAP opens and a Feedback Required screen displays instructing
you to place a TeraPack in the TAP and close the door.
6. Insert a Maintenance TeraPack magazine into the open TAP, making
sure that it is oriented correctly (Figure 67 on page 131).
The alignment guides on each side of the magazine (see Figure 64 on
page 125) slide easily into the grooves on either side of the TAP
opening. If the magazine does not slide into place easily, remove and
reinsert it.
7. Manually raise the TAP door until it latches closed, moving the
magazine into the TAP.
Note: Close the TAP door firmly, but do not use force to close it.

134
User Guide 91090000
Importing Media and Cleaning Cartridges

8. Choose one of these options:


ƒ Continue—Choose this option if you plan to import another
magazine after the one currently in the TAP. The transporter
retrieves the magazine from the TAP and moves it to a chamber in
the cleaning partition.
If there are still empty chambers available, the TAP door opens
again, ready for the next import.
Note: On a T680 library, the TAP doors alternate as you continue to
import media.
The import process continues automatically as long as there are
empty chambers available in the cleaning partition. Simply continue
to insert magazines into the TAP and select Continue for each one.
When there are no empty chambers remaining, the process stops
automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen
displays.
ƒ Stop Importing—Choose this option if the magazine you placed in
the TAP is the last one you will be importing.
9. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 to import the remaining Maintenance
TeraPack magazines. The import process continues until you choose the
Stop Importing option or there are no empty chambers left in the
cleaning partition.

Importing Media into a New Partition


Unless otherwise required by your backup software, the first time media is
loaded into a partition, it is easiest to import the filled TeraPack magazines
or RXT media packs directly to the storage pool for the data partition. This
process is often referred to as “bulk import.” For subsequent imports, the
media is typically imported to the entry/exit pool and then moved to the
storage pool for the data partition using your backup software.
After media is imported into a partition’s storage pool, it is available for
immediate use by the backup software. Any chambers in the storage pool
that do not contain media are inaccessible to the backup software.
Note: If your backup software requires you to use the software to
perform all media imports, use the steps in Importing Media
into the Entry/Exit Pool or a Cleaning Partition on page 128 to
import the media into the entry/exit pool. Use your backup
software to move the media from the entry/exit pool to the
storage pool.

135
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 6 — Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media

Importing Media into the Storage Pool for a Partition


When importing media into the storage pool for a data partition, keep the
following in mind:
ƒ Only a superuser or administrator can import media directly into the
storage pool.
ƒ Make sure that you import only the type of media for which the
partition is configured. Label each tape cartridge, TeraPack magazine,
and RXT media pack with a unique bar code.
The bar-code labels on Spectra Logic certified media contains
information about the media type. If you try to import the wrong type
of media into a partition, the library rejects the media pack by
reopening the TAP door without moving the media pack to the
specified location.
ƒ During normal operation, the backup software maintains its own
media inventory when performing backup/restore operations and
media management. To avoid errors when the backup software
requests a specific piece of media, be sure to use your backup software
to update its media inventory whenever you import media directly into
the storage pool.

Use the following steps to load media packs (TeraPack magazines or RXT
media packs) directly into the storage pool for a selected data partition.
1. Before beginning, have on hand the media you plan to import. If
necessary, prepare the media as described in Preparing Media for Use
on page 123.
If you are loading media into a partition for the first time, the maximum
number of media packs required equals the number of chambers
assigned to the storage pool for the partition (see Configuring a New
Data Partition on page 209). You do not necessarily need to fill all
chambers, but any empty chambers will be inaccessible to the backup
software.
Note: If desired, any magazines you import can have empty slots in
them. These slots are then available to the backup software and
can be used for moving media from the entry/exit pool into the
storage pool.
2. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.

136
User Guide 91090000
Importing Media and Cleaning Cartridges

3. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export. The Import/
Export TeraPack Cases screen displays.
Note: The General > Import/Export option is only available when
accessing the user interface from the library front panel. It is not
available when accessing the library using the BlueScale web
interface.

Figure 69 The Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen (no


media imported).

Note: The Import and Export/Exchange buttons on the Import/Export


TeraPack Cases screen display only if those actions can be
performed given the current inventory for the partition. For
example, if all chambers in a partition are empty, the Export/
Exchange button is not displayed.
4. From the Partition drop-down list, select the partition into which you
want to import the media packs, then select Go.
The Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen refreshes to show the current
status of the chambers assigned to the selected partition.
5. Select Import next to the Empty Chambers in the Storage section of the
screen.
The TAP opens and a Feedback Required screen displays instructing
you to place a TeraPack in the TAP and close the door.
6. Insert a media pack into the open TAP, making sure that it is correctly
oriented, as shown in Figure 67 on page 131.
The alignment guides on each side of the magazine (see Figure 64 on
page 125) slide easily into the grooves on either side of the TAP
opening. If the magazine does not slide into place easily, remove and
reinsert it.

137
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 6 — Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media

7. Manually raise the TAP door until it latches closed, moving the
magazine into the TAP.
Note: Close the TAP door firmly, but do not use force to close it.
8. Choose one of these options:
ƒ Continue—Choose this option if you plan to import another
magazine after the one currently in the TAP. The transporter
retrieves the magazine from the TAP and moves it to a chamber in
the storage pool for the selected data partition.
If there are still empty chambers available, the TAP door opens
again, ready for the next import.
Note: On a T680 library, the TAP doors alternate as you continue to
import media.
The import process continues automatically as long as there are
empty chambers available in the storage pool. Simply continue to
insert media packs into the TAP and select Continue for each one.
When there are no empty chambers remaining in the partition, the
process stops automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack Cases
screen displays.
ƒ Stop Importing—Choose this option if the magazine you placed in
the TAP is the last one you will be importing.
Note: Chambers in the partition’s storage pool that do not contain a
magazine are inaccessible to the backup software.
9. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 to import the remaining TeraPack magazines.
The import process continues until you choose the Stop Importing
option or there are no empty chambers left in the storage pool.
10. After you finish importing media packs, use your backup software to
update the media inventory it maintains (see Updating the Media
Inventory on page 154).
11. Proceed to Preparing the Entry/Exit Pool (for Tape Media Only) to load
one or more empty magazines into the entry/exit pool for the partition.
Note: Exporting one or more individual cartridges using your backup
software requires a TeraPack magazine with sufficient empty
slots to be present in the entry/exit pool.

138
User Guide 91090000
Importing Media and Cleaning Cartridges

Preparing the Entry/Exit Pool (for Tape Media Only)


When backup software ejects media from a partition, the media is not
immediately exported from the library. Instead, the library moves the
ejected media into empty slots in a TeraPack magazine stored in the
partition’s entry/exit pool. The TeraPack magazines can then be physically
exported from the library whenever it is convenient.
After loading tape media into a partition for the first time, make sure that
the entry/exit pool contains at least one empty TeraPack magazine so that
cartridges ejected by the backup software can be stored there. Over the
course of time, normal operations will typically result in the entry/exit pool
containing at least one magazine.
If the entry/exit pool does not contain a magazine with an empty slot, the
backup software will halt its eject operation. Exchange the full magazines
in the entry/exit pool for empty ones, as described in Exchanging Media on
page 143, before retrying the eject operation.

Use the following steps to import one or more empty TeraPack magazines
into a partition’s entry/exit pool.
1. Before beginning, have on hand one or more empty TeraPack
magazines. The maximum number of empty magazines required
corresponds to the number of chambers in the entry/exit pool.
2. Log into the library.
3. If it is not already displayed, access the Import/Export TeraPack Cases
screen from the General toolbar (see Step 3 of Importing Media into the
Storage Pool for a Partition on page 136).
4. From the Partition drop-down list, select the partition into which you
want to import the empty magazines, then select Go.
5. Select Import (Entry/Exit).
The TAP opens and a Feedback Required screen displays on the user
interface.
6. Insert an empty magazine into the open TAP, making sure that it is
oriented correctly (see Figure 67 on page 131).
The alignment guides on each side of the magazine (see Figure 64 on
page 125) slide easily into the grooves on either side of the TAP
opening. If the magazine does not slide into place easily, remove and
reinsert it.
7. Manually raise the TAP door until it latches closed, moving the
magazine into the TAP.
Note: Close the TAP door firmly, but do not use force to close it.

139
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 6 — Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media

8. Choose one of these options:


ƒ Continue—Choose this option if you plan to import another
magazine after the one currently in the TAP. The transporter
retrieves the magazine from the TAP and moves it to the entry/exit
pool for the partition.
If there are still empty chambers available, the TAP door opens
again, ready for the next import.
Note: On a T680 library, the TAP doors alternate as you continue to
import media.
The import process continues automatically as long as there are
empty entry/exit pool chambers to fill. Simply continue to insert
magazines into the TAP and select Continue for each one. When there
are no empty chambers remaining, the process stops automatically
and the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen displays.
ƒ Stop Importing—Choose this option if the magazine you placed in
the TAP is the last one you will be importing.
9. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 to import the remaining magazines. The
import process continues until you choose the Stop Importing option or
there are no empty chambers left in the entry/exit pool.

EXPORTING OR EXCHANGING MEDIA


This section provides instructions for exporting or exchanging media. The
process for exporting or exchanging media depends on whether the media
is in a data partition or in a cleaning partition.

Topic Described beginning on...


Exporting or Exchanging Media in a Data page 141
Partition
Exchanging Media page 143
Exporting or Exchanging Cartridges in a page 144
Cleaning Partition

Note: You cannot export media from a partition if the library is actively
running a PreScan or PostScan operation. You must pause or
stop the operation before you can continue.
ƒ Select Stop Discovery on the Media Lifecycle Management
Tools screen (see Figure 88 on page 175) to stop the PreScan
operation.
ƒ Select Pause PostScan on the Media Lifecycle Management
Tools screen (see Figure 88 on page 175) to pause the
PostScan operation for one hour.

140
User Guide 91090000
Exporting or Exchanging Media

Exporting or Exchanging Media in a Data Partition


The export functionality is used to export (remove) one or more magazines
or RXT media packs from the library (see Exporting Media from the Entry/
Exit or Storage Pool). You can also use the export functionality to exchange
one magazine or RXT media pack for another one (see Exchanging Media
on page 143).

Exporting Media from the Entry/Exit or Storage Pool


Exporting media from a data partition is a multi-stage process:
1. The backup software exports the cartridge(s) or RXT media from the
partition and removes it from its inventory. From the software
perspective, this step corresponds to opening the entry/exit port and
removing the media. The media is no longer available for use.
2. The library automatically moves the exported media to the partition’s
entry/exit pool. Cartridges are placed in empty slots of a TeraPack
magazine already stored in the entry/exit pool; RXT media packs
occupy an entire chamber in the entry/exit pool.
3. The media in the entry/exit pool can then be exported to the TAP using
controls on the Import/Export TeraPack screen of the user interface.

If you know where the media you want to export is located in the library,
you can export it directly from the storage pool to the TAP. See Locate the
Desired Media on page 150 for information about locating media in the
library.
Notes: ƒ Exporting media directly from the storage pool is not the
recommended procedure, unless you are exporting all of the
media from a partition. This process is often referred to as
“bulk export.”
ƒ Only a superuser or administrator can export or exchange
media directly from the storage pool.
ƒ If you do choose to export a portion of the media in a
partition directly from the storage pool, be sure to use your
backup software to update its media inventory after
completing the export (see Updating the Media Inventory on
page 154).
Use the following steps to export media from the library.
1. Eject the desired media from the partition’s storage pool using the
backup software. The library moves the ejected media from the storage
pool into the partition’s entry/exit pool. When the software reports that
the eject operation is complete, proceed to Step 2.
2. Log into the library as either a superuser or administrator.

141
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 6 — Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media

3. Select General > Import/Export from the toolbar menu on the library’s
user interface. The Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen displays.
Note: The General > Import/Export option is only available when
accessing the user interface from the library’s front panel. It is
not available when accessing the library using the BlueScale web
interface.

Figure 70 Exporting/exchanging media using the Import/


Export TeraPack Cases screen.

4. From the Partition drop-down list, select the partition containing the
media you want to export, then select Go.
The Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen refreshes to show the current
status of the chambers assigned to the selected partition.
Note: The Import and Export/Exchange buttons on the Import/Export
TeraPack Cases screen display only if those actions can be
performed given the current inventory for the partition. For
example, if all chambers in a partition are empty, the Export/
Exchange button is not displayed.
5. Depending on where the media you want to remove from the library is
located, select the Export/Exchange for either the storage pool or the
entry/exit pool.
The transporter retrieves the media pack from the specified pool and
places it in the TAP. The TAP door opens and a Feedback Required
screen displays.
6. Remove the media pack from the TAP.
7. Manually raise the TAP door until it latches closed.
Note: Close the TAP door firmly, but do not use force to close it.

142
User Guide 91090000
Exporting or Exchanging Media

8. Choose one of these options:


ƒ Continue—Choose this option if you plan to export another
magazine after the one you just removed from the TAP. The TAP
doors alternate as you continue to export media.
Note: On a T680 library, the TAP doors alternate as you continue to
export media.
The export process continues automatically as long as there are
magazines left in the entry/exit pool. Simply continue to remove
magazines from the TAP and select Continue for each one.
Note: The magazines are exported in bar code order from the lowest to
the highest.
When all of the magazines in the partition have been exported, the
process stops automatically and the user interface redisplays the
Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen.
ƒ Stop Exporting—Choose this option if the magazine you removed
from the TAP is the last one you will be exporting.
9. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 to export the remaining magazines. The
export process continues until you choose the Stop Exporting option or
there are no magazines left in the entry/exit pool (or storage pool).
10. If you exported media directly from the storage pool, use your backup
software to update the media inventory it maintains (see Updating the
Media Inventory on page 154).

Exchanging Media
The process for exchanging media is the same as for exporting media,
except that you replace the media pack you remove with a new one of the
same type before closing the TAP door.
You can also use the exchange option to move an individual cartridge
directly to or from the storage pool without using the entry/exit pool. This
is especially useful when you need to import a cleaning cartridge during
tape drive maintenance. When the TeraPack magazine containing the
desired cartridge is delivered to the TAP, do the following:
1. Follow Steps 1 through 4 in the previous section to select the magazine
containing the cartridge you want to exchange and move it to the TAP.
2. Remove the magazine from the TAP.
3. Exchange one or more cartridges in the magazine for others of the same
type (or for an appropriate cleaning cartridge).

143
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 6 — Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media

4. Return the magazine to the open TAP, making sure that it is correctly
oriented, as shown in Figure 67 on page 131.
The alignment guides on each side of the magazine (see Figure 64 on
page 125) slide easily into the grooves on either side of the TAP
opening. If the magazine does not slide into place easily, remove and
reinsert it.
5. Close the TAP door.
6. Choose one of these options:
ƒ Continue—Choose this option if you plan to exchange another
magazine after the one you just removed from the TAP.
Note: On a T680 library, the TAP doors alternate as you continue to
export media.
The export process continues automatically as long as there are
magazines left in the storage pool. Simply continue to remove
magazines from the TAP and select Continue for each one.
Note: The magazines are exported in bar code order from the lowest to
the highest.
When all of the magazines in the partition have been exported, the
process stops automatically and the user interface redisplays the
Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen.
ƒ Stop Exporting—Choose this option if the magazine you removed
from the TAP is the last one you will be exchanging.
7. Repeat Steps 3 through 6 to export the remaining magazines. The
export process continues until you choose the Stop Exporting option or
there are no magazines left in the entry/exit pool (or storage pool).
8. If you exchanged one cartridge for another, be sure to update your
backup software’s media inventory (see Updating the Media Inventory
on page 154).

Exporting or Exchanging Cartridges in a Cleaning Partition


The steps for exporting or exchanging cleaning cartridges in a cleaning
partition are the same as for a data partition, except that the Maintenance
TeraPack magazine containing the cleaning cartridges is moved directly to
the TAP.
Use the following steps to export or exchange cleaning cartridges in a
cleaning partition.
1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.

144
User Guide 91090000
Exporting or Exchanging Media

2. Select General > Import/Export from the toolbar menu on the library’s
user interface. The Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen displays
(Figure 70 on page 142).
Note: The General > Import/Export option is only available when
accessing the user interface from the library operator panel. It is
not available when accessing the library using the BlueScale web
interface.
3. From the Partition drop-down list, select the cleaning partition
containing the cleaning cartridges you want to export or exchange, then
select Go.
The Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen refreshes to show the current
status of the chambers assigned to the selected cleaning partition.
Note: The Import, Export/Exchange, and Export/Exchange Expired
buttons on the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen display
only if those actions can be performed given the current
inventory for the partition. For example, if the cleaning partition
does not contain any known-expired cleaning cartridges, the
Export/Exchange Expired button is not displayed.

Figure 71 Exporting/exchanging cleaning using the Import/


Export TeraPack Cases screen.

4. Select the Export/Exchange or Export/Exchange Expired.


The transporter retrieves a magazine from the cleaning partition and
places it in the TAP. The TAP door opens and a Feedback Required
screen displays. If you selected Export/Exchange Expired, the feedback
screen tells you which cartridge to remove from the magazine.
5. Remove the magazine from the TAP.
ƒ If you are removing the entire Maintenance magazine of cleaning
cartridges from the cleaning partition and will not be replacing it,
skip to Step 8.
ƒ If you are replacing an expired cleaning cartridge, remove the
expired cleaning cartridge from the slot indicated in the feedback
screen and replace it with a new one of the same type.

145
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 6 — Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media

6. Return the magazine to the open TAP, making sure that it is correctly
oriented, as shown in Figure 67 on page 131.
7. Manually raise the TAP door until it latches closed.
Note: Close the TAP door firmly, but do not use force to close it.
8. Choose one of these options:
ƒ Continue—Choose this option if you removed the expired cleaning
cartridge and did not replace it with a new cartridge. Also choose
this option if you removed or exchanged the a magazine.
Note: If you exchanged an expended cleaning cartridge for a new one
and chose Continue, select Ok in response to a message stating
that the slot containing the exchanged cartridge should be
empty.
The export process continues automatically as long as there are
magazines left in the cleaning partition. Simply continue to remove
or exchange magazines and select Continue for each one.
When of the all magazines in the cleaning partition have been
exported or exchanged, the process stops automatically and the user
interface redisplays the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen.
ƒ Override—Choose this option if you exchanged an expired cleaning
cartridge in the magazine for a new one.
ƒ Stop Exporting—Choose this option if the magazine you removed
from the TAP is the last one you will be exchanging.
9. Repeat Steps 3 through 8 to export the remaining magazines. The
export/exchange process continues until you choose the Stop Exporting
option or there are no magazines left in the cleaning partition.

146
User Guide 91090000
Importing Media To or Exporting Media From a Specific Location

IMPORTING MEDIA TO OR EXPORTING MEDIA FROM A SPECIFIC


LOCATION
Use the following steps to import a media pack (TeraPack magazine or RXT
media pack) into or export it from a specific chamber in the library using
the TAP. You can only import or export media packs. You cannot import or
export individual cartridges.
1. If necessary, place the prepared cartridge(s) you want to import in an
empty TeraPack magazine.
2. Log into the library as a superuser or administrator.
3. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export. The Import/
Export TeraPack Cases screen displays (Figure 69 on page 137).
Note: The General > Import/Export option is only available when
accessing the user interface from the library’s operator panel. It is
not available when accessing the library’s user interface through
the BlueScale web interface.
4. From the Partition drop-down list, select the partition into which or
from which you want to import or export the media pack, then select
Go.
5. Select Advanced. The Advanced Import/Export screen displays.
Note: To return to the basic Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen,
select Basic.

Figure 72 The Advanced Import/Export screen.

6. From the Chamber drop-down list, select the chamber into which or
from which you want to move the media pack, then select Go.
The screen refreshes to display the status of the selected chamber. If the
chamber contains a magazine, the status shows the contents of each slot
in the magazine.

147
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 6 — Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media

7. From the Direction drop-down list (shown in Figure 73), select the
direction you want to move the media pack, then select Go.

Direction of Move

Figure 73 Select the Advanced Import/Export direction.

The available destinations depend on the type of partition selected.

Partition Type Available Sources


Data ƒ TAP > Storage—Move the media pack from the TAP to the storage pool.
ƒ Storage > TAP—Move the media pack in the selected storage pool chamber
to the TAP.
ƒ TAP > EE—Move the media pack from the TAP to the entry/exit pool.
ƒ EE > TAP—Move the media pack in the selected entry/exit pool chamber to
the TAP.
Cleaning ƒ TAP > Storage—Move the TeraPack magazine from the TAP to the cleaning
partition.
ƒ Storage > TAP—Move the TeraPack magazine in the selected cleaning
partition chamber to the TAP.

148
User Guide 91090000
Importing Media To or Exporting Media From a Specific Location

8. Select Add Move. An entry listing the move you just defined appears in
the Move Queue.

Select Add Move to add the


defined move to the Move
Queue.

Figure 74 Add the move to the Move Queue.

9. Repeat Step 6 through Step 8 if you want to perform additional moves.


10. Select Start Moves to begin the moves in the order that they are listed in
the Move Queue.
ƒ Select Delete to delete a selected move from the Move Queue list.
ƒ Select Delete All to delete all of the defined moves from the Move
Queue list.
11. The TAP door opens. Insert a media pack into the TAP or remove a
media pack from the TAP.
12. Manually raise the TAP door until it latches closed.
Note: Close the TAP door firmly, but do not use force to close it.
A progress screen tracks the progress of each move operation. When
the move is complete, the library updates its media inventory and the
screen displays the status of the completed move.
13. If you imported media packs directly into or exported them from the
storage pool, be sure to use your backup software to update its media
inventory after completing the export (see Updating the Media
Inventory on page 154).

149
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 6 — Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media

MOVING MEDIA WITHIN A PARTITION


During normal operations, you typically use your backup software to
move media (tape cartridges or RXT media packs) from one location to
another within the library. However, you may occasionally need to use the
library’s user interface to locate and move an individual cartridge (for
example, to move a cleaning cartridge to a tape drive if you are not using
the Auto Drive Clean option).
Note: If a cleaning partition is associated with the data partition, use
the Clean button on the Drives screen to move a cleaning
cartridge from the cleaning partition to a drive (see Manually
Cleaning a Tape Drive on page 411).

Locate the Desired Media


1. Identify the media you want to move (for example, by determining its
bar-code label) and the partition in which it resides.
2. Log into the library.
3. From the library user interface, select General > Inventory. The
Inventory screen displays (Figure 61 on page 121).
4. If the media is in a partition other than the one currently displayed,
select the desired partition from the Partition drop-down list, then
select Go.
The Source pane refreshes to display a list of the media in the requested
location type. The list shows the name of the location (for example, the
slot number) and the bar-code label information for the media in that
location.

150
User Guide 91090000
Moving Media Within a Partition

5. Select the source of the media you want to move. You can select the
media either by selecting it from the Source list, by entering its bar
code, or by entering the slot number where it is located.

List media
by source

Figure 75 Select the Source of the media you want to move.

To select using the Source list:


a. Choose the source type from the Source drop-down list (see
Figure 75) and select Go to refresh the list of media in the selected
source type. The available sources depend on the type of partition
selected.

Partition Type Available Sources


Data ƒ Storage—The media currently in the selected partition’s storage pool.
ƒ Entry/Exit—The media currently in the partition’s entry/exit pool.
ƒ Drives—The drives assigned to the partition that currently contain media.
ƒ From TAP—Moves the magazine containing the destination slot to the TAP,
prompts you to place a cartridge in that slot, and returns the magazine to its
original location.
Note: The From Tap option is only available when accessing the user interface
from the front panel.
ƒ All—All the media assigned to the partition, regardless of its location.
Cleaning ƒ Cleaning—The cleaning cartridges currently in the selected cleaning
partition.
ƒ From TAP—Moves the magazine containing the destination slot to the TAP,
prompts you to place a cartridge in that slot, and returns the magazine to its
original location.
Note: The From Tap option is only available when accessing the user interface
from the front panel.
ƒ All—All the media assigned to the partition, regardless of its location.

b. Scroll through the list and select the desired cartridge.

151
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 6 — Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media

To select using a slot number:


a. Enter the slot number for the cartridge you want to move in the View
Source Slot field.
b. Select Go. The Source inventory list refreshes to show the requested
slot selected at the top of the Source list.
To select using the bar-code label information:
a. Enter the bar-code label information for the cartridge you want to
locate in the Find by Barcode field.
Notes: ƒ Make sure that you type the bar-code label information
correctly to avoid selecting the wrong cartridge.
ƒ Only the slots below the one that is currently highlighted in
the source list are searched. To ensure that all of the slots are
searched, scroll to the top of the source list and highlight the
first slot before selecting Find.
b. Select Find. The Source inventory list refreshes to show the
requested cartridge selected at the top of the Source list.

Move the Media


Use the following steps to move the media from one location to another
within the partition.
1. Select the media you want to move as described in Locate the Desired
Media.
2. From the Destination drop-down list, select the type of location to
which you want to move the media, then select Go.
Available destinations

Figure 76 Select the Destination for a media move.

152
User Guide 91090000
Moving Media Within a Partition

The available destinations depend on the type of partition selected.

Partition Type Available Sources


Data ƒ Storage—Move the media to the selected location in the selected partition’s
storage pool.
ƒ Entry/Exit—Move the media to the selected location in the selected partition’s
entry/exit pool.
ƒ To TAP—Moves the magazine containing the source slot to the TAP, prompts
you to remove the cartridge from that slot, and returns the magazine to its
original location.
Note: The To Tap option is only available when accessing the user interface from
the front panel.
ƒ Drives—Move the media to the selected drive in the partition.
ƒ All—List all available destinations in the partition, regardless of the type.
Selecting a specific destination type instead of using All displays fewer items
through which you must scroll to locate the desired media.
Cleaning ƒ Cleaning—Move the selected cleaning cartridges currently in the selected
cleaning partition.
ƒ To TAP—Moves the magazine containing the source slot to the TAP, prompts
you to remove the cartridge from that slot, and returns the magazine to its
original location.
Note: The To Tap option is only available when accessing the user interface from
the front panel.
ƒ All—List all available destinations in the partition, regardless of the type.
Selecting a specific destination type instead of using All displays fewer items
through which you must scroll to locate the desired media.

3. The Destination list refreshes to show the locations of the selected type
that are empty and available.
4. Select the desired destination from the Destination list.

153
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 6 — Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media

5. Select Add Move. An entry listing the move you just defined appears in
the Move Queue.

Select Add Move to add


the defined move to the
Move Queue.

Figure 77 Add the move to the Move Queue.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if you want to move additional media.


7. Select Start Moves to begin the media moves in the order that they are
listed in the Move Queue.
ƒ Select Delete to delete a selected move from the Move Queue list.
ƒ Select Delete All to delete all of the defined moves from the Move
Queue list.
A progress screen tracks the progress of the move operation. When the
move is complete, the screen displays the status of the completed move.
8. When the move is complete, use your backup software to update the
inventory it maintains, if necessary (see Updating the Media
Inventory).

UPDATING THE MEDIA INVENTORY


As the library imports or exports media, it reads the bar-code labels on the
individual cartridges and the TeraPack magazines and automatically
updates the physical inventory that it maintains in on the LCM compact
flash card. This process does not automatically update the media inventory
maintained and used by the backup software.
After you finish importing media into or exporting media from a
partition’s storage pool, or if you use the library’s user interface to move
media from one location to another, use your backup software to update
the inventory it maintains. Refer to your software documentation for more
information.

154
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 7
Media Lifecycle Management
This chapter describes how to use BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management
(MLM) to proactively monitor and report on the health of media in your
library.

Topic Described beginning on...


BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management page 156
Overview
Media Lifecycle Management Best Practices page 161
Configuring Media Lifecycle Management page 164
Configure Global Settings page 164
Configuring Media Auto Discovery page 166
Displaying MLM Capacity as Broadcast page 168
Capacity
Configuring PostScan Blackout Periods page 169
Getting Started with Using Media Lifecycle page 171
Management
Media Requirements page 171
Initiating or Stopping Media Discovery page 173
Using Media Lifecycle Management page 175
Generating Media Lifecycle Management page 175
Reports
Saving an MLM Report page 179
Using MLM PreScan and PostScan page 181
Managing the MLM Database page 187
Backing Up the MLM Database page 187
Restoring the MLM Database page 190
Deleting Records From the MLM Database page 191
Downloading the MLM Database as a CSV page 192
File

155
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management

BLUESCALE MEDIA LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT OVERVIEW


This section provides an overview of how BlueScale Media Lifecycle
Management (MLM) works in your library. The remainder of the chapter
provides detailed information about configuring and using MLM.
BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) helps you manage your
tape media by giving you tools to pro-actively detect potential media
errors well before they happen—all consolidated within the same
application you use to manage your library. When used in combination
with Spectra Logic Certified Media with MLM support, MLM lets you
manage, track, and report all facets of tape usage from creation to
retirement.
Note: Media Lifecycle Management is only supported for LTO-4 tape
drives using Spectra Certified Media with MLM support (LTO-3
and higher data cartridges and LTO cleaning cartridges) shipped
on or after November 15, 2007.
MLM maintains a database of all the LTO cartridges in the library. The
information in the database is used to monitor the health of the cartridges
and generate a variety of reports. If desired, you can save the reports to a
USB drive or email them to a previously configured mail user.
In addition to tracking media health and generating reports, MLM displays
a Filled Capacity bar graph on the General Status screen. This graph shows
you the remaining uncompressed storage capacity for the MLM-enabled
media in the entire library or in a specific partition. Click on the Filled
Capacity bar graph to view the Media Lifecycle Management Report
screen (Figure 89 on page 177).
Note: Until an MLM-enabled cartridge is discovered, either by Media
Auto Discovery or by loading it into a tape drive the first time
and then unloading it, the cartridge capacity is not included on
the Filled Capacity bar graph.

Filled capacity

Figure 78 The General Status screen showing the media capacity for
the selected partition.

156
User Guide 91090000
BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management Overview

Spectra-Certified Media with MLM-Support


Media Lifecycle Management starts with packaged, bar-code labeled,
Spectra Certified Media with MLM support (LTO-3 and higher data
cartridges and LTO cleaning cartridges). Before shipment, Spectra Logic
writes baseline data to the MAM (Medium Auxiliary Memory) embedded
in each cartridge. Throughout its life, the cartridge continually collects data
on its MAM, enabling it to support MLM tracking and reporting.

Media Auto Discovery


The Media Auto Discovery feature is a background process that inserts
each newly imported LTO cartridge into an MLM-capable tape drive and
determines whether it is MLM-enabled. If the cartridge is MLM-enabled,
the library records the MLM information into both the MLM database and
the Media Auxiliary Memory (MAM) in the cartridge. When the drive
unloads the cartridge, the library returns it to its original location. The
discovery process is independent of any backup application.
Note: If the MLM PreScan™ feature is enabled in a partition, that
process runs instead of the Media Auto Discovery process. See
Using PreScan on page 181 for more information.
See the following sections for detailed information about configuring and
using Media Auto Discovery.

This section Provides...


Configuring Media Auto Discovery Detailed information about how Media Auto Discovery feature
on page 166 operates and instructions for enabling it.
Notes:
ƒ If Media Auto Discovery is not enabled, the discovery
process can be launched manually (see Using PreScan on
page 181).
ƒ If neither discovery process is used, the library discovers
each cartridge the first time the it is loaded into and
unloaded from an MLM-capable tape drive during normal
operation. The library then records all of the MLM
information to the cartridge MAM and the MLM database.
Initiating or Stopping Media Detailed instructions for manually starting and pausing the
Discovery on page 173 Media Auto Discovery process.

157
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management

MLM Tracking and Reporting


MLM uses the information from the cartridge’s MAM to maintain a
database of information about each cartridge in the library. The
information in the MLM databases gives you vital statistical and diagnostic
information that helps you proactively manage your tape media
throughout its life. MLM media tracking and reporting lets you review
important health information about every MLM-enabled data cartridge
and cleaning cartridge in your library. You can generate comprehensive
health reports for the media in the whole library or in an individual
partition. You can also generate more detailed reports with information
about compression ratios, load counts, write errors, remaining capacity,
encryption status, and more.
MLM reports helps you identify tapes with high error rates or other
problems (for example, a dropped leader pin). These tapes can then be
removed before they cause data corruption. Use MLM to help identify
tapes that pose a risk to protecting your data and remove them before a
problem occurs. See Generating Media Lifecycle Management Reports on
page 175 for detailed information about the types of reports you can
generate.

Important Media and cleaning cartridges that are not MLM-enabled do not appear in MLM
reports unless the keyed Media Check option is enabled.

Data Cartridges
Each time a Spectra Certified MLM-enabled data cartridge is loaded into a
tape drive, MLM records over 30 data points about the cartridge. These
data points include health information, the cartridge age, how many times
it has been loaded and into which drives, and how many errors it has
accumulated. It also records when the cartridge is exported from the
library and by whom. MLM uses a unique identifier that allows each
cartridge to be tracked throughout its life, even if its bar-code label is
damaged or removed.
In addition to media health, the library uses information in the MLM
database to determine Remaining Capacity for the selected partition. If the
partition contains non-MLM-enabled media, the capacity shown for the
library only represents what is available on the MLM-enabled media.

158
User Guide 91090000
BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management Overview

Cleaning Cartridges
With Spectra Certified MLM-enabled LTO cleaning cartridges, the library
tracks and reports usage information, which includes the number of
Cleans Remaining and the cartridge health (good, near expiration or
expired). These reports alert you when a cleaning cartridge is nearing the
end of its useful life so that you can have another on hand to replace it. See
Configuring Media Lifecycle Management for information about setting
the threshold for generating the notification.
When you use MLM-enabled cleaning cartridges in a cleaning partition,
the usage information is retained in the MLM database even when the
cleaning cartridge is exported from the library. The MLM database does
not contain any information about cleaning cartridges that are not MLM-
enabled. However, the library marks an expired cleaning cartridge in its
inventory and no further usage is attempted. If an expired cleaning
cartridge that is not MLM-enable is exported from the partition and then
reimported or if the LCM is reset, the library must rediscover that the
cleaning cartridge is expired.

MLM PreScan and PostScan


MLM PreScan and PostScan™ are a keyed set of configurable background
processes that use an LTO-4 tape drive to provide two levels of verification
for LTO data cartridges. Contact your Spectra Logic sales representative if
you want to use of these features. See Enter the Activation or BlueScale
Software Support Key on page 271 for information about entering the key
to enable this option.
Both PreScan and PostScan generate system messages as possible error
conditions are detected (for example, a broken leader or a media error).
The messages indicate that the error condition was detected by the PreScan
or PostScan process and not during normal operation.
The two levels of verification are enabled and configured separately as part
of the data partition creation process. See the following sections for
detailed information about configuring and using the PreScan and
PostScan features:

This section Provides...


Configuring PostScan Detailed instructions for configuring the PostScan blackout periods.
Blackout Periods on page 169 These blackout periods apply to all partitions that are configured to
use the PostScan feature.
Using PreScan on page 181 Detailed information about how the PreScan feature operates. This
section also provides instructions for manually starting and stopping
the PreScan process.

159
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management

This section Provides...


Using PostScan on page 182 Detailed information about how the PostScan feature operates. This
section also provides instructions for manually adding a tape to the
PostScan queue and pausing the currently running PostScan process.
Configure Global Spare Tape Information about configuring a Global Spare drive. A Global Spare
Drives on page 213 drive must be configured for the partition before PostScan can be used.
Configure MLM PreScan and Detailed information about enabling and configuring the settings for
PostScan on page 217 PreScan and PostScan in each partition.
Configuring a Cleaning Information about using a cleaning partition for use with the Global
Partition on page 236 Spare drive used to perform PostScan operations.

Additional MLM Features


In addition to the features described in the previous sections, MLM
provides the following features (listed in alphabetical order):
Broadcast Capacity The Broadcast Capacity option displays MLM capacity
using broadcast-centric hours of programming used and hours of
programing remaining instead of raw capacity (see Displaying MLM
Capacity as Broadcast Capacity on page 168).
Media Alert The Media Alert feature generates a system message when a
tape’s health is identified as poor (red) during five consecutive loads. This
message is only generated once per tape. A separate system message is
generated whenever a cartridge experiences a hard error.
MLM Database Management The maximum number of records in the
MLM database is restricted to 10 times the maximum number of cartridges
in the library (for example, the MLM database in a T680 library is 6800).
When this limit is reached, records are automatically deleted on a first-in,
first-out (FIFO) basis.
When a tape is retired or permanently exported from the library, its record
can be deleted from the MLM database. Records can be deleted
individually or as a group (see Deleting Records From the MLM Database
on page 191).
If desired, the information in the MLM database can be exported to a
comma-separated value (CSV) file, which can then be imported into
Microsoft® Excel® or other software applications that support this file type
(see Downloading the MLM Database as a CSV File on page 192).
Tracking Non-MLM-Enabled Media New libraries include a keyed Media
Check option to display the basic MLM health information for LTO-2,
LTO-3, and LTO-4 media that is not MLM-enabled. This basic health media
health information (Usable or Impaired) is based on tape log data obtained
by an LTO-2, LTO-3, or LTO-4 drive. The Media Check option is also
included for existing libraries that upgrade to BlueScale 11.

160
User Guide 91090000
Media Lifecycle Management Best Practices

The keyed Media Check option must be enabled before the media health
information appears in Media Lifecycle Management reports. See Enter the
Activation or BlueScale Software Support Key on page 271 for information
about entering the key to enable this option.

MEDIA LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT BEST PRACTICES


To effectively use MLM and ensure data protection, plan a strategy based
on your data center needs and develop policies and procedures to support
that strategy. Having sound management policies and procedures for
media rotation and management is essential for consistent, effective
implementation.

Following the Best MLM Practices


Consider the following best practice guidelines as you prepare to
implement MLM in your environment.

Guideline Description
Identify the people responsible The people who perform data backup at your site are typically
for backing up data the ones who will be responsible for implementing and
following MLM procedures.
Identify the users who will have It may be wise to have more than a single user familiar with
responsibilities that involve policies, depending on the size of your organization, so that if
MLM one person is not available, another can take over.
Be consistent with partition Using consistent naming simplifies identifying a specific
names partition. Spectra’s suggested naming practice is to list the
location, followed by the library name, followed by the
backup software. For example, Dallas/T680/Netbackup.
On an organizational level, The level of media management depends on the requirements
determine the level of for your environment. For example, you may choose to use
management your media Spectra’s guidelines for retirement for all media, or you may
requires choose to retire tapes that hold financial or legal data sooner
than recommended. See the Error and Warning health scores
in Generating Media Lifecycle Management Reports on
page 175 for information on when cartridges should be
retired.

161
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management

Establishing Good MLM Policies


Consider the following guidelines when establishing your Media Lifecycle
Management polices.

Guideline Description
Choose a retirement guideline When implementing MLM, decide at the beginning on the criteria to
be used when determining when to retire a cartridge.
Spectra suggests using the Media Lifecycle Management health
icon, visible on the MLM Reports screen and on the Details screen
(Figure 90 on page 179) for each tape, to assess the overall health of
individual tapes. See Generating Media Lifecycle Management
Reports on page 175 for information about using the health icon to
assess media health.
Only use MLM-enabled media For the most accurate tracking, do not import your MLM-enabled
and cleaning cartridges in media into non-Spectra Logic libraries or drive generations lower
MLM-compatible libraries and than LTO-4. The cartridge MAM will not be updated with
tape drives information about usage in those locations. As a result, the
information about usage in those locations will not be recorded in
the MLM database when the cartridge is returned to your library.
Use only Spectra Certified The library uses information in the MLM database to monitor the
Media with MLM support (both health of the media in the library. Although the keyed Media Check
data and cleaning cartridges) in option provides a general indicator of media health, detailed health
the library information is not available for non-MLM-enabled media. In the
case of data cartridges, this means that you cannot use MLM
reporting to determine whether that media is past its useful
threshold or determine whether a particular cartridge is
experiencing high errors rates or retries. For cleaning cartridges, this
means that you will not be notified when a cartridge is approaching
the end of its useful life.
Always operate the library with If you disable and then re-enable Media Lifecycle Management, any
Media Lifecycle Management loads, reads, writes, errors, and any other tape related events that
enabled occur while MLM is disabled are not recorded in the MLM
database.

162
User Guide 91090000
Media Lifecycle Management Best Practices

Guideline Description
Enable load count alerts Load count alerts, used in combination with the media health icon,
let you monitor the health of individual tapes. Tapes with low load
counts, but with a yellow or red health icon are vulnerable to high
errors rates or retries.
For higher levels of notification, configure a threshold for the
maximum number of times a data cartridge can be loaded before an
alert is generated (see Configuring Media Lifecycle Management on
page 164). When the number of loads exceeds this threshold, MLM
will generates a system message listing the barcode of the tape.
You can also enable an alert to notify you when the load count
recorded on the cartridge MAM differs from the load count stored
in the MLM database but none of the other data has changed. This
type of discrepancy can indicate that the tape has been loaded into a
non-Spectra Logic library. Use this alert as a security feature to let
you know when a tape was removed and loaded into a drive in a
different library.
Regularly back up your MLM Determine how frequently to export the MLM database for storage.
database You can save the MLM database to a USB drive or email it to a
previously configured mail recipient. The database can be loaded
back into the library in the event of an error. See Backing Up the
MLM Database on page 187 and Restoring the MLM Database on
page 190 for detailed information. See Configuring Mail Users on
page 280 for information about configuring mail recipients.
Backing up the MLM database produces a point-in-time snapshot of
the MLM database. Based on the number of tapes you routinely
import into and export from the library, determine how frequently
backups are needed to ensure that you can easily restore the MLM
database.
Enable non-MLM media alerts Alerts for non-MLM-enabled media notify you when a cartridge
that is not MLM-enabled is loaded into a tape drive.
Track exported cartridges When a cartridge is exported from the library, an asterisk (*) next to
the bar code indicates that it is currently out of the library. However,
all of the MLM data for the cartridge is still available. Define the
frequency with which you will export the complete MLM report
and make a note of all exported tapes.
Choose relevant information for When you save an MLM report (see Generating Media Lifecycle
saved reports Management Reports on page 175), you can choose between saving
all MLM data or just the data from the most recently viewed report.
The data is saved in a comma delimited format for export into any
spreadsheet software (see Saving an MLM Report on page 179).

163
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management

CONFIGURING MEDIA LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT


This section describes configuring the optional MLM features.
Note: MLM is enabled by default. If you do not want to use MLM, you
must disable it.

Configure Global Settings


Use the following steps to configure the global settings for MLM. These
settings affect all partitions in the library.
1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > More Options > Media
Lifecycle Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Settings
screen displays.

Figure 79 The Media Lifecycle Management Settings screen.

164
User Guide 91090000
Configuring Media Lifecycle Management

3. Select the MLM features you want to enable.

Option Description
Enable Media Enables the Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) features in the library. MLM
Lifecycle is enabled by default. Enabling Media Lifecycle Management also enables
Management Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM), which is described in Chapter 8 – Drive
Lifecycle Management.
Important: MLM must be enabled before you can take advantage of the health
monitoring and reporting features provided through MLM and DLM.
Enable Alerts for Generates an alert message when a cartridge that is not MLM-enabled is loaded
Non-Certified Media into a tape drive.
Note: Enabling this alert is only recommended if all of the media typically used
in the library is MLM-enabled.
Enable Alerts for Generates an alert message when the load count for the cartridge stored in the
Load Count MLM database differs from the load count stored on the cartridge’s MAM.
Discrepancies
Minimum Cleaning Sets the threshold for the minimum number cleaning passes remaining on a
Passes Before cleaning cartridge. The default value is zero (0).
Warning When a cleaning cartridge reaches threshold, a warning message is generated
showing that the cleaning cartridge is nearly expended. The warning message
is generated every time the cleaning tape is used while the number of cleans
remaining is at or below the threshold value.
Maximum Tape Sets the number of times a tape can be loaded into a tape drive before a load
Loads Before count warning message is generated. The default value is 10,000 loads.
Warning When the number of tape loads reaches the specified threshold, a warning
message is generated. Subsequent loads do not generate additional messages.
Notes:
ƒ If you began using MLM-enabled data and cleaning cartridges before MLM
became available in the library’s BlueScale user interface, some of your media
may have already exceeded the thresholds you set. See Getting Started with
Using Media Lifecycle Management on page 171 for more information.
ƒ Generate a Load Count Media Lifecycle Report to display the current usage
status of the media in your library (see Using Media Lifecycle Management
on page 175 for detailed information).
Enable Media Auto Enables the Media Auto Discovery feature. See Configuring Media Auto
Discovery Discovery on page 166 and Using Media Lifecycle Management on page 175 for
detailed information.
If PreScan is enabled for the partition, that process is used instead of the more
basic Media Auto Discovery. See MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 159 for
information about the PreScan feature.

165
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management

Option Description
Convert to Changes the way MLM capacity is displayed to use a broadcast-centric method
Broadcast Hours based on hours of programming used and hours of programing remaining
instead of raw capacity. See Displaying MLM Capacity as Broadcast Capacity
on page 168 for detailed information.
PostScan Blackout Configures periods of time during which the automatic PostScan process does
Periods not operate. See Configuring PostScan Blackout Periods on page 169 for
detailed instructions.

4. Select Save to enable the selected MLM features.

Configuring Media Auto Discovery


Media Auto Discovery must be enabled before the library will
automatically discover MLM-enabled media and write the appropriate
information to the MLM database and cartridge MAM.
Notes: ƒ Media Auto Discovery requires bar-code labeled cartridges.
ƒ The Media Auto Discovery process also identifies and checks
media that is not MLM-enabled media. However, if the
keyed Media Check option is not enabled, the discovery and
tracking information for this media is lost when the library’s
inventory is refreshed. The following actions cause the
library to refresh its inventory:
ƒ Resetting or power cycling the LCM.
ƒ Exporting and then re-importing previously discovered
cartridges that are not MLM-enabled.
ƒ Creating or modifying a partition (including sparing and
unsparing Global Spare drives).
ƒ If you do not enable Media Auto Discovery, you can start the
discovery process for a specific partition manually. See
Initiating or Stopping Media Discovery on page 173 for
instructions.
—OR—
You can let the BlueScale firmware to discover MLM-enabled
tapes the first time they are loaded and unloaded from an
MLM-enabled drive during normal operations.
Use the following steps to enable Media Auto Discovery.
1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > More Options > Media
Lifecycle Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Settings
screen displays.
3. Make sure that Enable Lifecycle Management is selected.

166
User Guide 91090000
Configuring Media Lifecycle Management

4. Select Enable Media Auto Discovery and enter the number of minutes
that you want the library to be idle following the last import of media
before initiating the Media Auto Discovery process.

Figure 80 Enabling Media Auto Discovery screen.

5. Select Save.
Note: If you enable PreScan for the partition, the Media Auto
Discovery process is replaced by the more in depth PreScan
process (see Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 217)
for that partition.

167
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management

Displaying MLM Capacity as Broadcast Capacity


If desired, you can configure the library to use a broadcast-centric method
for displaying capacity in terms hours of content used and total hours of
content available instead of raw capacity for all MLM-enabled media.
1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > More Options > Media
Lifecycle Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Settings
screen displays.
3. Select the method for converting to broadcast capacity from the Convert
to Broadcast Hours drop-down list.

Figure 81 The MLM Broadcast Hours screen.

4. The choice that you make in the Broadcast Hours field automatically
selects a default Override Broadcast Bit Rate. If necessary, change the
Override Broadcast Bit Rate as required for your environment. The
default value for the broadcast bit rate depends on the Broadcast Hours
conversion you selected.

Important If you select none in the Convert to Broadcast Hours field, leave the Override
Broadcast Bit Rate value set to 0.

168
User Guide 91090000
Configuring Media Lifecycle Management

5. Select Save. The Filled Capacity bar graph on the General Status screen
changes to reflect hours of content based on the settings for Convert to
Broadcast Hours.

Figure 82 The General Status screen with capacity shown as


Hours of Content.

Configuring PostScan Blackout Periods


If desired, you can configure blackout periods during which the automatic
PostScan process does not operate. Configuring blackout periods ensures
that during your backup window, all of the tapes in the partition are
immediately available and ensures a Global Spare drive is available if
needed.

Important The blackout periods you configure affect all of the partitions in the library.

Note: If PostScan is actively verifying a tape at the time the blackout


period starts, it completes the current scan. No additional tapes
are scanned until the blackout period expires.
Use the following steps to configure the PostScan blackout periods.
1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > More Options > Media
Lifecycle Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Settings
screen displays.

169
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management

3. In the PostScan Blackout Periods panel, use the Start and Stop drop-
down lists to set the start and end times for the blackout period for each
day of the week.
Notes: ƒ Times are based on a 24-hour clock, where 0:00 is midnight.
ƒ To disable the blackout period for a specific day, set both
Start and Stop to 0:00.
ƒ By default, the blackout periods are all set to 0 (disabled). The
PostScan process will run whenever there are tapes in the
PostScan queue and a Global Spare drive is available.

Figure 83 Enabling Media Auto Discovery screen.

4. Select Save.
5. Configure one or more partitions to use the PostScan triggers (see
Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 217).

170
User Guide 91090000
Getting Started with Using Media Lifecycle Management

GETTING STARTED WITH USING MEDIA LIFECYCLE


MANAGEMENT
After you configure the types of events for which you want alerts (see
Configuring Media Lifecycle Management on page 164), you are ready to
begin using MLM. The process you use depends on when you started
using MLM-enabled media.
Note: If a cartridge is write-protected when it is inserted into a drive,
the library cannot update the MLM information on the
cartridge’s MAM.

Media Requirements
Spectra Certified Media with MLM support has been available from
Spectra Logic since November 15, 2007. The following table summarizes
the level of information reported through MLM for media purchased
before and after MLM became available. The sections following the table
provide additional information for different scenarios.

Spectra Certified LTO-3 or LTO-4 Media


Non-MLM-Enabled
Born-on date is before Born-on date is after Media
Drive Type November 15, 2007 November 15, 2007
LTO-4 Limited Reporting a Full Reporting Limited Reporting a
LTO-2 or LTO-3 No Reporting Limited Reporting a
LTO-1 Not Supported
a. Requires Media Check option key.

Recently Purchased Library and Spectra Certified


MLM-Enabled Media
If you purchased your library after BlueScale 10.4 was released in the fall of
2008 and you purchased Spectra Certified Media with MLM support at the
same time, simply load the media into the library. MLM collects the
available MLM media health information from each cartridge's MAM and
add it to the MLM database. Each subsequent load/unload will update the
MLM database, providing the ability for ongoing tracking and reporting.

171
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management

Existing Library, Pre-BlueScale 10.4 Code with


MLM-Enabled or Mixed Spectra Certified Media
If you have an existing library that does not have BlueScale 10.4 or later
installed and:
ƒ you began using MLM-enabled Spectra Certified LTO media when it
became available but before BlueScale10.4 introduced the MLM
functionality in the fall of 2008,
—OR—
ƒ you began using a mixture of MLM-enabled and non-MLM-enabled
Spectra Certified LTO media before the MLM functionality was
introduced in BlueScale10.4,
do the following:
1. Update the library firmware update to BlueScale10.4 or later (see
Updating Library Firmware on page 388).
Note: Spectra Logic recommends always keeping your library updated
to the most current version of BlueScale.
2. Import a data cartridge into each partition to start the Media Auto
Discovery process or start the discovery process manually (see
Initiating or Stopping Media Discovery).
Alternatively, you can load each cartridge into an LTO-4 drive and then
unload it (see Moving Media Within a Partition on page 150).
ƒ For Spectra Certified Media purchased after MLM-enabled media
became available, MLM collects the available MLM information
from each cartridge’s MAM, including media health, encryption
status, born on date, and the partition name and adds it to the MLM
database during the discovery process. Each subsequent
load/unload updates the MLM database, providing the ability for
ongoing tracking and reporting.
ƒ The initial load/unload during discovery also establishes an initial
tape health score. This initial health score may not accurately reflect
the actual health of the media.The health score becomes more
accurate during subsequent load/unloads as current usage statistics
are updated and used in the tape’s health scoring.
Notes: ƒ If your previously-purchased MLM-enabled media does not
appear in the MLM database after the discovery process is
complete or if you receive an MLM alert that non-certified
media was loaded, contact SpectraGuard Support for
assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). The alert
about non-MLM-enabled media is disabled by default (see
Configuring Media Lifecycle Management on page 164)
ƒ MLM does not track or report Spectra Certified Media
purchased before MLM-enabled media became available
unless the Media Check option enabled.

172
User Guide 91090000
Getting Started with Using Media Lifecycle Management

MLM Enabled with MLM-Enabled Media Already in the


Library
If you have been using MLM-enabled media in the library without MLM
enabled and have now enabled MLM, the information for each
MLM-enabled cartridge will be added to the MLM database the first time
the cartridge is loaded into and then unloaded from an LTO-4 drive.
Notes: ƒ You can use Media Auto Discovery to add the cartridges to
the MLM database. However, you either have to import a
cartridge to initiate the automatic discovery process or start
the discovery process manually (see Initiating or Stopping
Media Discovery).
ƒ If the Media Check option is enabled, basic health
information for cartridges that are not MLM-enabled is also
available.
During the discovery process MLM collects the available MLM
information from each cartridge’s MAM, including media health,
encryption status, born on date, and the partition name and adds it to the
MLM database. The initial load/unload during discovery also establishes
an initial tape health score. This initial health score may not accurately
reflect the actual health of the media.The health score stabilizes and
becomes more accurate after the first four load/unloads as current usage
statistics are updated and used in the tape's health scoring.

Initiating or Stopping Media Discovery


If you enabled MLM when the library already contained MLM-enabled
media and do not want to wait until new media is imported to discover it,
you can start the discovery process manually. You can also use this manual
discovery process if you chose not to enable Media Auto Discovery (see
Configuring Media Auto Discovery on page 166).
Notes: ƒ If the PreScan feature is enabled for the partition where you
want to manually start the discovery, the PreScan process
runs instead of Media Auto Discovery process.
ƒ Spectra Logic highly recommends that you perform the
manual discovery process when your backup application is
not accessing the library and the library is idle.
Follow these steps to manually initiate the discovery process.
1. Enable Media Lifecycle Management via the configuration menu (see
Configuring Media Lifecycle Management on page 164). After MLM is
enabled, you are ready to initiate the discovery process.

173
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management

2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > MLM. The Media
Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays.
Notes: ƒ If all of the media in the library has previously been
discovered, the Discover Media button is grayed out.
ƒ The Download MLM DB button is only available when you
access the library using the BlueScale web interface.

Figure 84 Discover Media on the MLM Tools screen.

3. Select Discover Media to start the manual discovery process.


4. Choose the partition containing the MLM media you want to discover
and select Next.

Figure 85 The Media Discovery Partition screen.

5. Select OK to begin the discovery process.

Figure 86 The Start Media Discovery screen.

174
User Guide 91090000
Using Media Lifecycle Management

6. Select OK to confirm that the process started and return to the MLM
Tools screen.

Figure 87 The Media Discovery Start Results screen.

7. Select Stop Discovery if you need to interrupt the process.

Figure 88 Stop Discovery on the MLM Tools screen.

USING MEDIA LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT


After media in your library is included in the MLM database, you are
ready to make use of this powerful tool to manage, track, and report all
facets of tape usage from creation to retirement.

Generating Media Lifecycle Management Reports


To generate reports about the media in your library, follow these steps:
1. Log into the library.
2. From the toolbar menu, select General > More Options > Media
Lifecycle Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Report screen
displays (Figure 89 on page 177).
Note: You can also click on Filled Capacity bar graph on the General
Status screen (Figure 78 on page 156).
3. Select either Total Library or a specific partition from the Partition drop-
down list, and then select Go.
By default, the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen shows a
Media Health report for all Spectra Certified Media with MLM support
in the library.

175
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management

4. Select the type of report you want from the Report drop-down list.
Note: Information about MLM-enabled cleaning cartridges only
appears in the Exported Media, Cleans Remaining, and Born on
Date reports.
Option Description
Media Health ƒ For MLM-enabled cartridges, shows the bar code label information, the
overall health (media health), and the load count (the number of times the
MLM-enabled cartridge has been loaded into a tape drive) for each data
cartridge in the selected location.
ƒ For non-MLM-enabled cartridges, shows the bar code label information and
whether the cartridge appears to be usable or unusable.
Remaining Capacity Shows the remaining capacity and maximum capacity for each MLM-enabled
data cartridge. The remaining capacity reflects the native capacity of the
cartridge, not the compressed capacity.
Note: The remaining capacity and maximum capacity on a cartridge is
displayed as GB or TB.
Load Count Shows the load count for each MLM-enabled data cartridge in the selected
location and the born on date (the date on which Spectra Logic enabled the
cartridge to support MLM tracking and reporting).
Write Errors Shows the number of soft errors and the load count for each MLM-enabled data
cartridge.
Cleans Remaining Shows the number of cleanings remaining and the born on date for any MLM-
enabled cleaning cartridges.
Born on Date Shows the date that the MLM-enabled cartridge (both data and cleaning) was
created and certified by Spectra Logic and the load count for each cartridge.
Exported Media Lists the MLM-enabled media (both data and cleaning) that has been exported
from the library, sorted by the export time (oldest first). The report also shows
the user name of the person who exported the media.
Last Write Time Shows the time and date for the most recent write and read operations for each
Last Read TIme MLM-enabled data cartridge.

176
User Guide 91090000
Using Media Lifecycle Management

5. Select Go. The Media Lifecycle Management Report screen refreshes to


display the selected report with a list of the bar-code labels for all media
in the selected location. A media health icon indicates the overall health
of each piece of media, as of the last time it was loaded into a tape drive.

Media health
icon

Figure 89 The Media Lifecycle Management Report screen.

The following table describes the meaning of each media health icon.
Select the bar code next to the icon to view detailed information about
that specific piece of media.
Icon Health score Meaning
100 – 80 The media health is Good.
ƒ Data cartridge: The media is in good condition and operating properly. The
cartridge can be used for writing new data and reading previously written
data.
ƒ Cleaning cartridge: More than ten cleaning cycles remain on the cartridge.
79 – 50 The media health is Average.
ƒ Data cartridge: When the Health graph on the Details screen for the cartridge
falls below a health score of 80, the media health icon changes from green to
yellow (generally due to normal aging). For maximum reliability, only use the
cartridge for restores.
ƒ Cleaning cartridge: The cleaning cartridge is near expiration. From one to ten
cleaning cycles remain.

177
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management

Icon Health score Meaning


49 – 0 The media health is Poor.
ƒ Data cartridge: When the Health graph on the Details screen for the cartridge
falls below a health score of 50, the media health icon changes to red. The
combination of media errors, tape age, and usage indicate that the media has
reached the end of its useful life for reliable data backups and restores and
should be retired.
If you are experiencing an unexpected number of cartridges with poor media
health, you may want to investigate further:
ƒ Review the media health data for each cartridge to see if it has a high error
rate. A high error rate can indicate either that the media health is poor and
the cartridge should be retired or that the cartridge has been written to by a
tape drive that is having trouble.
ƒ If multiple cartridges with high error rates have been written to by the
same tape drive, the tape drive may be the source of the errors. Clean the
tape drive or, if necessary, replace it.
ƒ If the cartridge has a high error rate that cannot be attributed to a tape drive
or environmental factors, retire it.
Note: If the source of the high error rate is a tape drive, the media health icon for
the affected cartridges should return to either green or yellow after
approximately three load/read or write/unload cycles in a known good drive.
ƒ Cleaning cartridge: The cleaning cartridge is expired. No more cleaning
cycles remain. Replace the cleaning cartridge.
The media health is Unknown. The status of the media cannot be determined.

178
User Guide 91090000
Using Media Lifecycle Management

6. To view detailed information about a specific cartridge, enter the bar-


code label information for the cartridge in the Find By Barcode field (see
Figure 89 on page 177) and select Enter. The Details screen for the
selected cartridge displays.
Note: Media health is based on the MLM-tracked history of the
cartridge. The heath indicated by the Health graph may
fluctuate until the cartridge has been loaded six times.

Health graph

Figure 90 The detailed report for the selected media.

7. Select Previous to return to the Media Lifecycle Management Report


screen (Figure 89 on page 177).

Saving an MLM Report


You can choose to save a copy of the MLM report, which is a comma-
separated text file (*.rpt), to a USB drive, mail the saved report to
previously configured email recipient, or both. If desired, you can zip the
file before saving it.
1. Generate the desired report as described in Generating Media Lifecycle
Management Reports on page 175.
2. If you want to save the MLM report to a USB drive, connect the drive to
the LCM’s USB port before continuing.
Note: The option to save the report to USB is only available if you plug
a USB drive in to the LCM’s USB port before you select Save
Report on the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen.

179
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management

3. Select Save Report to display the Save Media Lifecycle Management


Report screen.

Figure 91 The Save Media Lifecycle Management Report


screen.

4. Select the data to include in the saved report and how you want the
report saved.
Note: If you want to email the report, the intended recipient must be a
previously configured mail user (see Configuring Mail Users on
page 280).
Option Description
Report All Media Saves a report containing all of the available detailed MLM data for MLM-
Lifecycle Data enabled media in the selected location (a specific partition or total library).
Note: Depending on the number of cartridges in the selected location, this
report can be quite large.
Report Selected Saves only the fields displayed in the report that you selected on the Media
Data Lifecycle Management Report screen (Figure 89 on page 177).
Note: The headings in the saved report reflect the fields displayed in the report
you select in the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen.
Zip Report Saves the report as a zip file which is compatible with standard file
compression software (for example, WinZip®). Zipping the report is especially
useful when emailing the Report All Media Lifecycle Data report.
Mail Report to Sends the report to a previously configured mail user. Use the drop-down list to
select the recipient for the report file.
Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email user. Spectra
Logic does not save emailed MLM report files unless they are specifically
requested for troubleshooting.
Save to USB Save the report to the USB drive.
Notes:
ƒ The USB option is only available if you plugged a USB drive in to the LCM’s
USB port before you selected Save Report on the Media Lifecycle
Management Report screen.
ƒ If you unzip the report using the standard format used by most file-zipping
applications, the application creates the following directory structure:
*\hard disk\lc\reports.

180
User Guide 91090000
Using MLM PreScan and PostScan

5. Select Save to send the report to the selected destination. Select Previous
to return to the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen without
sending the report.

USING MLM PRESCAN AND POSTSCAN


PreScan and PostScan are a keyed set of configurable background
processes that use an LTO-4 tape drive to provide two levels of verification
for LTO data cartridges.

Topic Described beginning on...


Using PreScan page 181
Using PostScan page 182
Overview page 182
Manually Add a Tape to the PostScan page 184
Queue
Pause the PostScan Process page 186

Using PreScan
PreScan is a background process that automatically inserts each newly
imported LTO cartridge into an available LTO-4 tape drive assigned to the
data partition containing the cartridge. The drive loads the media into the
tape path, and checks it to determine whether it has any of the following
characteristics:
ƒ Non-MLM-enabled
ƒ Broken or dislodged leader
ƒ Red media health
ƒ Write protected
ƒ Encrypted tape with a moniker not currently stored in the library
When the PreScan operation is complete, the library stores the tape health
information into the MLM database. When the drive ejects the cartridge,
the library returns it to its original slot.
PreScan is enabled when you configure a partition (see Configure MLM
PreScan and PostScan on page 217). When it is enabled, it replaces the
more basic Media Auto Discovery process for newly imported media.
As with Media Auto Discovery, you can manually start the PreScan process
if you enabled MLM when the library already contained MLM-enabled
media and do not want to wait until new media is imported to discover it.
You can also pause the PreScan process. See Initiating or Stopping Media
Discovery on page 173 for instructions.

181
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management

Using PostScan
PostScan is a background process that uses an available Global Spare
LTO-4 tape drive assigned to the partition to scan each LTO cartridge in the
partition. This scan verifies that there are no media errors on the tape by
reading the entire length of the tape up to the end of the recorded data
(EOD).
Note: Although PostScan reads the data on the tape, it does not process
this data into a usable form. It simply verifies that it can read the
data from the tape.

Overview
The PostScan process is performed by the library independent of the
backup application normally used to read and write data to the tape. While
PostScan is running, the Global Spare drive it is using is not available to the
partition to replace a malfunctioning drive. In addition, you cannot use the
TAP to import cartridges into or export cartridges from the library. You
also cannot change the library configuration; nor can you create or modify
partitions.
If necessary, you can pause the PostScan operation for one hour so that you
can use the Global Spare or perform other library operations (see Pause the
PostScan Process on page 186). After an hour has passed, the library
restarts the PostScan operation on the tape that was being verified at the
time of the interruption if a Global Spare drive is available.

Automatic Scanning
PostScan automatically checks each MLM-enabled LTO cartridge in a
partition. It is enabled by selecting one or more trigger criteria when you
configure a partition (see Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on
page 217). When one of the configured PostScan criteria is triggered, the
tape is added to the PostScan queue. The queue is processed in a first-in-
first-out (FIFO) basis.

Important When using automatic PostScan tape, configure your backup software to allow at
least 15 minutes for a requested move to complete. If a tape is in the process of
being scanned when it is requested for a backup or restore operation, it must be
unloaded from the Global spare and moved to another drive before the move
request is reported as complete.

During the PostScan process, the background task verifies that the system
has been idle for the period of time specified for the partition, that the
library is not currently in a PostScan blackout period (see Configuring
PostScan Blackout Periods on page 169), and that a Global Spare drive
assigned to the partition is available. If these conditions are met, the library
inserts the first cartridge in its queue into the Global Spare drive. The drive
loads the tape into the tape path and then checks the tape for media errors.

182
User Guide 91090000
Using MLM PreScan and PostScan

When the operation is complete, the library writes the scan date and
pass/fail test result to the cartridge MAM and updates the MLM database
with the scan date, the pass/fail test result, and when (or if) the next scan
should occur. The drive then unloads the cartridge and the library returns
it to its original slot. The library posts a system message showing that the
cartridge has been scanned.
Note: The library checks to see if the Global Spare requires cleaning
after each cartridge is unloaded. If cleaning is required and a
cleaning partition is associated with the data partition, the drive
is cleaned before the next cartridge is processed. If a cleaning
partition is not present, clean the tape drive as described in the
table on page 410.
While the PostScan process is checking a cartridge, the cartridge does not
appear on the BlueScale inventory screens and cannot be moved manually
using the BlueScale user interface. However, if the cartridge is requested by
the backup software it is immediately ejected from the Global Spare drive
that is performing the verification and moved to the location requested by
the backup software. The interrupted PostScan operation is not reported.
The cartridge is returned to the top of the PostScan queue and will be the
first one processed after it is returned to its slot.
Because the backup software can potentially request a tape that is currently
undergoing verification, you can configure blackout periods during which
the PostScan operation is suspended. Configuring blackout periods ensure
that PostScan does not operate during your normal backup window. The
blackout periods apply to all of the data partitions in the library. See
Configuring PostScan Blackout Periods on page 169 for instructions.

Manual Scanning
The automatic PostScan verification process only checks MLM-enabled
LTO data cartridges (LTO-3 or LTO-4). However, cartridges can also be
added to the PostScan queue manually. This is especially useful if your
library contains LTO cartridges that are not MLM-enabled. You can also
use the manual PostScan process to verify a suspect MLM-enabled tape
even if it has previously been scanned. Cartridges that are manually added
to the PostScan queue are processed before cartridges that are added as a
result of the trigger criteria for the partition.

183
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management

Manually Add a Tape to the PostScan Queue


Follow these steps to manually a cartridge to the PostScan queue.
1. Enable Media Lifecycle Management if it is not already enabled (see
Configuring Media Lifecycle Management on page 164).
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > MLM. The Media
Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays.
Notes: ƒ If all of the media in the library has previously been
discovered, the Discover Media button is grayed out.
ƒ The Download MLM DB button is only available when you
access the library using the BlueScale web interface.

Figure 92 Manual PostScan on the MLM Tools screen.

3. Select Manual PostScan. The MLM Manual PostScan screen displays.

Figure 93 Choose media on the MLM PostScan screen.

184
User Guide 91090000
Using MLM PreScan and PostScan

4. If the media is in a partition other than the one currently displayed,


select the desired partition from the Partition drop-down list, then
select Go.
Note: The PostScan feature cannot be used on a cleaning partition.
The Source pane refreshes to display a list of the media in the requested
location type. The list shows the name of the location (for example, the
slot number) and the bar-code label information for the cartridge in that
location.
5. Select the cartridge that you want to check for media errors. You can
select the cartridge either from the Source list, by entering its bar code,
or by entering the slot number where it is located.
To select a cartridge Follow these steps...
using the...
Source list Scroll through the list of available media and select the desired cartridge.
Slot number 1. Enter the slot number for the cartridge you want to verify in the View Source
Slot field.
2. Select Go. The Source inventory list refreshes to show the requested slot
selected at the top of the Source list.
Bar-code label 1. Enter the bar-code label information for the cartridge you want to locate in
information the Find by Barcode field.
Notes:
ƒ Make sure that you type the bar-code label information correctly to avoid
selecting the wrong cartridge.
ƒ Only the slots below the one that is currently highlighted in the source list are
searched. To ensure that all of the slots are searched, scroll to the top of the
source list and highlight the first slot before selecting Find.
2. Select Find. The Source inventory list refreshes to show the requested
cartridge selected at the top of the Source list.

6. Select Add to add the cartridge in the highlighted slot to the Tape List.
7. Repeat Step 4 though Step 6 to add additional tapes to the Tape List.
Note: To remove a cartridge from the Tape List, highlight the cartridge
and select Delete. To remove all of the cartridges from the Tape
List, select Delete All.
8. Select Submit to add the tapes in the Tape List to the PostScan queue.

185
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management

Pause the PostScan Process


While the PostScan process is running, you cannot perform the following
operations:
ƒ Use the Global Spare drive to replace a malfunctioning drive
ƒ Use the TAP to import cartridges into or export cartridges from the
library
ƒ Change the library configuration
ƒ Create or modify partitions
If you need to perform any of these operations or if you need to reset the
library, you can pause the PostScan process. The library returns any
cartridges currently being scanned to their original locations.
Notes: ƒ The pause affects all partitions that are configured to use
PostScan.
ƒ The PostScan process automatically resumes one hour after
the pause.
Use the following steps to pause PostScan.
1. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > MLM. The Media
Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays.
Note: The Pause PostScan button is only present if the PostScan
process is running.

Figure 94 Pause PostScan on the MLM Tools screen.

2. Select Pause PostScan to pause the PostScan operation for one hour so
that you can use the Global Spare or perform other library operations.
After an hour has passed, the library restarts the PostScan operation on
the tape that was being verified at the time of the interruption if a
Global Spare drive is available.

186
User Guide 91090000
Managing the MLM Database

MANAGING THE MLM DATABASE


The MLM database contains the usage history, health, the verification data
for all of MLM-enabled media in your library. It also contains the Drive
Lifecycle Management data for all of the drives in your library (see
Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM on page 197).

Backing Up the MLM Database


As a part of best disaster recovery planning and practices, Spectra Logic
strongly recommends backing up the MLM database to a USB drive or
emailing it to a preconfigured mail recipient after using MLM for some
period of time. In the event of a disaster, you can use the backup to restore
the MLM database information for the media in your library instead of
rebuilding it by loading each cartridge into a drive (see Restoring the MLM
Database on page 190).
Note: For extra security, the library automatically backs up its
configuration and the MLM database to the LCM compact flash
card once a week and whenever a partition is created or
modified. If email for the auto-save backup is configured, the
backups are emailed to the designated recipient (see Enabling
Email for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature on
page 282).
See Use the Auto Save Configuration Feature on page 286
for detailed information about the Auto Configuration
Save feature.

Important The automatic weekly auto-save file reflects the state of the MLM database at the
time the backup was created. If MLM-enabled media is imported into or exported
from the library during the period between the automatic weekly auto-save
operations, the backup of the MLM database may not accurately reflect the
library’s inventory.
If you plan to import or export a large number of MLM-enabled cartridges, backup
the MLM database using the procedure described in this section to ensure that you
have a backup that accurately reflects the information in the database.

Deciding when and how often you back up the MLM database depends on
many factors, including how often tapes are loaded into a tape drive.
ƒ If all of the tapes are loaded into drives frequently, the MLM database
can be rebuilt relatively quickly. The database can be backed up less
frequently.
ƒ If many of the tapes remain in the library without being loaded into a
drive for a long period of time, or if tapes are exported and stay outside
of the library for a long period of time, rebuilding the MLM database
can take a long time. Back up the MLM database more frequently.

187
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management

Back Up the MLM Database


Based on your environment, determine how frequently backups are
needed, then use the following steps to create a backup. You can choose to
save the backup to a USB drive or send it as an email attachment to a
previously configured mail recipient.
1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
3. Select Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen
displays.
4. Select Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show the advanced Utilities
screen.
5. Scroll down and select Save MLM Database. The screen refreshes to
show the details for the utility.

Figure 95 The Save MLM Database utility.

6. Use the Select the Destination drop-down list to choose the destination
for the saved file.
Note: To send the file to someone who is not already listed as a library
mail user, you must first configure that person as an email
recipient as described in Configuring Mail Users on page 280.
Select this option... To...
Save MLM Database Backup the MLM database to a USB drive.
to USB Note: Connect a USB drive to the USB port on the LCM before running the utility.
Mail MLM Database Send the MLM database file as an email attachment to the specified mail
to... recipient.
Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient.
Spectra Logic does not save emailed files unless they are specifically requested
for troubleshooting.

188
User Guide 91090000
Managing the MLM Database

7. If you want to compress the file to make it smaller, select Compress files.
8. Select Run Utility.
After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen displays, showing that the
database file was either saved or sent.
9. Proceed to Verify the MLM Database Backup.

Verify the MLM Database Backup


After performing the MLM database backup, confirm that the backup file
was generated. Make sure the file is more than 0 bytes in size.
If the backup was... Follow these steps...
Saved to a USB 1. Plug the USB drive into a PC that is not connected to the library.
Drive 2. Examine the list of files on the USB drive and locate the SavedMLMDB folder.
3. Open the folder to verify that:
ƒ It contains a file called
cminfo_<date-time>.zdt
—OR—
cminfo_<date-time>.dat
where date-time is the time stamp for when the backup was created.
—AND—
ƒ The file is more than 0 bytes in size.
4. If a file with the format is present and is more than 0 bytes in size, the
database backup was successful and the file is usable. Store the USB drive in
a safe location.
5. If the MLM database file is not present or if it is 0 bytes in size, repeat the
backup process (Backing Up the MLM Database on page 187) using a
different USB drive.
Sent as an Email 1. Open the email attachment and verify that:
Attachment ƒ The attachment contains a zip file called
cminfo_<date-time>.zdt
—AND—
ƒ The file is more than 0 bytes in size.
2. If the zip file is present, the backup was successful and is usable. Save the
email attachment to a safe location from which you can copy it to a USB
drive, if needed.
3. If the zip file is not present, repeat the backup process (Backing Up the MLM
Database on page 187) to generate the email again.

189
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management

Restoring the MLM Database


Use the following steps to restore the MLM database from a previously
saved backup that was created using the Save MLM Database utility (see
Backing Up the MLM Database on page 187).
1. If you plan to restore using the MLM database backup file that was sent
as an email attachment, use the following instructions to copy the file to
a USB drive; otherwise, skip to Step 2.
a. Create a folder called SavedMLMDB on a USB drive.
b. Copy the cminfo_<date-time>.dat file to the SavedMLMDB folder
on the USB drive.
2. Plug the USB drive containing the MLM database backup file into the
USB port on the LCM before continuing.
3. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
4. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
5. Select Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen
displays.
6. Select Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show the advanced Utilities
screen.
7. Scroll down and select Restore MLM Database from USB. The screen
refreshes to show the details for the utility.

Figure 96 The Restore MLM Database from USB utility.

8. Use the drop-down list to select the file name of the MLM database
backup you want to use for the restore.
9. Select Run Utility.
After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen displays, showing that the
database was restored.

190
User Guide 91090000
Managing the MLM Database

Deleting Records From the MLM Database


The maximum number of records in the MLM database is restricted to
10 times the maximum number of cartridges the library can hold (for
example, in the T680 library, the maximum number of records is 6800).
When this limit is reached, records are automatically deleted on a first-in,
first-out (FIFO) basis.
When a cartridge is retired or permanently exported from the library, you
can delete its record from the MLM database. Records can be deleted
individually or as a group.
1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > MLM. The Media
Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays.

Figure 97 The Delete Records option on the MLM Tools


screen.

3. Select Delete Records. The Delete MLM Records screen displays.

Figure 98 The Delete MLM Records screen.

191
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management

4. Select the cartridge records you want to delete from the MLM database.
Note: An asterisk (*) indicates that the cartridge has been exported
from the library.
5. Select Delete Selected to remove the selected records from the MLM
database.

Downloading the MLM Database as a CSV File


If desired, you can download the MLM database as a comma-separated-
value (CSV) file. You can then open the file in any software application that
supports this type of file (for example, spreadsheet software).
Note: The Download MLM DB button is only available when you access
the library using the BlueScale web interface.
1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > MLM. The Media
Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays.

Figure 99 The Download MLM DB option on the MLM Tools


screen.

3. Select Download MLM DB. The Open file dialog box displays.
Note: The appearance of this dialog box depends on the web browser
you are using.

Figure 100 The Open file dialog box.

192
User Guide 91090000
Managing the MLM Database

4. Choose how you want to handle the file.


ƒ Select Open with, choose the application you want to use to open the
file, and then select OK to download and open the file.
ƒ Select Save File > OK to save the database to a location that is
accessible to the computer you are using to access the BlueScale web
interface.
5. If you chose to save the file, a dialog box for specifying where you want
to save the file displays.

Figure 101 The Windows Save file dialog box.

a. Navigate to the location where you want to store the file. The
available locations depend on the network to which the computer
you use to access the BlueScale web interface is connected.
b. If desired, change the default file name to something more
meaningful in your environment.
c. Select Save.

193
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management

6. To view the information stored in the MLM database, open the CSV file
using a software program that supports this file type.

Figure 102 An example of the downloaded MLM database


file (opened in Microsoft Excel®).

194
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 8
Drive Lifecycle Management
This chapter describes how to use BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management
to proactively monitor the health of the LTO drives in your library.

Topic Described beginning on...


BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management this page
Overview
Enabling Drive Lifecycle Management page 196
Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM page 197
Use the Drive Health Icons page 197
View a Detailed Heath Report page 198
Using DLM to Test a Drive page 201

BLUESCALE DRIVE LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT OVERVIEW


This section provides an overview of how BlueScale Drive Lifecycle
Management works in your library.

Important The BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management feature is only supported for LTO drives
(LTO-2 and later).

BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) helps you identify drives


that experience a high number of errors or other problems during
operation. DLM is automatically enabled when Media Lifecycle
Management (MLM) is enabled and cannot be used without MLM. See
Chapter 7 – Media Lifecycle Management for detailed information about
enabling and using MLM.

195
Chapter 8 — Drive Lifecycle Management

Each time media is unloaded from a drive, the library collects the tape
health data from the drive. This data includes soft or hard read/write
errors, tape alerts, and flags generated during the time the most current
cartridge was loaded in the drive. It also includes the current value for the
drive’s single character display (SCD) and any errors detected at the time
the tape is unloaded. In addition, the DLM data for the 50 most recently
loaded tapes is stored in the MLM database. This data is used to generate
an overall drive health status for the library, as well as health reports for
each individual drive.
You can view the DLM health information for each individual drive and, if
necessary, use the built-in BlueScale drive test to clean the drive and then
run a read/write performance test using a scratch tape. This test, when
used in conjunction with other DLM data and Media Lifecycle
Management (MLM) data, can help you determine whether a tape drive or
the media is the source of the errors you are investigating.
In addition to the reporting and testing functions, DLM also lets you reset
the drive, which power cycles the drive, runs the internal drive diagnostics,
and reinitializes it in the library.

ENABLING DRIVE LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT


Drive Lifecycle Management is automatically enabled when you enable
Media Lifecycle Management (MLM). When DLM is enabled, the Drives
icon under the Configuration toolbar changes to show that DLM is
enabled. See Configuring Media Lifecycle Management on page 164 for
information about enabling MLM.
Note: See Resetting a Drive on page 360 and Adding or Replacing a
Drive on page 419 for information about the other buttons on
this screen.

DLM Drive
icon

Figure 103 The DLM Drive icon in the Configuration toolbar.

196
User Guide 91090000
Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM

MONITORING DRIVE HEALTH USING DLM


The DLM health icons and detailed drive health reports help you monitor
each drive in a partition.

Use the Drive Health Icons


Health status icons provide at-a-glance health information for the drives in
the library.
ƒ On the General Status screen, the drive health icon indicates the overall
health for all of the drives in the selected partition (see Figure 22 on
page 72).
ƒ The drive health icons, visible on the Drives screen (Figure 103 on
page 196) and the Drive Detail screen (Figure 104) indicate the overall
health of individual drives.
The following table describes the drive health status icons.
Note: The drive health icon reflects data collected for the drive while
the most current tape was loaded in the drive. This data consists
of the code presented on the drive’s SCD, as well as tape alerts,
and errors detected at the time the tape is unloaded. See
Interpreting the Display Character on page 367 for detailed
information about the SCD codes for LTO tape drives.

Icon Meaning
The drive health is Good.
The drive is operating normally.
The drive requires Attention.
Use the SCD code information on the Drive Details screen to determine
the type of action required. See Interpreting the Display Character on
page 367 to determine what action is needed to address the condition.
The drive health is Poor.
The drive has experienced an unrecoverable error or problem. See
Interpreting the Display Character on page 367 to determine what action
is needed to address the condition. If necessary, replace the drive.
The drive health is Unknown. The status of the drive cannot be
determined.
Note: To refresh the drive health data, use the Update button on the
Drive Lifecycle Management report screen (see Figure 105 on page 199).

197
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 8 — Drive Lifecycle Management

View a Detailed Heath Report


Use the following steps to view a detailed health report for an individual
drive.
Note: To save the Drive Lifecycle Management report, use the Save
MLM Database utility as described in Back Up the MLM
Database on page 188.
1. Log into the library.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Drives to display the
Drives screen (Figure 103 on page 196).
3. Click the Details button next to the drive for which you want to view
more information. The Drive Details screen displays.

Figure 104 The Drive Details screen.

198
User Guide 91090000
Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM

4. Select DLM to view a detailed Drive Lifecycle Management report.


Note: The DLM button is not present if DLM is not enabled (see
Enabling Drive Lifecycle Management on page 196).

Current drive
health

Tape
summary

Tape history

Drive errors

Figure 105 The Drive Lifecycle Management report screen.

199
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 8 — Drive Lifecycle Management

The Drive Lifecycle Management Report screen (see Figure 105 on


page 199) is divided into four panes, which are described in the
following table.

Important To ensure that you are viewing the most current data, select Update at the top of
the Drive Lifecycle Management Report screen to refresh displayed data.

This pane Shows...


Drive Health Status The drive identifier and any status information. The drive health icon indicates
the drive’s overall health at the time the screen was displayed.
Tape Summary The bar-code label information and media health information for the last
50 cartridges loaded into the drive. The media health icon indicates the
cartridge health at the time the cartridge was unloaded from the drive and the
current health from the MLM database. Refer to the table on page 177 of
Chapter 7 – Media Lifecycle Management for descriptions of the icons related to
media health.
Note: Depending on the usage history for the drive, this pane may not be
present.
Tape History Detailed information about each of the individual tapes listed in the Tape
Summary pane as well as any Tape Alert flags or SCD codes posted by the drive
while the tape was loaded in the drive.
Note: Depending on the usage history for the drive, this pane may not be
present.
Drive Errors Note: Detailed information about any errors detected by the drive, beginning
with the most recent. This information includes the bar code of the tape loaded
in the drive at the time of the error and the sense key, ASC, and ASCQ data
reported by the drive for the error.
Note: Depending on the usage history for the drive, this pane may not be
present.

5. Use the buttons at the tope of the screen as need.

Select... To...
Update Refresh the report with the most current status
Reset Health Reset the drive health to Good (Green). Use this button after you have corrected
the condition that changed the drive’s health to yellow or red. Select Continue to
complete the reset health process.
Note: If the condition was not truly corrected, the next tape load sets the drive
health back the previous indication.
Previous Return to the Drive Details screen (Figure 104 on page 198).

200
User Guide 91090000
Using DLM to Test a Drive

USING DLM TO TEST A DRIVE


If you suspect that a drive is experiencing problems or if the Drive
Lifecycle Management report indicates that a drive is experiencing
repeated errors, you can use the DLM Drive Health Verification wizard to
test the drive. During the test process, the wizard cleans the drive and then
performs a write/read test using a scratch tape.
Note: See Chapter 14 – Drive Troubleshooting for additional drive
troubleshooting information.
Requirements Before you can run the DLM Drive Health Verification
wizard, the following requirements must be met:
ƒ The drive must not contain a cartridge.
ƒ A scratch tape appropriate to the generation of drive being tested is
available in the partition’s entry/exit pool. The scratch tape health must
be Good (green) or Usable.

Make sure that the scratch tape does not contain data that you need to retain. The
Caution test process overwrites all data on the tape.

ƒ If a cleaning partition is associated with the partition containing the


drive, make sure the cleaning partition contains a cleaning cartridge
with Good (green) or Usable health. You can use MLM to determine the
health of the cleaning cartridges currently in the cleaning partition (see
Generating Media Lifecycle Management Reports on page 175).
If necessary, import a known good cleaning cartridge into the cleaning
partition (see Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or a Cleaning
Partition on page 128).
ƒ If the partition does not use a cleaning partition, a cleaning cartridge
with Good or Usable health must be in the partition’s entry/exit pool.
The cleaning cartridge must be in a regular TeraPack magazine; it
cannot be in a Maintenance TeraPack magazine.
Notes: ƒ The test will abort (fail) if the scratch cartridge health is not
Good or Usable.
ƒ The test will abort (fail) if the cleaning cartridge health is not
Good or Usable.
ƒ If the entry/exit pool contains only one chamber, both the
cleaning cartridge and the scratch cartridge must be in the
same TeraPack magazine.

201
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 8 — Drive Lifecycle Management

Use the following steps to launch the DLM Drive Health Verification
wizard.

Important If you are accessing the library remotely using the BlueScale web interface, you
will not be able to complete the test if the scratch cartridge and cleaning cartridge
are not already present in the required locations.

1. Log into the library from the operator panel.


2. If necessary, import a TeraPack magazine containing a scratch tape into
the partition’s entry/exit pool and a cleaning cartridge into the cleaning
partition, if present (see Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or a
Cleaning Partition on page 128).
Note: If the partition does not use a cleaning partition, both the scratch
tape and the cleaning cartridge can be imported into the
entry/exit pool in the same magazine.
3. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Drives to display the
Drives screen.
Note: The Test button is not present of DLM is not enabled.

Figure 106 The Test button on the Drives screen.

202
User Guide 91090000
Using DLM to Test a Drive

4. Select the Test button to start the DLM drive test wizard.
The wizard determines whether all of the requirements for the test have
been met. If one or more requirement needs attention, a screen displays
to tell you what needs to be done.
Notes: ƒ If you are accessing the library remotely using the BlueScale
web interface and either the scratch cartridge or the cleaning
cartridge is not available, then Cancel is the only option
available.
ƒ If all of the requirements are met, the Move and
Import/Export buttons are not present on this screen. Skip to
Step 5.

Figure 107 The Drive Health Verification resources required


screen.

Use the following steps to address the unmet requirements.


a. Use the Move or Import/Export button, as required, to move a
cartridge out of the drive or to make a scratch cartridge and a
cleaning cartridge available.
b. After you complete the necessary actions, return to the Drives
screen (Step 4) and select Test to launch the wizard again.
If all of the requirements have been met, the Drive Health
Verification screen displays a warning about the upcoming test
process. Proceed to Step 5.

Figure 108 The Drive Health Verification requirements


screen.

203
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 8 — Drive Lifecycle Management

5. Select Next to select the scratch cartridge you want to use for the test.
Note: Only data cartridges located in the partition’s entry/exit pool are
listed and available for selection.

Figure 109 The DLM Select Scratch Cartridge screen.

6. Select Next to begin the automatic test process. A series of status screens
let you know how the test is progressing. The test process requires
approximately 15 minutes to complete.
Note: The following conditions can result in the test aborting before it
completes. If this occurs, resolve the problem and repeat Step 2
through Step 6.
ƒ The cleaning cartridge is expired.
ƒ The scratch cartridge is encrypted and the encryption key is
not stored in the library.
When the test is complete, a results screen displays showing the
outcome of the test. If the drive passes the test, the drive health is set to
Good (green).

Figure 110 The DLM Test Results screen (test successful).

If it fails, the drive health is set to Poor (red). Contact Spectra Logic
about replacing the drive (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).

Figure 111 The DLM Test Results screen (test failed).

7. Select Continue to return to the Drives screen.

204
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 9
Using Partitions
This chapter describes procedure for working with partitions in the library,
including the following topics:

Topic Described beginning on...


Before you Begin... page 206
Configuring a New Data Partition page 209
Enter the Initial Partition Settings page 211
Choose the Robotic Control Path page 212
Configure Global Spare Tape Drives page 213
Configure the Drives and Chambers for page 215
the Partition
Configure a Direct-Attach Fibre Channel page 217
Drive Partition
Configuring a Direct-Attach SCSI page 220
Partition
Configuring an F-QIP-Attached SCSI page 222
Drive Partition
Configuring an E-QIP-Attached SCSI page 227
Drive Partition
Configuring a Cleaning Partition page 236
Enter the Initial Partition Settings page 237
Configure the Chambers for the Partition page 238
Confirming and Saving the Partition page 239
Settings
Modifying an Existing Partition page 242
Deleting a Partition page 245

205
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

BEFORE YOU BEGIN...


Before you start configuring the partitions in your library, read:
ƒ Partitions, beginning on page 45, to learn how the library uses data
partitions to create multiple virtual libraries.
ƒ MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 159 to learn how the MLM
PreScan and PostScan features interact with the data partitions.

Configuration Requirements
When configuring partitions, keep the requirements in the following
sections in mind.

Data Partitions
ƒ The library requires, at a minimum, one data partition.
ƒ A maximum of eight data partitions are allowed in the library.
ƒ Each partition must have a minimum of one chamber assigned to the
storage pool.
ƒ Each data partition must have at least one drive.
ƒ Although an entry/exit pool for a data partition is not required, using
one is highly recommended. Only users with superuser or
administrator privileges can import media directly into or export media
directly from the storage pool.
D

Important Drive firmware update tapes can only be imported into the entry/exit pool. If you
plan to update drive firmware using a code load tape, you must configure an entry/
exit pool for the partition.

ƒ If all of the enabled chambers and drives in your library are already
assigned to an existing partition, you must modify or delete one or
more partitions to provide chambers and drives for the new partition.

Cleaning Partitions
ƒ Cleaning partitions do not count against the eight partition maximum.
ƒ You can configure cleaning partitions either before or after you
configure data partitions (see Configuring a Cleaning Partition on
page 236). However, if you know that you want to use Auto Drive
Clean for one or more data partitions, it is best to configure the cleaning
partition before you configure the data partitions.
ƒ If you create the cleaning partition after you create the data partitions,
you will need to modify the data partitions to assign a cleaning
partition to them.

206
User Guide 91090000
Before you Begin...

Preparation

Important You cannot create, modify, or delete a partition if the library is actively running a
PreScan or PostScan operation. You must stop or pause the operation before you
can continue.
ƒ To stop PreScan, select Stop Discovery on the Media Lifecycle Management
Tools screen (see Figure 88 on page 175).
ƒ To pause the PostScan for one hour, select Pause PostScan on the Media
Lifecycle Management Tools screen (see Figure 94 on page 186).

The following table summarizes the information that you need.

Component Description
Media Type Determine the type of media to be used in the partition. You can only choose
from media types that are compatible with the drives already installed in the
library. The media type you select determines the type of drive that can be used
in the partition.
Note: Only one drive type can be used in each partition.
Cleaning Partition If you plan to use the Auto Drive Clean feature, determine the number of
chambers to be used for the cleaning partition. A cleaning partition can be
shared by multiple data partitions as long as the cleaning cartridges are
compatible with the tape drives in the data partitions (see Auto Drive Clean on
page 49 for information about the relationship between cleaning partitions).
Entry/Exit pool: Determine the number of chambers to be used for the partition’s entry/exit
Number of pool. Each chamber holds a single TeraPack magazine or RXT media pack.
Chambers Note: The chambers in the entry/exit pool are not accessible to the backup
software for writing or reading data.
Storage Pool: Determine the number of chambers to be used for the partition’s storage pool.
Number of Each chamber holds a single TeraPack magazine or RXT media pack.
Chambers
Drives Assigned Determine which drives to assign to the partition. Only drives that are already
to this Partition installed in the library and are compatible with the media type you select are
available. Each data partition must have at least one drive associated with it.
Global Spares Determine which tape drives to designate as Global Spares if you plan to use
this feature.
Important: In order for the Global Spare option to be available, all tape drives
in the partition must be the same generation.
PreScan and Decide whether or not you want the library to scan the tapes in the partition for
PostScan media errors. See MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 159 for detailed
information about the PreScan and PostScan features.
Important: PostScan requires the partition to have one or more Global Spare
drives configured.

207
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

Component Description
Robotic Control Decide how the SCSI motion commands will be relayed to the transporter.
Path ƒ If a partition uses direct-attach drives, decide which drive will handle the
robotic control commands from the host.
Note: Direct-attach SCSI drives require a bus extension module to connect to
the host’s SCSI bus. RXT drives cannot be used in a direct-attach partition.
ƒ If a partition uses QIPs, decide whether to assign one or both of the ports on
the exporting QIP as the control path to the library’s robotic transporter.
Note: If you plan to select both ports, make sure that the software used with the
partition supports using multiple control paths and that the ports are cabled
correctly. Selecting both ports provides failover, but requires software that
supports two control paths to the transporter.
Addressing If a partition uses F-QIPs, decide what addressing mode and loop ID each port
F-QIP Ports will use (see Configure the F-QIP Port Addressing on page 225). Each F-QIP
port is identified using a worldwide name (WWN) on a Fibre Channel network
or SAN. This WWN is based on the soft address assigned to the QIP when it
attaches to the network or its fixed Loop ID if soft addressing is not used.
Addressing If a partition uses E-QIPs, decide whether the network address for each port
E-QIP Ports will be static or assigned through a DHCP server on the network. For static
addressing, you must specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway used
by the E-QIP. Each E-QIP port is identified by its network address.
Note: Depending on your environment, you may need to configure digests,
CHAP authentication, and iSNS.
Direct-Attach Fibre If a partition uses direct-attach Fibre Channel drives, decide what addressing
Channel Drives mode and loop ID each drive will use (see Configure the Fibre Channel
Addressing for the Drives on page 219).
SCSI IDs If a partition uses direct-attach SCSI drives, each drive must be assigned a SCSI
ID. The SCSI ID must be unique for the SCSI bus to which the drive is
connected (see Configure the Drive SCSI ID on page 221). Valid SCSI IDs on a
wide SCSI bus are 0 – 15.
Drive Visibility If a partition uses SCSI drives, decide whether the drives connected to each QIP
are visible (accessible) to external hosts through one or both of the QIP’s
interface ports.
Note: If you select both, make sure that the backup software can handle server
contention over drive use resulting from multiple paths to a drive.

208
User Guide 91090000
Configuring a New Data Partition

CONFIGURING A NEW DATA PARTITION


The first time that the library starts up after installation or following a reset
to factory defaults, you have the option of letting the library configure a
single data partition using all of the library’s available resources or
manually creating one or more partitions to your own specifications.
Use the following steps to manually create a new data partition.
1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
To change user types, select Security > Switch User from the toolbar
menu, then log in as a user with the required privileges.
2. If you need to modify encryption settings for the partition, log into the
library as a superuser, then select Security > Encryption. The
Encryption User Login screen displays. Type the encryption user
password, then select OK to display the Encryption configuration
screen. See Configuring Encryption on page 312 for detailed
information about enabling and configuring encryption for a partition.

Start Encryption
application

Figure 112 The Encryption User Login screen.

3. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions to display the
Shared Library Services screen.
ƒ If one or more partitions have already been created, the existing
partitions are listed in alphabetical order.

Figure 113 The Shared Library Services screen.

209
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

ƒ If the library does not currently have any partitions configured, the
Shared Library Services screen presents you with two options for
creating a partition.

Figure 114 The Shared Library Services screen when no


partitions have been created.

Automatically create a partition If you want the library to


automatically configure the partition, choose this option and then
follow the prompts to create a single partition that uses all the
licensed capacity and all installed tape drives.
Notes: ƒ This option is only available if there are currently no
partitions created in the library.
ƒ This option is not available if the library contains multiple
QIP or drive types.
ƒ Do not use this option if you want to use one or more of the
installed drives as a Global Spare.
ƒ This option does not enable encryption. After the partition is
created, follow the instructions in Chapter 12 – Configuring
and Using Encryption to enable encryption.
Manually create a partition Use the steps in the following sections
to create the desired partition.
4. Proceed to Enter the Initial Partition Settings.

210
User Guide 91090000
Configuring a New Data Partition

Enter the Initial Partition Settings


1. From the Shared Library Services screen, select New. The Name and
Media Type screen displays.

Figure 115 The Name and Media Type screen, create a data
partition.

2. Enter a unique, descriptive name to identify the partition in the Name


field. Names can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters and can include
the @ - _ /. and the space characters.
The default name for a data partition is Partition n, where n is a
number.
3. Select the media type for this partition. You can only use one type of
media per partition.
ƒ Choose <media type> to create a data partition.
ƒ Choose <media type> Clean to create a cleaning partition (see
Configuring a Cleaning Partition on page 236).
Note: <media type> corresponds to the type of media that will be used
in the partition. Only the media types corresponding to drives
installed in the library are listed on this screen. If you have
multiple drive types installed in the library, the media type you
choose dictates the type of drives that can be used in the
partition.
4. Proceed to Choose the Robotic Control Path.

211
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

Choose the Robotic Control Path


One direct-attach drive or QIP in the partition is designated as the
controller for the partition. The controller receives and processes robotic
commands sent from the host to the partition. The QIP or drive you select
is referred to as the exporting QIP or drive.
Note: The decision to use a QIP or a direct-attach drive to provide the
robotic control path determines the type of partition you will
create (see Step 6 on page 217).
1. Select Next. The Robotic Control Path screen lists the controllers (QIPs
and direct-attach drives) currently installed in the library.
Note: Depending on the types of QIPs and drives you have installed in
the library, the controllers listed may be different from those
shown in Figure 116.

Figure 116 The Robotic Control Path screen.

2. Select the direct-attach drive or QIP that will provide the control path
for the robotics.

Important If the partition uses direct-attach drives, select one of the drives as the controller;
do not select a QIP as the controller even if one is listed.

Notes: ƒ Only drives corresponding to the media type you selected in


the Name and Media Type screen (Figure 115 on page 211)
are listed. For a partition using direct-attach drives, you can
use any drive you plan to include in the partition as the
controller.
ƒ The bus expansion module does not provide any controller
functionality and is not listed as a controller.
3. Proceed to Configure Global Spare Tape Drives.

212
User Guide 91090000
Configuring a New Data Partition

Configure Global Spare Tape Drives


The Global Spare option lets you replace a failed drive remotely using a
spare drive in the library. Having a spare drive in the library lets you
continue your backup operations and replace the failed drive the next time
you are physically present at the library.
Requirements The Global Spare option is only available for direct-attach
Fibre Channel tape drives. The spare must be the same technology
generation as the drive it replaces. For example, you cannot use a direct-
attach Fibre Channel LTO-3 drive as a spare for direct-attach Fibre Channel
LTO-4 drive. The library prevents you from selecting drives that cannot be
used as spares. The type of drive you select impacts the type of drives you
can assign to the partition.
Partitions The Global Spare option is available only if all of the Fibre
Channel tape drives in the partition are the same generation. Although a
Global Spare drive can be shared by multiple partitions, the drive can only
be used by one partition at a time. If you want to configure more than one
partition to use the same Global Spare drives, repeat the steps in this
section for each partition.
PostScan Requirements If you plan to use the MLM PostScan feature, you
must configure at least one Global Spare drive for the partition.
When the PostScan process starts it “owns” the Global Spare drive until it
has processed all of the cartridges in its queue (unless you pause the
PostScan operation as described in Pause the PostScan Process on
page 186). If the shared Global Spare drive is being used for PostScan it is
not available for use as a spare. Configuring one or more dedicated Global
Spare drives for each partition that uses PostScan is highly recommended.
Note: See Using PostScan on page 182 for information about the
PostScan feature.
Setup If the correct tape drives are already installed, you can configure a
drive as a Global Spare as part of the partition configuration process; or
you can configure Global Spares later.
Note: See Using a Global Spare Tape Drive on page 107 for instructions
on how to use the Global Spare for a failed tape drive.

213
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

Follow these steps to set up a Global Spare tape drive.


1. Select Next. The Spare Drives screen lists the drives that are available
for use as Global Spares.
If you do not want to configure spare drives, skip to Configure the
Drives and Chambers for the Partition.
2. Select one or more of the available tape drives to be designated as
spares. Drives that cannot be used as spares are grayed out.

Figure 117 The Global Spare selection screen.

3. Proceed to Configure the Drives and Chambers for the Partition.

214
User Guide 91090000
Configuring a New Data Partition

Configure the Drives and Chambers for the Partition


1. Select Next to display the Chambers and Drives screen.

Figure 118 The Chambers and Drives screen (direct-attach


Fibre Channel drives shown).

2. Complete the following information in the Chambers and Drives


screen.

For this field... Enter...


Storage Chambers The number of storage chambers assigned to the storage pool for this partition.
Notes:
ƒ Each chamber contains a TeraPack magazine. Each magazine has slots for
either 10 LTO cartridges or 9 SDLT cartridges.
ƒ The size of the partition’s storage pool is the total number of chambers you
want to assign to the partition MINUS the number of chambers you reserved
for the partition’s entry/exit pool.
ƒ If you are configuring only one partition in your library, use all remaining
licensed chambers. If you are creating multiple partitions, be sure to reserve
enough chambers to configure the other partitions.
ƒ If you licensed all of the chambers in the library and want to use a cleaning
partition, you must also subtract the number of chambers used for the
cleaning partition from the total number of chambers assigned to the storage
pool.

215
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

For this field... Enter...


EE Chambers The number of chambers assigned to the entry/exit pool for this partition.
Although an entry/exit pool is not required, using one is highly recommended.
Important: If you will need to update drive firmware using a firmware update
tape, you must configure an entry/exit pool for the partition. Drive firmware
update tapes can only be imported into the entry/exit pool.
Note: The chambers in the entry/exit pool are not accessible to the backup
software for writing or reading data.
Drives Select the drives to be dedicated to this partition. The check boxes for any
installed drives that cannot be used in the partition are grayed out.
Notes:
ƒ If you selected a direct-attach Fibre Channel or SCSI drive to provide the
robotics control path, you can only choose drives with the same interface as
the exporting drive for the partition. Mixing Fibre Channel and SCSI drives in
a partition is not allowed.
ƒ If you enabled Global Spares by selecting one or more drives in the Spare
Drives screen, you can only choose direct-attach Fibre Channel drives for the
partition.
ƒ If you plan to use SCSI drives in the partition, they must be connected to the
network through either an F-QIP, an E-QIP, or a bus expansion module (SCSI
bus).
ƒ If you plan to mix multiple generations of the same media technology (for
example, LTO-3 and LTO-4) in the same partition, make sure that the drives
in the partition support all of the generations. The media used by different
generations may not be compatible (for example, see LTO Read/Write
Compatibility on page 467.

3. If you want to enable Auto Drive Clean in this data partition and have
previously created a cleaning partition (see Configuring a Cleaning
Partition on page 236), use the Cleaning Partition drop-down list to
select the cleaning partition. If you do not want to enable Auto Drive
Clean, select None.
Note: The option to select a cleaning partition is only available if you
previously configured a cleaning partition that uses the same
type of media as the data partition. If you create a cleaning
partition later, edit the data partition to associate the cleaning
partition with it.
4. If you are not logged into the encryption application or have not
configured encryption, skip to Step 6. You can configure the partition to
use encryption later, as described in Configuring Encryption on
page 312.
If you logged into the encryption application (see page 209) and have
already configured encryption, the Encryption screen displays. See
Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition on page 317 for
information about this screen.
5. After you complete the Encryption screen, proceed to Step 6.

216
User Guide 91090000
Configuring a New Data Partition

6. The remaining configuration steps for the partition depend on the


controller you selected to provide the robotics control path. Proceed to
one of the following sections:
ƒ Configure a Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drive Partition
ƒ Configuring a Direct-Attach SCSI Partition on page 220
ƒ Configuring an F-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition on page 222
ƒ Configuring an E-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition on page 227

Configure a Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drive Partition


In this type of partition, one of the direct-attach Fibre Channel drives
(indicated by an “f” in the drive identifier) in the partition provides the
control path for SCSI motion commands issued by the host to control the
robotic transporter (see Choose the Robotic Control Path on page 212). The
Fibre Channel drives connect directly to the Fibre Channel network. See
Figure 18 on page 53 for an example of this type of configuration.

Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan


If MLM is enabled, you can configure the partition to use the MLM
PreScan and PostScan features. See Using MLM PreScan and PostScan on
page 181 for information about these features.
Notes: ƒ The options for triggering PostScan are only available if you
configured one or more Global Spares for the partition.
ƒ When you import tapes with MLM disabled, those tapes are
not checked.

217
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

Use the following steps to configure the PreScan and PostScan features for
the partition.
1. From the Chambers and Drives screen (or the Encryption screen), select
Next. The MLM Media Verification screen displays.
Note: If you do not want to use these features, skip to Configure the
Fibre Channel Addressing for the Drives.

Figure 119 The Media Verification screen.

2. Configure the PreScan and PostScan for the partition. Selecting any of
the PostScan triggers automatically enables PostScan for the partition.
Select this field... To...
Enable PreScan Enable the PreScan feature. When enabled, PreScan replaces the more basic
Media Auto Discovery process.
Verify After Time Add the tapes in the partition to the automatic PostScan queue after the
specified number of days have passed since the last scan. Enter the number of
days in the Days field.
Verify After Write Add each tape in the partition to the automatic PostScan queue after data is
Verify After Read written to it or read from it.

3. Proceed to Configure the Fibre Channel Addressing for the Drives.

218
User Guide 91090000
Configuring a New Data Partition

Configure the Fibre Channel Addressing for the Drives


The Fibre Channel Loop ID determines how each drive in the partition is
addressed when attached to a Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric.
1. From the MLM Media Verification screen, select Next. The Fibre
Channel Loop ID’s screen displays.

Figure 120 The Fibre Channel Loop ID’s screen (direct-attach


Fibre Channel drive).

2. Select Soft Addressing or Hard Addressing for each of the drives listed.
If you select Hard Addressing, enter a value between 0 and 125 for the
Loop ID.
3. Proceed to Configure User Access.

Configure User Access


1. From the Fibre Channel Loop ID’s screen, select Next. The Partition
Users screen displays.

Figure 121 The Partition Users screen.

2. Select the users who are allowed access to this partition. Only users that
have previously been configured can be selected (see Configuring
Library Users on page 266).
3. Proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 239.

219
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

Configuring a Direct-Attach SCSI Partition


In this type of partition, one of the direct-attach SCSI drives in the partition
provides the control path for SCSI motion commands issued by the host to
control the robotic transporter (see Choose the Robotic Control Path on
page 212). In this type of partition, each drive in the partition is connected
to bus expansion module. Each drive is on a separate SCSI bus (see
Figure 19 on page 56).

Important Spectra Logic does not support daisy-chaining multiple SCSI drives on a single
SCSI bus, nor does it support daisy-chaining other devices on the same SCSI bus
as a drive.

Important A direct-attached SCSI drive partition does not support Global Spares or the MLM
PostScan feature. If you want to use either of these features, see Configure a
Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drive Partition on page 217.

Note: You must have a bus expansion module installed in the same
DBA as the drives in order to use direct-attach SCSI drives.

Configure MLM PreScan


If MLM is enabled, you can configure the partition to use the MLM
PreScan feature instead of the more basic Media Auto Discovery process.
See Using PreScan on page 181 for information about these features.
Note: When you import tapes with MLM disabled, those tapes are not
checked.
Use the following steps to configure PreScan for the partition.
1. From the Chambers and Drives screen (or the Encryption screen), select
Next. The MLM Media Verification screen displays.
Note: If you do not want to use this feature, skip to Configure the Fibre
Channel Addressing for the Drives.

Figure 122 The Media Verification screen.

2. Select Enable PreScan to enable this feature.


3. Proceed to Configure the Drive SCSI ID.

220
User Guide 91090000
Configuring a New Data Partition

Configure the Drive SCSI ID


The SCSI ID for each drive determines how the drive is addressed on the
SCSI bus.
1. From the MLM Media Verification screen, select Next. The SCSI ID’s
screen displays.

Figure 123 The SCSI ID’s screen.

2. Enter a SCSI ID for each drive.


Each device on the SCSI bus must have a unique SCSI ID. SCSI IDs can
range from 0 to 15 on a wide SCSI bus.

Make sure that the SCSI IDs you specify are not assigned to other devices on the
Caution same SCSI bus. Assigning the same SCSI ID to multiple devices on the same SCSI
bus will cause communication problems on the bus.

3. Proceed to Configure User Access.

Configure User Access


1. From the SCSI ID’s screen, select Next. The Partition Users screen
displays.

Figure 124 The Partition Users screen (direct-attach SCSI).

2. Select the users who are allowed access to this partition. Only users that
have previously been configured (see Configuring Library Users on
page 266) can be selected.
3. Proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings.

221
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

Configuring an F-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition


In this type of partition, an F-QIP provides the Fibre Channel interface to
the SCSI drives in the partition as well as the control path for SCSI motion
commands issued by the host to control the robotic transporter. See
Figure 21 on page 58 for an example of this type of configuration.

Important An F-QIP-attached SCSI drive partition does not support Global Spares or the MLM
PostScan feature. If you want to use either of these features, see Configure a
Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drive Partition on page 217.

Important Connecting SCSI drives through an F-QIP is only supported as a legacy solution.

To create this type of partition, select an F-QIP to provide the control path
for the motion control commands to the transporter (see Choose the
Robotic Control Path on page 212) and select SCSI drives in the Chambers
and Drives screen (see Configure the Drives and Chambers for the
Partition on page 215). These drives can be connected to either the F-QIP
that provides the robotics control path or to another F-QIP in the library.
Note: You cannot use QIP-attached SCSI drives and direct-attach Fibre
Channel drives in the same partition.

Configure MLM PreScan


If MLM is enabled, you can configure the partition to use the MLM
PreScan feature instead of the more basic Media Auto Discovery process.
See Using PreScan on page 181 for information about these features.
Note: When you import tapes with MLM disabled, those tapes are not
checked.
Use the following steps to configure PreScan for the partition.
1. From the Chambers and Drives screen (or the Encryption screen), select
Next. The MLM Media Verification screen displays.
Note: If you do not want to use this feature, skip to Configure User
Access.

Figure 125 The Media Verification screen.

2. Select Enable PreScan to enable this feature.


3. Proceed to Configure User Access.

222
User Guide 91090000
Configuring a New Data Partition

Configure User Access


1. From the MLM Media Verification screen, select Next. The Partition
Users screen displays.

Figure 126 The Partition Users screen.

2. Select the users who are allowed access to this partition. Only users that
have previously been configured can be selected (see Configuring
Library Users on page 266).
3. Proceed to Configure the Robotic Path Visibility.

Configure the Robotic Path Visibility


The robotic path visibility determines whether one or both of the interface
ports on the F-QIP provide the robotic control path.
1. From the Partition Users screen, select Next. The Robotic Path Visibility
screen displays.

Figure 127 The Robotic Path Visibility screen (F-QIP with SCSI
drives).

223
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

2. Select either one or both ports on the F-QIP to provide the robotic
control path to the transporter.
Notes: ƒ If you have previously configured an F-QIP in the partition
and do not need to make any configuration changes, select
Skip Ports to advance to the Configure Drive Visibility
screen.
ƒ Selecting both ports provides failover, but requires software
that supports two control paths to the transporter.
3. If the drives in the partition are connected to the F-QIP that provides
the robotics control path (the exporting F-QIP), proceed to Configure
Drive Visibility.
If some or all of the drives in the partition are not connected to the
exporting F-QIP, skip to Configure the F-QIP Port Addressing on
page 225. After you configure the port addressing for the exporting
F-QIP, you will configure the drive visibility as described in the
following section, Configure Drive Visibility.

Configure Drive Visibility


The QIP has an any-to-any relationship between the QIP’s drives and the
QIP’s two ports. See Partitions Using QIP-Attached SCSI Drives on page 57
to learn more about this relationship.
For each drive on the F-QIP, identify the port(s) through which the hosts
will communicate with the drive.
1. From the Robotic Path Visibility screen, select Next to display the Drive
Visibility screen.

Figure 128 The Drive Visibility screen (F-QIP with SCSI drives).

224
User Guide 91090000
Configuring a New Data Partition

2. For each drive, select either one or both ports to provide access
(visibility) to the drive.
Notes: ƒ Drives can be visible through both ports for failover or drive
sharing. If they are visible through both ports, make sure that
the software accessing this partition can handle any server
contention over drive use that can result from multiple paths
to a single drive.
ƒ If you previously configured the selected ports, select Skip
Ports and proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition
Settings on page 239
3. Proceed to Configure the F-QIP Port Addressing.

Configure the F-QIP Port Addressing


If the partition uses multiple F-QIPs you will encounter two separate
screens for configuring the port addressing:
ƒ The Exporting F-QIP Settings screen configures the port addresses for
the F-QIP that provides the robotics control path (the exporting F-QIP).
These settings also apply to any drives connected to the exporting
F-QIP.
Note: An F-QIP can export multiple partitions. If the F-QIP is being
used to export more than one partition, a confirmation screen
displays to warn you that any changes you make will affect all
partitions associated with the F-QIP.
ƒ When one or more of the drives in the partition are connected to other
F-QIPs in the library, a separate F-QIP Settings screen configures the
port addresses for any drives in the partition that are connected to that
F-QIP. If multiple additional F-QIPs are used, the settings for each one
must be configured separately.
ƒ If you previously configured the F-QIP settings for both the exporting
F-QIP and any additional F-QIPs in the partition and do not want to
make any configuration changes, select Next on the F-QIP
Configuration screen to proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition
Settings on page 239.

225
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

Use the following steps to configure the F-QIP port addressing for the
exporting F-QIP and any additional F-QIPs in the partition.
1. From the Drive Visibility screen, select Next. The Exporting F-QIP
Configuration screen (or F-QIP Configuration screen) displays.

Figure 129 The Exporting F-QIP Configuration Figure 130 The F-QIP Configuration screen for
screen. SCSI drives connected to another F-QIP.
2. For the Address and Fibre Mode settings, choose one of these
combinations:
ƒ Use Soft Address and Fabric.
ƒ Use Loop ID and Loop. The Loop ID must be between 0 and 125.
ƒ Use Soft Address and Auto-negotiate.
ƒ Use Loop ID and Auto-negotiate. The Loop ID must be between 0 and
125.
Note: If you choose Loop as the Fibre Mode, the Fibre Channel switch
to which the F-QIP is connected may override your settings.
3. Repeat the configuration steps in this section to configure any
additional F-QIP ports if:
ƒ All of the drives in the partition are connected to the exporting
F-QIP and you selected both F-QIP ports in the Robotic Path
Visibility screen or the Drive Visibility screen.
—OR—
ƒ All of the drives in the partition are connected to the exporting
F-QIP and you selected different F-QIP ports in the Robotic Path
Visibility and the Drive Visibility screens.
—OR—
ƒ All of the drives in the partition are not connected to the exporting
F-QIP. You must configure the ports on the F-QIP(s) where the
drives are connected.
4. If necessary, configure the drive visibility for the F-QIP ports (see
Configure Drive Visibility on page 224).
5. After you have configured all of the F-QIP ports being used, proceed to
Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 239.

226
User Guide 91090000
Configuring a New Data Partition

Configuring an E-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition

Important Ethernet QIPs (E-QIPs) a are only supported as legacy devices. They are no longer
available for purchase.

Important Connecting SCSI drives through an E-QIP is only supported as a legacy solution.

Important An E-QIP-attached SCSI drive partition does not support Global Spares or the MLM
PostScan feature. If you want to use either of these features, see Configure a
Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drive Partition on page 217.

In this type of partition, the E-QIP provides the iSCSI network interface to
the SCSI drives in the partition as well as the control path for SCSI motion
commands issued by the host to control the robotic transporter. See
Figure 21 on page 58 for an example of this type of configuration.
To create this type of partition, select an E-QIP as the controller (see Choose
the Robotic Control Path on page 212).

Configure the Ethernet Protocol


1. From the Spare Drives screen, select Next. The Ethernet Protocol screen
displays. The only choice is iSCSI.

Figure 131 The Ethernet Protocol screen (E-QIP with SCSI


drives).

2. Proceed to Configure the Drives and Chambers for the Partition on


page 215.
3. After you configure the drives and chambers for the partition, proceed
to Step 4, below.
4. If you are not logged into the encryption application or have not
configured encryption, proceed to Configure User Access. You can
configure the partition to use encryption later, as described in
Configuring Encryption on page 312.
If you are logged into the encryption application (see page 243) and
have already configured encryption, the Encryption screen displays.
See Enable Drive-Based Encryption on page 319 for information about
this screen. After you complete the Encryption screen, proceed to
Configure MLM PreScan.

227
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

Configure MLM PreScan


If MLM is enabled, you can configure the partition to use the MLM
PreScan feature instead of the more basic Media Auto Discovery process.
See Using PreScan on page 181 for information about these features.
Note: When you import tapes with MLM disabled, those tapes are not
checked.
Use the following steps to configure PreScan for the partition.
1. From the Chambers and Drives screen (or the Encryption screen), select
Next. The MLM Media Verification screen displays.
Note: If you do not want to use this feature, skip to Configure User
Access.

Figure 132 The Media Verification screen.

2. Select Enable PreScan to enable this feature.


3. Proceed to Configure User Access.

Configure User Access


1. From the MLM Media Verification screen, select Next. The Partition
Users screen displays.

Figure 133 The Partition Users screen.

2. Select the users who are allowed access to this partition. Only users that
have previously been configured can be selected (see Configuring
Library Users on page 266).
3. Proceed to Configure the Robotic Path Visibility.

228
User Guide 91090000
Configuring a New Data Partition

Configure the Robotic Path Visibility


The robotic path visibility determines whether the one or both of the
interface ports on the E-QIP provide the robotic control path.
1. From the SmartMotion Options screen, select Next. The Robotic Path
Visibility screen displays.

Figure 134 The Robotic Path Visibility screen (E-QIP).

2. Select either one or both ports on the E-QIP to provide the robotic
control path to the transporter.
Notes: ƒ If you have previously configured an E-QIP in the partition
and do not need to make any configuration changes, select
Skip Ports to skip the Exporting E-QIP Configuration screen
and advance to the Configure Drive Visibility screen.
ƒ Selecting both ports provides failover, but requires software
that supports two control paths to the transporter.
3. If the drives in the partition are connected to the E-QIP that provides
the robotics control path (the exporting E-QIP), proceed to Configure
Drive Visibility.
If the drives in the partition are not connected to the exporting E-QIP,
skip to Configure the E-QIP Port Addressing on page 231. After you
configure the port addressing for the exporting E-QIP, you will
configure the drive visibility.

229
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

Configure Drive Visibility


The QIP has an any-to-any relationship between the QIP’s drives and the
QIP’s two ports. See Connectivity on page 52 to learn more about this
relationship.
For each drive on the E-QIP, identify the port(s) through which the outside
world will communicate with the drive.
1. From the Robotic Path Visibility screen, select Next. The Drive Visibility
screen displays.

Figure 135 The Drive Visibility screen (E-QIP).

2. For each drive, select either one or both ports to provide access
(visibility) to the drive.
Notes: ƒ Drives can be visible through both ports for failover or drive
sharing. If they are visible through both ports, make sure that
the software accessing this partition can handle any server
contention over drive use that can result from multiple paths
to a single drive.
ƒ If you previously configured the selected ports, select Skip
Ports and proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition
Settings on page 239.
3. If the drives in the partition are connected to the E-QIP that provides
the robotics control path (the exporting E-QIP), proceed to Configure
the E-QIP Port Addressing.
If some or all of the drives in the partition are not connected to the
exporting E-QIP, a separate E-QIP configuration screen sets the port
addressing for the E-QIP connected to the drives. Proceed to Configure
the E-QIP Port Addressing.

230
User Guide 91090000
Configuring a New Data Partition

Configure the E-QIP Port Addressing


Notes: ƒ The Exporting E-QIP Settings screen configures the port
addresses for the E-QIP that provides the robotics control
path. These settings also apply to any drives connected to the
exporting E-QIP.
ƒ The E-QIP Settings screen configures the port addresses for
any drives in the partition that are connected to another
E-QIP. If multiple additional E-QIPs are used, the settings for
each one have to be configured separately.
ƒ An E-QIP can export multiple partitions. If the E-QIP is being
used to export more than one partition, a confirmation screen
displays to warn you that any changes you make will affect
all partitions associated with the QIP.
ƒ If you previously configured the E-QIP and do not want to
make any configuration changes, select Next to proceed to
Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 239.
Use the following steps to configure the port addressing for each E-QIP.
1. From the Drive Visibility screen, select Next. The Exporting E-QIP
Settings screen (or the E-QIP Settings screen) displays.

Figure 136 The Exporting E-QIP Configuration Figure 137 The E-QIP Configuration screen for
screen. SCSI drives connected to another E-QIP.

2. Enter a Hostname of up to 64 alphanumeric characters. The name can


include hyphens.

231
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

3. Select either DHCP or Static Address. Using a static address is


recommended.
ƒ Select DHCP if the network to which you are connecting the E-QIP
uses a DHCP server to automatically assign IP addresses.

Important If you select DHCP, and your environment uses iSNS, be sure to read Configuration
Note: Using DHCP in iSNS Environments on page 232 for important information.

ƒ Select Static Address if your network does not use DHCP or if you
simply want to have a fixed IP address for the partition. Enter the
addressing information for the E-QIP. Hosts connected to the E-QIP
use this information when communicating with devices controlled
by the E-QIP.
ƒ The IP address and gateway must be valid Class A, B, or C
addresses in the form nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Enter 0.0.0.0 for the
Gateway if your network does not use a gateway.
ƒ The subnet mask must be a valid octet in the form
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn.
4. Proceed to Configure the E-QIP iSCSI Settings on page 233.

Configuration Note: Using DHCP in iSNS Environments


Using DHCP requires the QIP to be connected to an external network in
order for it to obtain an IP address.
Using DHCP only Using DHCP addressing requires the QIP to
communicate with an external DHCP server to obtain the Ethernet setup
information needed for communication over a network. If the DHCP
server is not present or cannot be reached when the library powers up, the
QIP will not be able to communicate with any host on the network.
When DHCP is enabled, the QIP begins searching for a DHCP server as
soon as the library is powered on. If a DHCP server does not respond
within three minutes, a warning message is sent to the user interface. The
QIP continues searching until it finds a DHCP server. You may need to
reset the QIP to restart the DHCP server scan.
When you first create a Gigabit Ethernet partition, you must enter a host
name for the ports on the E-QIP. Because this hostname is not yet
registered with the DHCP server, the only way to address the iSCSI port on
the QIP is by using its IP address. Thus, if you use DHCP, you must get the
DHCP-assigned IP address directly from the DHCP server and enter this
address in the Static Address field to establish the initial communication
with the QIP.

232
User Guide 91090000
Configuring a New Data Partition

Using iSNS An alternative to knowing the DHCP-assigned IP address of


the QIP is to enable and configure iSCSI Storage Name Service (iSNS) for
the DHCP port. When iSNS is enabled, the QIP registers its iSCSI name
and IP address with the iSNS server. The iSNS server maintains a list of the
DHCP IP addresses and iSCSI names of all iSCSI devices on the network,
including the QIP. Any iSNS-aware iSCSI initiator on the network can use
this information to establish a connection to an iSCSI device on the
network without knowing the host name or IP address of the iSCSI device.

Configure the E-QIP iSCSI Settings


1. From the Exporting E-QIP Settings screen, select Next. The Exporting
iSCSI Settings screen displays.
Note: If you are configuring the ports for an E-QIP other than the
exporting E-QIP, this screen is called iSCSI Settings. The
information on the screen is identical.

Figure 138 The Exporting iSCSI Settings screen.

2. If necessary for your network environment, change the Listen Port for
the E-QIP. The value must be an integer between 1 and 65535 (the
default setting is 3260).

233
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

3. If desired, select Enable Header Digests and/or Enable Data Digests.


Note: With digests disabled, any attempted connection that requires
digests fails.
When digests are enabled, the connection is considered a
preferred connection. With a preferred digest connection,
any initiator connection (with or without digests)
succeeds.
Currently, the only way to determine if any single iSCSI
connection has digests enabled or disabled is if the
initiator can report the connection type to the user.
4. If desired, select CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol)
as the authentication method.
5. If desired, select Use iSNS.
If you select Use iSNS, enter the iSNS IP Address and the iSNS Port. The
iSNS IP address must be a valid Class A, B or C address and the iSNS
Port setting must be an integer between 1 and 65535. See Using iSNS on
page 233 for information about using iSNS.
6. If you did not select CHAP authentication, continue with Step 7.
If you selected CHAP authentication, proceed to Configure E-QIP
CHAP Authentication.
7. Repeat the configuration steps beginning at Configure the E-QIP Port
Addressing on page 231 to configure any additional E-QIP ports if:
ƒ All of the drives in the partition are connected to the exporting
E-QIP and you selected both E-QIP ports in the Robotic Path
Visibility screen or the Drive Visibility screen.
—OR—
ƒ All of the drives in the partition are connected to the exporting
F-QIP and you selected different F-QIP ports in the Robotic Path
Visibility and the Drive Visibility screens.
—OR—
ƒ All of the drives in the partition are not connected to the exporting
F-QIP. You must configure the ports on the E-QIP(s) where the
drives are connected.
8. After you have configured all of the E-QIP ports being used, proceed to
Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings.

234
User Guide 91090000
Configuring a New Data Partition

Configure E-QIP CHAP Authentication


1. From the Exporting iSCSI Settings screen, select Next. The Exporting
CHAP Settings screen displays.
Note: If you are configuring the ports for an E-QIP other than the
exporting E-QIP, this screen is called CHAP Settings. The
information on the screen is identical.

Figure 139 The Exporting CHAP Settings screen.

2. Enter the Remote Device Name and Remote Secret. The remote name
and secret (password) are used by the iSCSI initiator when it
authenticates the QIP port.
The name must be less than 256 alphanumeric (plus hyphen, period,
and colon) characters, and the secret must be less than 101 characters.
Note: Some iSCSI initiators have their own imposed limits on the
number of characters used for the Name and Secret.
3. If you want to use bi-directional (dual) CHAP, enter the Local Device
Name and Local Secret. The local name and secret (password) are used
by the QIP when it authenticates the iSCSI initiator.
The name must be less than 256 alphanumeric (plus hyphen, period,
and colon) characters, and the secret must be less than 101 characters.
Notes: ƒ Dual CHAP is only needed if the iSCSI initiator requires
bidirectional CHAP authentication. If the iSCSI initiator is
configured to use uni-directional CHAP, then uni-directional
CHAP is used, regardless of how the QIP is configured.
ƒ You must either enter values for both the Local Device Name
and Local Secret or leave both blank.
ƒ Some iSCSI initiators impose their own limits on the number
of characters used for the Local Device Name and Local Secret.

235
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

4. Select Save. The CHAP entry displays at the top of the screen.

Important Do not select Next before selecting Save, or you will lose all of the CHAP
configuration settings you just completed.

5. If required, repeat Step 2 through Step 4 to add as many CHAP entries


as necessary, selecting Save after each. If necessary, you may also edit
entries from the Exporting CHAP Settings screen.
6. After you finish configuring all of the required CHAP entries, proceed
to Step 7.
7. Repeat the configuration steps beginning at Configure the E-QIP Port
Addressing on page 231 to configure any additional E-QIP ports if:
ƒ All of the drives in the partition are connected to the exporting
E-QIP and you selected both E-QIP ports in the Robotic Path
Visibility screen or the Drive Visibility screen.
—OR—
ƒ All of the drives in the partition are connected to the exporting
E-QIP and you selected different E-QIP ports in the Robotic Path
Visibility and the Drive Visibility screens.
—OR—
ƒ All of the drives in the partition are not connected to the exporting
E-QIP. You must configure the ports on the E-QIP(s) where the
drives are connected.
8. After you have configured all of the E-QIP ports being used, proceed to
Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings.

CONFIGURING A CLEANING PARTITION


Cleaning partitions provide permanent storage for cleaning cartridges
inside the library when using the Auto Drive Clean option (see Auto Drive
Clean on page 49). A cleaning partition can be shared by multiple data
partitions as long as the cleaning cartridges are compatible with the tape
drives in the data partitions.
If you configured MLM PostScan for the data partition associated with the
cleaning partition, the Global Spare drive being used to verify the
cartridges is cleaned using a cleaning cartridge in the cleaning partition.
After each cartridge is moved from the Global Spare drive following its
verification, the library checks to see if the drive requires cleaning. If it
does and a cleaning partition is associated with the data partition, the drive
is cleaned before the next tape is processed.

236
User Guide 91090000
Configuring a Cleaning Partition

You can configure cleaning partitions either before or after you configure
data partitions. However, if you know that you want to use automated
drive cleaning with a data partition, it is easier to configure the cleaning
partition before you configure the data partitions. A cleaning partition can
be shared by multiple data partitions as long as the cleaning cartridges are
compatible with the tape drives in the data partitions.
When a cleaning partition is associated with a data partition (thereby
enabling Auto Drive Clean), the library automatically makes any chambers
that are not already configured for use in another partition available for
use in cleaning partitions. The library gives you the option of reserving one
unused chamber for a cleaning partition each time you create a data
partition.
If all of the physically available chambers in your library are already
licensed and assigned to existing partitions, you must modify or delete one
or more partitions to provide chambers for the new cleaning partition (see
Modifying an Existing Partition on page 242 and Deleting a Partition on
page 245).

Enter the Initial Partition Settings


1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the Shared Library Services screen, select New. The Name and
Media Type screen displays.

Figure 140 The Name and Media Type screen, create a


cleaning partition.

3. Enter a unique, descriptive name to identify the partition in the Name


field. Names can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters and can include
the @ - _ /. and the space characters.

237
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

4. Select <media type> Clean to create a cleaning partition using the


selected cleaning cartridge type.
Note: <media type> corresponds to the type of cleaning cartridge that
will be stored in the cleaning partition. Only the cleaning media
types compatible with the drives installed in the library are
listed.

Configure the Chambers for the Partition


1. From the Name and Media Type screen, select Next. The Chambers and
Drives screen displays.

Figure 141 The Chambers and Drives screen (cleaning


partition).

2. Enter the number of chambers to assign to the this cleaning partition.


3. Proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings.

238
User Guide 91090000
Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings

CONFIRMING AND SAVING THE PARTITION SETTINGS


After you finish configuring the partition, confirm and save the partition
settings.
Note: If you want to save the configuration to a USB drive, connect the
drive to the USB port on the LCM (see Figure 8 on page 35)
before continuing.
1. After you complete the configuration screens for the partition as
described in the previous sections, select Next. The Save Library
Configuration screen displays.

Figure 142 The Save Library Configuration screen.

2. Select whether to save the current library configuration.


ƒ Don’t Save Library Configuration (not recommended)—A backup of
the changed library configuration will not be saved.
ƒ Save Library Configuration To—Saves a backup of the changed
library configuration to the selected destination. Using this option is
highly recommended to ensure that you can easily restore the
library if necessary.
Choose whether to save the library configuration file to USB or to
email it to an already-configured mail recipient (see Configuring
Mail Users on page 280).
Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email
recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed configuration files
unless they are specifically requested for troubleshooting.

239
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

3. Select Next. The Save Partition screen displays.


Note: The Save Partition screen on your library may be different from
the ones shown in Figure 143 and Figure 144. The information
on this screen varies depending on the type of partition you have
configured.

Figure 143 The Save Partition screen for an F-QIP Figure 144 The Save Partition screen (cleaning
partition with a Global Spare and cleaning partition).
partition.

4. Review the information on the screen and confirm that all settings are
correct for this partition’s configuration.
ƒ If the configuration information is correct, proceed to Step 5.
ƒ If the configuration information is not correct, either:
ƒ Select Cancel to configure the partition again from the beginning.
ƒ Select Previous to move backward through the configuration
screens until you reach the settings that need correction. Make
any necessary corrections, then select Next to move forward
through the screens and return to the Save Partition screen.
Note: If the screen requiring the correction is toward the beginning of
the configuration process, it may be easiest to select Cancel and
repeat the entire configuration process.
As you move backward through the configuration screens, the
values are reset to their default values. After you reach the
desired screen and make the necessary changes, advance
through the screens and re-enter any necessary information.

240
User Guide 91090000
Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings

5. Select Save. The library requires several minutes to store the


configuration information, after which the Shared Library Services
screen redisplays with the partition you just created listed.

Figure 145 The Shared Library Services screen.

Notes: ƒ If you assigned a cleaning partition to the data partition, the


partition icon changes as shown in Figure 145.
ƒ When you save the partition, the library generates an auto-
configuration file and saves it to the LCM compact flash.
ƒ If you configured the auto-save email option, an email
containing the updated library configuration and the MLM
database is sent to the specified recipient (see Enabling Email
for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature on page 282).
6. To configure another data partition, repeat the entire configuration
process, beginning with Configuring a New Data Partition on page 209.
To configure another cleaning partition, repeat the entire configuration
process, beginning with Configuring a Cleaning Partition on page 236

241
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

MODIFYING AN EXISTING PARTITION


When reducing the number of chambers assigned to a partition, physically export
Caution any media in those chambers, as described in Exporting or Exchanging Media on
page 140, before you remove chambers from the partition.
By default, the library deletes empty chambers from a partition first. However, if all
of the chambers are full, the library is forced to delete populated chambers. When
this happens, the media packs in the deleted chambers are no longer accessible
through BlueScale or the backup application. You must add the chambers to either
a new or an existing partition before the media packs can be accessed again.

Notes: ƒ Spectra Logic strongly recommends saving the library


configuration, either to a USB drive or as an attachment to an
email sent to a previously configured mail recipient, before
you modify a partition.
ƒ When you make a change to a partition, the library generates
an auto-configuration file and saves it to the LCM compact
flash.
ƒ If you configured the auto-save email option, an email
containing the updated library configuration and the MLM
database will be sent to the specified recipient (see Enabling
Email for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature on
page 282).
ƒ Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email
recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed configuration
files unless they are specifically requested for
troubleshooting.
Use the following steps to edit an existing partition.
1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
To change user types, select Security > Switch User from the toolbar
menu, then log in as a user with the required privileges.

242
User Guide 91090000
Modifying an Existing Partition

2. If you need to modify encryption settings for the partition, log into the
library as a superuser, then select Security > Encryption. The
Encryption User Login screen displays. Type the encryption user
password, then select OK to display the Encryption configuration
screen. See Configuring Encryption on page 312 for detailed
information about enabling and configuring encryption for a partition.

Start Encryption
application

Figure 146 The Encryption User Login screen.

3. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions. The Shared
Library Services screen displays.

Figure 147 The Shared Library Services screen.

243
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

4. Select either Summary or Edit. Either option can be used when


modifying a partition.
ƒ If you select Summary, the Partition Settings screen displays,
showing summary information related to the selected partition.
If you do not want to make any changes to the partition, select
Cancel to return to the Shared Library Services screen.
Note: To view all of the configuration settings for the partition, select
the Edit option.

Figure 148 The Partition Settings screen (data partition).

ƒ Select Edit from either the Partition Settings screen or the Shared
Library Services screen to display the Name and Media Type screen.

Figure 149 The Name and Media screen (data Figure 150 The Name and Media Type screen
partition). (cleaning partition).

244
User Guide 91090000
Deleting a Partition

5. The Name and Media Type screen is the beginning of a series of


configuration screens. Depending of the type of partition you are
modifying, the sequence of steps and screens matches those for creating
either:
ƒ a new data partition, beginning with Enter the Initial Partition
Settings on page 211,
—OR—
ƒ a new cleaning partition, beginning with Configuring a Cleaning
Partition on page 236,
except that you cannot change the media (drive) type specified for
the partition.

DELETING A PARTITION
When you delete a partition, the drives and chambers previously assigned
to that partition can be reassigned to an existing partition or used to create
a new partition.

Before deleting a partition, either physically export the media stored in the
Caution chambers for that partition or have a plan to add the chambers to another
partition. After the partition is deleted, the media in the chambers assigned to the
partition will not be accessible until the chambers are assigned to another
partition.
To ensure that you do not inadvertently mix media from one partition with that
from another, use your backup software to eject all of the media in the partition.
The library moves the media to the partition’s entry/exit pool. Export the media
from the library as described in Exporting or Exchanging Media on page 140.

Note: Spectra Logic strongly recommends saving the library


configuration, either to a USB drive or as an attachment to an
email sent to a previously configured mail recipient, before you
delete a partition.
Use the following steps to delete an existing partition.
1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
To change user types, select Security > Switch User from the toolbar
menu, then log in as a user with the required privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions. The Shared
Library Services screen displays.
3. Select Delete for the partition you want to delete. A Feedback Required
screen displays.

245
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions

4. Select whether to save the current library configuration.


If you select to save the configuration, choose whether to save it to USB
or to email it to an already-configured mail recipient (see Configuring
Mail Users on page 280).
Note: If you want to save the configuration to a USB memory device,
connect the device to the USB port on the LCM (see Figure 8 on
page 35) before continuing.
5. Select Ok to confirm that you want to delete the partition or select
Cancel to return to the Shared Library Services screen.
The screen refreshes. The deleted partition is no longer listed on the
Shared Library Services screen.

246
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 10
AutoSupport
This chapter describes how to configure and use AutoSupport with your
library. All AutoSupport functionality is included with your library
purchase.

Topic Described beginning on...


AutoSupport Overview page 248
Configuring AutoSupport page 250
Before You Begin page 250
Configure Mail Recipients page 251
Configure AutoSupport Profiles page 251
Configure Alarms page 255
Configure Log Set Forwarding page 257
Using AutoSupport page 258
Creating New Support Tickets page 258
Updating Existing Support Tickets page 262

247
Chapter 10 — AutoSupport

AUTOSUPPORT OVERVIEW
AutoSupport configures the library to automatically contact library users
with messages or when specific events occur. It can also be used to open or
update a support ticket and send it to a specified recipient or to
SpectraGuard Support. AutoSupport can be used without email access by
saving the ASL sets generated by AutoSupport to a USB key and then
manually sending the stored information to SpectraGuard Support.

Send Log Sets


This feature lets you manually generate a standard AutoSupport Log
(ASL) set (file) and email it to a pre-configured recipient or save it to a USB
drive. You can use the Send Log Sets option to open or update a support
ticket and send it to a specified recipient or to SpectraGuard Support. The
ASL included in the support ticket includes the following types of
information:
ƒ Library Control Module (LCM) logs
ƒ LCM configuration (including the current physical configuration)
ƒ EC data from all components
ƒ Firmware information
ƒ Contact information for data center staff
ƒ Other library information specified in the AutoSupport user profile.

Log Forwarding
This feature configures the library to send monthly ASL files to
preconfigured recipients (see Configure Log Set Forwarding on page 257).

248
User Guide 91090000
AutoSupport Overview

Critical Alarms
When you enable critical alarms, the library automatically generates an
ASL file whenever any of the events in the following table occurs. If you
configured one of your AutoSupport profiles as the AutoSend Profile (see
Step 3 on page 253), the library automatically sends the ASL file to the mail
recipients in the AutoSend profile.
Note: If you select autosupport@spectralogic.com as a mail recipient in
the AutoSend profile, the library also sends the ASL file and a
ticket request to SpectraGuard Support.

For this event... An AutoSupport ticket request is generated...


Motion Restart Whenever motion restarts. Each motion restart is treated as a separate event
and results in generation and submission of an AutoSupport ticket request.
Front or Side Panel If the library side panel is opened or removed three times within thirty minutes.
Opened or Removed Only one AutoSupport ticket request is generated for each 30-minute time
period.
Power Supply When a power supply fails. Each power supply is evaluated separately. Only
Failure one AutoSupport ticket request per power supply is generated for each 24-hour
time period, even if the power supply fails and then resumes operation
repeatedly. If two power supplies fail during the same 24-hour time period, two
separate AutoSupport ticket requests are generated, one per failed power
supply.
QIP Failure Whenever the library detects that a QIP is no longer present. Only QIPs that are
configured as part of a partition will generate an AutoSupport ticket request.
The following QIP problems can generate a QIP failure event:
ƒ Failure of the QIP software or hardware,
ƒ Loss of communication between the library and the QIP
ƒ Removal of a QIP from the library without using the BlueScale Controller
Remove or Controller Replace operation.
AutoSupport ticket requests are not generated if the QIP is removed following a
Controller Remove or a Controller Replace operation.
Each QIP is evaluated separately. Only one AutoSupport ticket request per QIP
is generated for each 24-hour time period, even if the QIP fails and then
resumes operation repeatedly. If two QIPs fail during the same 24-hour time
period, two separate AutoSupport ticket requests are generated, one per failed
QIP.

249
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 10 — AutoSupport

For this event... An AutoSupport ticket request is generated...


Drive Failure When the library detects that a drive which is part of a configured partition is
no longer present and this drive failure results in the percentage of failed drives
in the partition meeting or exceeding a specified threshold (see Configure
Alarms on page 255).
The following drive problems can generate a drive failure event:
ƒ Failure of the drive software or hardware
ƒ Loss communication between the library and the drive
ƒ Removal of a drive from the library without using the BlueScale Drive
Remove or Drive Replace operation.
AutoSupport ticket requests are not generated if the drive is removed following
a Drive Remove or a Drive Replace operation.
Library Controller If the library controller (LC) fails to properly initialize.
Fails to Initialize

CONFIGURING AUTOSUPPORT
If you have any questions about configuring AutoSupport, contact
SpectraGuard Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
Note: To simplify entering the information required to configure and
use AutoSupport, use the BlueScale web interface or a keyboard
attached to the LCM.

Before You Begin


Before you configure AutoSupport, Spectra Logic recommends connecting
the library to an email gateway. You will need to do the following:
ƒ Connect a10BaseT/100BaseT Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector
on the LCM (see Library Control Module (LCM) on page 35).
ƒ Obtain the library’s IP address, subnet, and gateway address (see
Configuring Network Settings on page 278).
ƒ Obtain the AutoSupport Customer/Contract Number for the library.

250
User Guide 91090000
Configuring AutoSupport

Configure Mail Recipients


If not already completed, configure the mail recipient who should receive
AutoSupport information (see Configuring Mail Users on page 280). At a
minimum, configure SpectraGuard Support (autosupport@spectralogic.com)
as a mail recipient if you want to send AutoSupport ticket requests to
SpectraGuard Support. If desired, you can configure additional recipients,
as well.
Notes: ƒ The default autosupport@spectralogic.commail recipient can
be used for any ASL or HHM files that are generated by the
library. This includes those generated manually, or
automatically in response to critical events or log forwarding.
ƒ You cannot configure the autosupport@spectralogic.com mail
recipient to receive messages that result from configuration
changes or system messages generated by the library.
ƒ AutoSupport can be used without email access by saving the
information generated by AutoSupport to a USB drive and
then manually sending the stored information to
SpectraGuard Support.

Configure AutoSupport Profiles


Use the following steps to create or modify a profile for each person
assigned to work with SpectraGuard Support to troubleshoot problems
with the library or drives.
1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. If not already completed, configure the mail recipients who should
receive AutoSupport information (see Configure Mail Recipients).
3. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > AutoSupport. The
AutoSupport screen displays.
Note: If you have not yet configured an AutoSupport profile, the Send
Log Set button will be grayed out. If you have not configured at
least one profile for AutoSend, the Configure Alarms button will
be grayed out.

Figure 151 The AutoSupport screen.

251
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 10 — AutoSupport

4. Select Manage Profiles. The AutoSupport Profiles screen displays.

Figure 152 AutoSupport Profiles screen.

Creating or Modifying a Profile


1. Select New Profile to create a new profile or select Edit Profile to modify
an existing profile. The Company Information screen displays.

Figure 153 AutoSupport Company Information screen.

ƒ Complete the information in this screen. The information marked


with an asterisk (*) is required.
Note: Make sure to fill in all of the required fields in each of the
following screens. You cannot advance to the next screen if
required information is missing.
ƒ The Customer/Contract Number for the library is an alpha-numeric
string of exactly six (6) characters.

Important Contact Spectra Logic Support at www.spectralogic.com/support if you need help


locating your contract number. Entering a number other than your exact contract
number will prevent us from finding your information in our system.

252
User Guide 91090000
Configuring AutoSupport

2. Select Next. The Contact Information screen displays.

Figure 154 AutoSupport Contact Information screen.

Enter the information for your contact person in the fields provided.
This information determines how Spectra Logic contacts this person.
3. Select Next. The System and Mail Information screen displays.

Figure 155 AutoSupport System and Mail Information screen.

ƒ Enter information about your library’s operating environment and


backup software in the fields provided.
ƒ Select AutoSend Profile to use the current profile as the recipient for
critical alarm log sets automatically sent by the library.
Note: Only one profile can be configured as the AutoSend profile.

253
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 10 — AutoSupport

ƒ Select the mail recipient(s) from the Mail To choices presented. Only
mail recipients that have previously been configured are listed (see
Configuring Mail Users on page 280).
Note: You must select autosupport@spectralogic.com as one of the
recipients if you want to send an AutoSupport ticket request to
SpectraGuard Support.
4. Select Next. The Save Profile screen displays. Verify that all of the
information shown is correct. If any information needs to be changed,
select Previous to display the screen in which the changes need to be
made.

Figure 156 The Save Profile screen.

5. When all of the information is correct, select Save.


6. The AutoSupport Profiles screen redisplays, listing the newly
completed profile.

Figure 157 The updated AutoSupport Profiles screen.

254
User Guide 91090000
Configuring AutoSupport

7. Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 if you want to create additional profiles.


Note: When you create multiple profiles, they are listed in the order in
which they are created, not in alphanumeric order.
8. Select Previous to return to the main AutoSupport screen.
If one of the profiles is configured as an AutoSend recipient, the
Configure Alarms button is active (see Figure 151 on page 251).

Deleting AutoSupport Profiles


Use the following steps to delete an existing profile.
1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > AutoSupport. The
AutoSupport screen displays (see Figure 151 on page 251).
3. Select Manage Profiles. The AutoSupport Profiles screen displays (see
Figure 157 on page 254).
4. Select the Remove button next to the contact you want to delete. The
Remove Profiles screen displays, asking you to confirm the deletion.
5. Select Remove. The AutoSupport profiles screen redisplays with the
updated list of profiles.
6. Select Previous to return to the main AutoSupport screen.

Configure Alarms
Use the steps in this section if you want the library to automatically
generate an ASL file in the event that any of the critical event listed under
Critical Alarms on page 249 occurs.
1. If you have not already done so, configure one AutoSupport profile as
the AutoSend recipient (see Step 3 on page 253).

255
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 10 — AutoSupport

2. Select Configure Alarms from the AutoSupport screen. The AutoSupport


Critical Event Configuration screen displays.

Figure 158 The AutoSupport Critical Event Configuration


screen.

3. Select Enable Critical AutoSupport Events. When enabled, the library


generates an ASL file whenever one of the critical events listed under
Critical Alarms on page 249 occurs. Any ASL file that is generated as a
result of a critical event is automatically sent all of the recipients
selected in the AutoSend profile.
Note: The autosupport@spectralogic.com must selected as a mail
recipient in the AutoSend profile if you want the library to send
critical event ASL files to SpectraGuard Support.
4. If desired, select a value for the Partition Drive Failure Threshold from
the drop-down list. This is the only configurable critical event.
You can specify the threshold for the number of failed drives in a
partition that will cause an AutoSupport ticket request to be generated.
The threshold is a percentage of drives assigned to the partition. You
can choose 25% and 50%; the default is 50%. The threshold applies to all
partitions in the library.
5. Select Save or select Previous to return to the main AutoSupport screen
without saving your changes.
After your changes are saved, the Scheduled AutoSupport
Configuration screen redisplays with a confirmation message.
6. Select Previous to return to the main AutoSupport screen.

256
User Guide 91090000
Configuring AutoSupport

Configure Log Set Forwarding


Log forwarding is enabled by default from the factory. This is a monthly
log set that is forwarded to Spectra Logic for data collection. No action is
taken by SpectraGuard support for a particular library when it is received,
but the data is parsed and stored in our database to better understand our
field population and how the library is used and how it can be improved.
Use the following steps to configure log set forwarding.
1. Select Log Forwarding from the main AutoSupport screen. The
Configure Log Forwarding screen displays.

Figure 159 The Configure Log Forwarding screen.

2. Select the forwarding options you want to use.


ƒ Allow BlueScale to automatically send log sets is selected by default.
Clear the check box if you do not want the library to automatically
generate and submit monthly Auto Support Log sets to one or more
preconfigured recipients.
ƒ The autosupport@spectralogic.com mail recipient is automatically
selected. All ASL files generated by the library are automatically
sent to SpectraGuard Support.
ƒ Select any additional mail recipient(s) from the Mail To choices
presented. Only mail recipients that have previously been
configured are listed (see Configuring Mail Users on page 280).
3. Select Save.
After your changes are saved, the Configure Log Forwarding screen
redisplays with a confirmation message.
4. Select Previous to return to the main AutoSupport screen.

257
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 10 — AutoSupport

USING AUTOSUPPORT
This section covers the following aspects of using AutoSupport:
ƒ Creating New Support Tickets
ƒ Updating Existing Support Tickets on page 262

Creating New Support Tickets


Follow these steps to open a new ticket with SpectraGuard Support.
Notes: ƒ SpectraGuard Support opens tickets during regular business
hours—from 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. local time, Monday
through Friday.
ƒ If your problem needs attention outside of those hours, and
you have an advanced service contract granting you 24-hour,
7 days a week telephone support, you can call SpectraGuard
Support after submitting the AutoSupport ticket (see
Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
ƒ Go to Spectra Logic’s web site at: www.spectralogic.com/
warranty-service for information about the warranty and
service options for your library.
1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > AutoSupport. The main
AutoSupport screen displays.

Figure 160 The main AutoSupport screen.

3. If you want to save the AutoSupport ticket information to a USB drive,


insert the drive into the LCM’s USB port (see Figure 8 on page 35).
Note: The option to save the ticket to USB is only displayed if you plug
a USB key in to the LCM’s USB port before you select Send Log
Set.

258
User Guide 91090000
Using AutoSupport

4. Select Send Log Set. The AutoSupport Profiles screen displays.

Figure 161 AutoSupport Profiles screen.

5. Click the Select button next to the profile for the main contact person
for the issue. The Select Ticket Type screen displays.

Figure 162 The Select Ticket Type screen.

ƒ If you are sending additional information about an existing support


ticket, select Use existing support ticket and enter the ticket number
in the Number field. See Updating Existing Support Tickets on
page 262 for additional information.
ƒ If this is a new ticket, select Create new support ticket. This option is
selected by default.
Notes: ƒ The option to create a new Hardware Health Monitor ticket
option is not available when you sent a AutoSupport ticket
using the Send Log Set option. It is only used to send HHM
data in response to a maintenance notification (see
Responding to HHM Notifications on page 93).
ƒ Supplying a detailed problem description will help support
personnel to address the issue more quickly and efficiently.

259
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 10 — AutoSupport

6. If you do not need to make any changes to the contact person’s


information for this support ticket, proceed to Step 7.
ƒ If you need to temporarily change the contact person’s information
for this ticket, select Profile Data. The Profile Summary screen
displays.
Make any necessary changes in the Profile Summary screen, then
select Use Settings. The Select Ticket Type screen redisplays.

Figure 163 The Profile Summary screen.

ƒ Select Cancel to return to the Select Ticket Type screen without


making any changes to the contact person’s information.
7. In the Select Ticket Type screen (Figure 162 on page 259), type a
detailed description of the issue in the Problem Description field,
including what happened just before the failure occurred.

260
User Guide 91090000
Using AutoSupport

8. Select Next. The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen displays.

Figure 164 The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen.

9. Verify that all information is correct.


If all of the information is correct, proceed to Step 11.
If something needs to be changed, select Previous.
ƒ If you need to change the problem description, do so in the Select
Ticket Type screen.
ƒ If you need to change the contact person’s information, select Profile
Data from the Select Ticket Type screen. Make any necessary
changes in the Profile Summary screen, then select Use Settings. The
Select Ticket Type screen reappears. Retype the problem
description, then select Next to return to the Confirm and Submit
Ticket screen.

261
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 10 — AutoSupport

10. To save the ticket information to a USB drive instead of emailing from
the library, check the box at the top of the screen (shown in Figure 164).
Note: The USB option is only available if you plugged a USB drive in
to the LCM’s USB port before you started the ticket-opening
process.
11. Select Submit.
A progress screen indicates that the ticket request (with log
information) is being sent. When completed, the AutoSupport Profiles
screen displays.
When Spectra Logic receives the request, a ticket is opened and an
email response is sent to the user with a ticket number.

Updating Existing Support Tickets


Follow these steps to update a ticket that you have already opened with
SpectraGuard Support. Updating a ticket is particularly useful for mailing
new logs to Technical Support.
Note: You must have the reference number for the existing ticket—
which you receive when you open the ticket—and the
information you are sending must be related to that ticket.
If you have a new issue with your library, a new ticket is
opened to address that issue separately.
1. If you plan to save the ticket information to a USB key, insert the device
into the LCM’s USB port (see Figure 8 on page 35).
2. Follow the instructions in steps 1 through 5 in Creating New Support
Tickets on page 258 to reach the Select Ticket Type screen (see
Figure 162 on page 259).
3. If you do not need to make any changes to the contact person’s
information for this ticket, proceed to Step 5.
If you need to temporarily change any of the contact person’s
information, select Profile Data. The Profile Summary screen displays
(Figure 163 on page 260).
4. Make any necessary changes in the Profile Summary screen, then select
Use Settings. The Select Ticket Type screen redisplays.

5. Select Use existing support ticket.


6. Type the six-digit ticket number in the Number field. You received this
number when you originally opened the ticket.
7. Add any updated information in the Problem Description field.
8. Select Next. The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen displays (see
Figure 164 on page 261).

262
User Guide 91090000
Using AutoSupport

9. Verify that all information is correct.


If all of the information correct, proceed to Step 11.
If something needs to be changed, select Previous and make the
necessary changes.
10. To save the ticket information to a USB key instead of emailing from the
library, check the box at the top of the screen (shown in Figure 164 on
page 261).
Note: The USB option is only available if you plugged a USB key in to
the LCM’s USB port before you started the ticket-opening
process.
11. Select Submit.
A progress screen indicates that the ticket request (with log
information) is being sent. When completed, the AutoSupport Profiles
screen displays.
When Spectra Logic receives the request, a ticket is opened and an
email response is sent to the user with a ticket number.

263
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 10 — AutoSupport

Notes

264
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 11
Configuring the Library
When it was installed, your library was configured according to your
initial requirements. This chapter describes the procedures for modifying
the library configuration, including the following topics:

Topic Described beginning on...


Configuring Library Users page 266
Adding a New User page 267
Modifying an Existing User page 268
Deleting an Existing User page 268
Accessing the System Setup Screen page 269
Enabling Options and Upgrades page 270
Determine the Library Hardware ID page 271
Enter the Activation or BlueScale page 271
Software Support Key
Modifying the Library Configuration page 273
Settings
Configuring System Settings page 274
Enabling and Disabling Performance page 276
Metrics
Enabling and Disabling Soft Power page 276
Enabling the Camera Icon (Optional) page 277
Configuring Network Settings page 278
Configuring Mail Users page 280
Enabling Email for the Automatic page 282
Configuration Save Feature
Configuring SNMP (Optional) page 283

265
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

Topic Described beginning on...


Backing Up the Library Configuration page 285
Use the Auto Save Configuration Feature page 286
Back Up the Library Configuration page 286
Manually
Verify the Configuration Backup page 288
Setting the Camera IP Address page 290
Configuring Emulation (Optional) page 294
Configuring a Firmware Package Server page 298
(Optional)
Configuring and Using Observatory page 296
(Optional)
Enabling and Configuring Observatory page 296
Using Observatory page 297
Configuring Rotation Manager (Optional) page 300
Configuring the Library for Use with page 301
StorNext Software (Optional)

CONFIGURING LIBRARY USERS


Each library user is assigned to one of three user groups, each with its own
set of pre-defined library privileges (also known as permissions). Before
you begin, read User Security on page 71 to understand the three types of
user groups and what types of privileges each has.

266
User Guide 91090000
Configuring Library Users

Adding a New User


Use the following steps to add a new library user and assign that user to a
user group.
1. Log into the library with superuser privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Security > Edit Users. The Library Users
screen displays.

Figure 165 The Library Users screen.

For this field... Enter...


User The user’s name.
Password A password for the user and then retype the password to confirm.
Retype Password Notes:
ƒ For security, the text in the Password and Retype Password fields is shown as
asterisks (*).
ƒ By default, passwords are not required for any of the three default users.
User Type Select the group to which the user belongs.
Note: See User Security on page 71 for descriptions of the user groups and
privileges associated with each.

3. Select Save. The new user name and group assignment is added to the
list of users.
4. Repeat Step through Step 3 for each library user.

267
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

Modifying an Existing User


Use the following steps to change settings for an existing user.
1. Log into the library with superuser privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Security > Edit Users. The Library Users
screen displays (see Figure 165 on page 267), showing a list of library
user names.
3. Find the user’s name, then select Edit next to the name.
4. Change the user’s name, password, group, or any combination of these
as required.
Notes: ƒ For security, the text in the Password and Retype Password
fields is shown as asterisks (*).
ƒ By default, passwords are not required for any of the three
default users.
5. Select Save to save your changes.

Deleting an Existing User


Use the following steps to delete an existing user.
Note: The library requires a minimum of one Superuser. You cannot
delete the last member of the Superuser group.
1. Log into the library with superuser privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Security > Edit Users. The Library Users
screen displays (see Figure 165 on page 267), showing a list of library
user names.
3. Locate the name of the user to delete, then select Delete next to that
user’s name.
When the screen refreshes, the user list no longer includes the user
name you just deleted.

268
User Guide 91090000
Accessing the System Setup Screen

ACCESSING THE SYSTEM SETUP SCREEN


All of the settings for the library’s general configuration options are
accessed through the System Setup screen. The System Setup screen has
two panes:
ƒ Option Enablement pane—for entering the option keys for any
purchased options, including BlueScale Software Support and licensed
capacity (chambers).
ƒ Other Settings pane—for configuring the operational parameters for
the library.
Use the following steps to access the System Setup screen when you want
to enable a new option or change a configuration setting.
1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > System. The System
Setup screen displays. The screen is divided into two panes. Use the
scroll bar to see the entire screen.
Note: The Other Settings pane can have up to three BlueScale Vision IP
Address fields if the library includes multiple cameras.

Figure 166 The System Setup screen (Enable Figure 167 The System Setup screen (Other
Options pane). Settings pane).

269
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

ENABLING OPTIONS AND UPGRADES


The library ships with activation keys to enable the options and upgrades
you purchased with the library. These options include the initial BlueScale
Software Support key, the licensed capacity, and additional features such
as BlueScale Encryption Pro.
The initial BlueScale Software Support key and the keys for any options
you purchased with the library are entered when the library is installed.
When you renew or extend your service contract or if you purchase
additional Capacity on Demand (CoD) or other upgrade options at a later
date, you will receive an activation key that must be entered into the
System Configuration screen to enable the new options. See Library
Option Upgrades on page 443 for information about the available upgrade
options.

Important A valid BlueScale Software Support key is required in order to update the library
firmware, which includes the BlueScale software. Your initial library purchase
includes a BlueScale Software Support key that is valid for the duration of the
warranty period, or for the duration of any uplifted or extended service contract
you purchased with the library, whichever is longer.
When you renew or extend your service contract, a new BlueScale Software
Support key is generated and must be entered into the library to allow continued
access to firmware upgrades.

Notes: ƒ If you purchase CoD capacity you must create or modify a


partition to make use of the added capacity. See Chapter 9 –
Using Partitions for instructions.
ƒ If you purchase CoD capacity that exceeds the number of
chambers that are physically present in the library, only the
physically present chambers can be used when configuring
partitions.
ƒ To make use of CoD capacity that exceeds the number of
unlicensed chambers available in the current library
configuration, you must also purchase a TBA to replace a
DBA. The hardware upgrade must be installed by a certified
Spectra Logic field technician.The library ships with
activation keys to enable the options you purchased when
you purchased the library.
This section describes how to determine the library hardware ID, which is
required for renewing or extending your service contract and for
purchasing upgrades, and how to enter the activation key to enable
purchased options.

270
User Guide 91090000
Enabling Options and Upgrades

Determine the Library Hardware ID


Use the following steps to locate your library’s Hardware ID.
1. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen
on page 269).
2. Locate and record the hardware ID for the library. You can view the
hardware ID by selecting Configuration > System to display the
System Setup screen. The Hardware ID is circled in Figure 169.
Note: The Hardware ID is the same as the library serial number.

Hardware ID

Figure 168 Locating the library’s Hardware ID.

3. Contact your Spectra Logic sales representative to order the desired


options or to renew or extend your service contract (see Contacting
Spectra Logic on page 5).

Enter the Activation or BlueScale Software Support Key


Use the following steps to enter the activation key for a new option or a
new BlueScale Software Support key into the library.
Note: Installing additional chambers to increase the capacity of the
library must be performed by a Spectra Logic certified field
engineer. In this case, the additional capacity you purchased will
be enabled during the installation process.
1. Have on hand the activation key that was provided with the
information you received when you completed your order.
Note: You may be instructed to generate the key using the Spectra Logic
key generation tool at www.support.spectralogic.com/keys.

271
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

2. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen
on page 269).
The Option Enablement pane at the top of the screen lists the currently
enabled options.

Enter activation key

Figure 169 The System Setup screen (Option Enablement


pane).

3. Enter the activation key for the option you want to enable in the Key
field.
Note: The activation keys are not case-sensitive.

Important Beginning with BlueScale 11, the format for option keys has changed. When you
update to BlueScale 11.0.0 or later from an earlier version of BlueScale, all option
keys already stored in the library are automatically converted to the new format.
If you restore the library using a saved configuration that was created before the
library was updated to BlueScale 11.0.0. or later, the option keys in the saved
configuration are updated when they are imported.
Record the converted keys for future reference.

4. Select Save.
The System Setup screen refreshes with the new option key and its
description included in the list of keys. You can view this list at any
time to determine what options are currently enabled.
Note: Keep a separate record of all activation keys listed on the Option
Enablement pane of the System Setup screen. You will have to
re-enter them if the library is ever reset to factory defaults.

272
User Guide 91090000
Modifying the Library Configuration Settings

MODIFYING THE LIBRARY CONFIGURATION SETTINGS


This section describes how to modify the library’s general configuration
settings. To change the current value for any of these settings, access the
System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen on page 269),
then scroll down to the Other Settings pane.

Figure 170 Other Settings pane of the System Configuration


screen

273
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

Configuring System Settings


The following table lists the system settings that are configured through
the System Setup screen, describes how to change each setting, and
provides the default value for each setting, if applicable.

This setting... Is used to.... Default


Library Name Set the name used to identify the library in messages it blank
sends to mail recipients.
1. Enter a name for the library. Use a name that will help
identify the library to a remote user.
2. Select Save.
Web Server Port Set the port number for the dedicated Ethernet port used to 80
access the library’s embedded web server.
1. Enter a port number 0 to 65,535.
The default port number 80 is appropriate for most
installations and is strongly recommended. If you use a
port number other than 80, the port number must be
explicitly entered into the web browser when accessing
the library remotely.
Caution: Do not set the web server port to 443. Using
this port number will cause the front panel display to
become unstable.
2. Select Save.
3. Reset the library to enable the new web port number
setting (see Resetting the Library on page 337).
Refresh Rate Set how frequently the information on the BlueScale user 60 seconds
interface screens is refreshed.
1. Use the Refresh drop-down list to select a scheduled
interval time.
2. Select Save.
Notes:
ƒ You can manually refresh the displayed information at
any time by selecting the refresh button located at the left
end of the status bar (see Status Bar on page 76).
ƒ If you want to use something other than the default
refresh rate, you must set the refresh rate every time you
log into the library.
ƒ If you want to disable automatic refreshing of the display,
set the refresh rate to zero.
Auto Logout Set how long the current connection to the BlueScale user 0 (zero) minutes
Timeout interface is idle before the current user is logged out.
Note: Setting the timeout value to zero disables auto logout.
1. Enter the number of minutes for the timeout.
2. Select Save.

274
User Guide 91090000
Modifying the Library Configuration Settings

This setting... Is used to.... Default


Disable Online Disable or enable displaying links to the Spectra Logic web Unchecked
Access to Spectra site at the bottom of each BlueScale screen when the library (Enabled)
Logic has a connection to the internet.
Enable Drive Enable/disable drive performance and power consumption Unchecked
Performance monitoring. See Enabling and Disabling Performance (disabled)
Monitoring Metrics on page 276 for detailed information and
instructions.
Enable Power
Consumption
Monitoring
Enable Soft Power Enable/disable the soft power feature. See Enabling and Unchecked
Disabling Soft Power on page 276 for detailed information (disabled)
and instructions.
Enable SNMP Agent Enable the SNMP agent and configure SNMP settings. See Unchecked
Configuring SNMP (Optional) on page 283 for detailed (disabled)
SNMP Settings information and instructions.
Note: These settings are not present unless you purchased
the SNMP option for your library.
BlueScale Vision IP Enable the BlueScale Vision camera icon for the camera at 0.0.0.0
Address the specified IP address. See Enabling the Camera Icon
(Optional) on page 277 for detailed information and
instructions.
Network Settings Set the IP addressing for the LCM Ethernet port. See DHCP
Configuring Network Settings on page 278 for detailed
information and instructions.
Mail User Configure recipients for emails containing system autosupport@
messages, traces, and diagnostic results generated by the spectralogic.com
library. See Configuring Mail Users on page 280 for detailed
information and instructions.
Auto Configuration Configure the auto configuration save feature to Enabled
Save automatically send an email containing a backup of the
library configuration whenever a partition is created or
modified. See Enabling Email for the Automatic
Configuration Save Feature on page 282 for detailed
information and instructions.
Date And Time Set the date and time the library uses as the time stamp for N/A
library system messages.
1. Select Edit.
2. Use the Date and Time drop-down lists to select the
month, day (date), year, hour, and minute of the hour to
display.
3. Select Save.

275
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

Enabling and Disabling Performance Metrics


Before you can use the library’s metrics options for monitoring the
operation of your library and its drives, you must enable them. To learn
more about these monitoring functions, see Monitoring Your Library on
page 87.
1. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen
on page 269).
2. To enable a feature, select the check box next to the feature, then select
Save.
Option Description
Drive Performance Enabling the Drive Performance Monitor lets you monitor the performance of
your drives.
Important: Make sure that the drives do not contain media before you enable
Drive Performance monitoring. If you enable this option when a drive contains
a cartridge, the drive is reported as empty.
Power Consumption Enabling Power Consumption Monitor (EnergyAudit) lets you monitor the
amount of power your library is using.
Note: When you disable and then re-enable power consumption monitoring, the
library does not begin capturing data again until you power cycle the library.

3. To disable a metric monitoring feature, clear the check box next to the
metric, then select Save.
Note: When you disable and then re-enable power consumption
monitoring, the library does not begin capturing data again until
you power cycle the library.

Enabling and Disabling Soft Power


The Soft Power feature disables the front panel power button to prevent
unauthorized personnel from powering down the library. Instead, the
library can only be powered off by a logged in superuser using the soft
power button on the General Status screen (see Figure 32 on page 86). The
soft power button only displays on the operator panel and requires a
confirmation before power to the library is turned off.
See Use the Soft Power Feature on page 85for instructions on how to use
the Soft Power feature.
Note: The Soft Power feature is only available when run from the local
user interface; it is not available through the BlueScale web
interface. The Soft Power feature can only be enabled or disabled
by a superuser.

276
User Guide 91090000
Modifying the Library Configuration Settings

Use the following steps to enable the Soft Power feature.


1. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen
on page 269).
2. Select the check box next to Enable Soft Power, then select Save.
3. To disable the Soft Power option, clear the check box next to Enable Soft
Power, then select Save.

Enabling the Camera Icon (Optional)


Before you can use the camera icon on the status bar to access BlueScale
Vision viewer from your network, you must enter the camera’s IP address
in the System Settings screen as described in this section.
Notes: ƒ If you have not yet set the IP address for the camera, see
Setting the Camera IP Address on page 290.
ƒ If your network uses DHCP or if you do not know the current
fixed IP address for the camera, use the Network Camera
Setup Wizard to determine what the current IP address is
and make any desired changes. See Using the Network
Camera Setup Wizard on page 342 for information about
using the wizard.
ƒ It is not necessary to enable the camera icon to connect to the
BlueScale Vision viewer for a camera. You can simply
connect an Ethernet cable to the camera’s Ethernet port on the
back of the library (see Figure 177 on page 290) and enter the
camera IP address in your web browser.
ƒ If an IP address for the camera has already been entered in
the library’s BlueScale user interface, a camera icon displays
in the Status bar (see Figure 50 on page 102).
ƒ Read the BlueScale Vision Camera User’s Guide, included on the
documentation CD that came with your library, for detailed
information about configuring and using the camera.
ƒ You can disable access to the camera by setting the IP address
to 0.0.0.0.

277
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

Use the following steps to enable the camera icon in the status bar.
1. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen
on page 269)
2. Scroll down until you see the Other Settings pane (Figure 170 on
page 273).
3. Enable the camera icon by entering the camera’s current IP address in
the BlueScale Vision IP Address field.
4. Select Save. The camera icon in the status bar indicates that the IP
address has been configured.
5. Repeat these steps to enable up to two additional camera icons.

Configuring Network Settings


Spectra Logic highly recommends that you configure your library for
network access. Without network access, you will be unable to perform
any of the following operations:
ƒ Access the BlueScale web interface for remote management of the
library using a standard web browser
ƒ Open support incidents from the library front panel or manually send
ASLs (AutoSupport Logs) to SpectraGuard Support for troubleshooting
ƒ Automatically email system messages or reports to configured mail
users
ƒ Automatically send a notification to a specified recipient when certain
critical events occur
ƒ Download the latest firmware packages from the Spectra Logic web site
directly to the library
By default, the IP address for the Ethernet port on the LCM is set using
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). If your network does not
use DHCP, or if you simply want the library to have a fixed IP address, you
can configure a static (fixed) IP address as described in this section. Using a
static IP address ensures that you always know the IP address for the
library and is highly recommended.

278
User Guide 91090000
Modifying the Library Configuration Settings

Use the following steps to modify the library’s IP address settings.


1. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen
on page 269).
2. Select Edit next to Network Settings. The Network Settings screen
displays.
Note: If the library is connected to a routed IPv6 network, its IPv6
address is listed on the Network Settings screen. IPv6 increases
the address space from 32 to 128 bits, providing a virtually
unlimited number of networks and systems. You can use the
library’s IPv6 address to connect to the library from a web
browser without changing the library’s IP address configuration.

Figure 171 The Network Settings screen.

3. Select either DHCP or Static (highly recommended) as the addressing


method. If you select static addressing, enter the following information:

For this field... Enter...


Address A valid Class A, B, or C IP address in the form nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn.
Subnet The subnet mask. The subnet mask must be a valid octet in the form
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn.
Gateway A valid Class A, B, or C network gateway address in the form
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn.network gateway. Enter 0.0.0.0 for the Gateway if your
network does not use a gateway.

4. Select Save to finish. To return to the System Setup screen without


saving your changes, select Previous.
Note: If desired, print the System Configuration Settings Checklist on
page 65 and use it to record the library’s network configuration
settings.

279
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

Configuring Mail Users


You can configure the library to send email messages with system
messages, traces, and diagnostic results to selected recipients. Recipients
can be configured to receive messages automatically as they are generated
by the library or on demand when traces are run, reports are generated, or
the library's configuration data is backed up. Recipients can also be
configured to receive AutoSupport messages.
Notes: ƒ You must configure the library’s IP address as described in
Configuring Network Settings on page 278 before you
configure mail recipients.
ƒ You must configure autosupport@spectralogic.com as mail
user if you want to have the library send AutoSupport ticket
requests or ASL and HHM files that are generated by the
library to SpectraGuard Support during troubleshooting (see
Configuring AutoSupport on page 250).
ƒ If desired, you can print out the System Configuration
Settings Checklist on page 65 and use it to record the mail
settings.
Use the following steps to add or modify mail recipients.
1. Select the Edit button next to Mail Users. The Mail Recipients screen
displays.

Figure 172 The Mail Recipients screen.

280
User Guide 91090000
Modifying the Library Configuration Settings

2. To modify an existing recipient, select Edit next to the desired recipient


in the Recipients pane.
The Add/Update Recipient pane refreshes to show the current
information for the selected recipient.
3. Enter or update the information in the Add/Update Recipient pane.

For this field... Enter...


To The email address of the recipient. Be sure to use the full address using the
standard email format, including the @ symbol. The address cannot contain
spaces or other non-alphanumeric characters (for example, an ampersand, &).
To include multiple addresses, leave a space between each address.
From An alphanumeric string to uniquely identify the library (for example, the name
or location of the library). The string cannot contain spaces or other non-
alphanumeric characters (for example, an ampersand, &).
SMTP IP Address The IP address of your SMTP server in the SMTP IP Address field. Use the
standard IP address format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn.
Receive If desired, select one or more of the listed message types. The library will
automatically email the selected messages to the recipient when they are
generated.
Notes:
ƒ Do not select any message types if you do not want the recipient to
automatically receive messages. However, messages can still be sent to the
recipient on an individual basis when traces or diagnostics are run.
ƒ Do not select message types for the autosupport@spectralogic.com mail
recipient. This mail recipient is only used to receive AutoSupport ticket
requests or ASL and HHM files that are generated by the library.

4. Select Save. The screen refreshes to show the new mail recipient in the
Recipients portion of the Mail Recipient screen (Figure 172 on
page 280).
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to configure or modify additional email
recipients.
6. Select Previous to return to the System Setup screen.

281
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

Enabling Email for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature


Having a current backup of the library‘s metadata (the library partition
configuration and MLM database) is an essential component of any
disaster recovery planning. For more information about protecting the
library metadata, see Backing Up the Spectra Library Metadata on
page 421.
The Auto Configuration Save feature creates a backup file containing the
library configuration and the MLM database once a week and every time
you create or modify a partition. You can configure the library to send the
auto-save configuration file as an email attachment to a previously defined
email recipient (highly recommended) as soon as the file is generated.
Notes: ƒ The timing for the weekly Auto Configuration Save backup
file is based on the first time the file was generated.
ƒ The Auto Configuration Save feature does not automatically
create a backup when you make other configuration changes
to the library.
ƒ To use the email option for the Auto Configuration Save
feature, you must first configure a mail recipient for the
person to whom you want the configuration file emailed (see
Configuring Library Users on page 266).
The library sends the email whenever it performs an automatic
configuration save operation. The auto-save file contains the library
configuration and MLM database. The email includes instructions for
using the attached file to restore the library configuration and MLM
database.
In the event that you need to restore the library configuration, you can use
either the auto-save configuration file from the LCM or the emailed copy
(see Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File on page 111).
Use the following steps to enable automatically emailing the backup file
created by the Auto Configuration Save feature.
1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > System. The System
Setup screen displays.
3. Scroll down to the Other Settings pane (Figure 170 on page 273).

282
User Guide 91090000
Modifying the Library Configuration Settings

4. Select the Edit button next to Auto Configuration Save. The Automatic
Configuration Save Setup screen displays.

Figure 173 The Automatic Configuration Save Setup screen.

5. Select the Email Configuration checkbox, and then use the drop-down
list to select the desired recipient from the list of previously configured
mail recipients.
Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email
recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed configuration
files.

Configuring SNMP (Optional)


Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a widely used protocol
for monitoring the health and welfare of your library by using integrated
alerts. SNMP is an option you can purchase and enable to monitor the
status of your library. When SNMP is enabled, the Other Settings pane in
the System Configuration screen includes options for enabling the SNMP
agent and configuring SNMP settings.
Notes: ƒ The SNMP key appears as Observatory in the Option
Enablement pane of the System Settings screen.
ƒ If you purchase the Observatory software, the key to enable
SNMP is included (see Configuring and Using Observatory
(Optional) on page 296).
If you are using a network-based library monitor/management application
other than the library’s BlueScale user interface, you may need to identify
the library’s SNMP settings to the application. These settings include the
read, write, and broadcast community strings.
Note: If desired, you can print out the System Configuration Settings
Checklist on page 65 and use it to record the library’s SNMP
settings.
Contact SpectraGuard Support if you have questions about configuring
SNMP (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).

283
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

Use the following steps to enable and configure SNMP.


1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > System. The System
Setup screen displays.
3. Scroll down to the Other Settings pane.
4. Select Enable SNMP Agent to enable SNMP in the library.
The agent returns information contained in the library’s Management
Information Base (MIB) to the workstation used to manage the
network. The MIB defines what information is available from the
library over the network. MIB files are available for download from
Spectra Logic at ftp://ftp.spectralogic.com/pub/t-series/.
5. Select SNMP Settings. The SNMP Settings screen displays.

Figure 174 The SNMP Settings screen.

Field Description
System Contact Maps to the value for system.4 (sysContact) object in the MIB.
System Location Maps to the value for system.6 (sysLocation) object in the MIB.

284
User Guide 91090000
Backing Up the Library Configuration

Field Description
Valid Query Lists all SNMP communities to which the library currently belongs. The library
Communities only responds to SNMP queries from members of these communities. The
default valid query community is public.
An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations
running SNMP belong to. It helps define where information is sent. The
community name is used to identify the group. An SNMP device or agent may
belong to more than one SNMP community. It will not respond to requests
from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities.
Trap Destinations Lists all the currently configured trap destinations (IP addresses) to which the
library will send SNMP traps. There are no default trap destinations
configured.

6. If necessary, make changes to the SNMP settings.


ƒ Select Edit next to the setting you need to modify. The current
settings display in the corresponding Add/Update section of the
screen. Select Save in the corresponding Add/Update section of the
screen after you make your changes.

Important Community strings are case sensitive. If the library is configured to include
community FooBar, it will answer to queries from community FooBar but not from
community foobar.

ƒ Select Delete to remove a setting.


7. Select Previous to return to the System Configuration screen.

BACKING UP THE LIBRARY CONFIGURATION


Keeping valid backup copies of your library’s configuration and the MLM
database ensures that you can easily restore the library in the event of a
disaster. Having a backup of the library’s configuration is also extremely
useful if problems require you to replace the LCM or the LCM’s compact
flash card. After the replacement procedure is complete, you can use the
saved configuration to restore the library’s settings, including the
partitions, instead of having to manually re-enter all of the information.
The library provides two methods for backing up the configuration:
ƒ Use the Auto Save Configuration Feature on page 286
ƒ Back Up the Library Configuration Manually on page 286
If you have valid backups of the library’s configuration and MLM
database, you can use them to restore the library (see Restoring the Library
Configuration on page 111).
See Backing Up the Spectra Library Metadata on page 421 for additional
information about backing up the library’s configuration information and
MLM database (the library metadata).

285
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

Use the Auto Save Configuration Feature


The Auto Save Configuration feature, which operates automatically, saves
a backup of the library configuration and MLM database to a time-
stamped zip file on the LCM compact flash. The auto-save configuration
file contains the currently library configuration and Media Lifecycle
Management (MLM) database. The library generates the auto-save
configuration file once a week and whenever a partition is created or
modified.
Note: The Auto Save Configuration feature does not automatically
create a backup when you make other configuration changes to
the library.
As an extra security measure, you can configure the library to
automatically email the time-stamped zip file to a previously defined email
recipient each time the file is created. The zip file is named
<date-time>cfg.zip, where <date-time> indicates when the zip file
was created. Saving an external copy of the auto-save configuration file
ensures that you can recover your MLM database and library configuration
in the event of a disaster.
When the recipient receives the email, verify the backup as described in
Verify the Configuration Backup on page 288 and Verify the MLM
Database Backup on page 189.
For detailed information about configuring email for the auto-save
configuration file and using it to restore the library, see:
ƒ Enabling Email for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature on
page 282
ƒ Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File on page 111

Back Up the Library Configuration Manually


Whenever you make a configuration change to the library that does not
result in an auto-save configuration file (for example, you entered option
keys after the creation date of the current auto-save file), you can manually
back up the library configuration as described in this section.
Note: The Save Library Configuration utility described in this section
does not back up the MLM database. To back up the MLM
database manually, use the Save MLM Database utility, as
described in Backing Up the MLM Database on page 187.

286
User Guide 91090000
Backing Up the Library Configuration

Use the following steps to manually save the library’s configuration:


1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities. The Utilities screen displays a
list of Basic Utilities.

Figure 175 The Basic Utilities screen.

3. Select Save Library Configuration. The screen refreshes to show the


details for the utility.

Figure 176 The Save Library Configuration utility.

287
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

4. Use the Select the destination drop-down list to choose where you want
to save the file.
Selecting this
destination... Saves the library configuration...
Mail results to As a zip file attached to an email sent to the specified mail recipient.
To send the email with the attached library configuration file to someone who is
not already listed as a mail user, you must first configure that person as an
email recipient as described in Configuring Mail Users on page 280.
Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient.
Spectra Logic does not save emailed files unless they are specifically requested
for troubleshooting.
Save results to To the library’s compact flash card (in the LCM).
Compact Flash file
Save results to LCM To a folder on the USB drive called SavedConfigs\<date-time>, where
USB <date-time> is the time stamp for when the backup was created. The folder
contains multiple configuration files with the format cnnnnnn.cfg, where n is
a number between 0 and 9.
Note: If you select this option, connect a USB drive to the USB port on the LCM
before running the utility (see Connecting a USB Drive to the LCM on
page 105).

5. Select Run Utility.


After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen redisplays, showing that
the configuration file was either saved or sent.
6. Confirm that the backup was successful, as described in Verify the
Configuration Backup.

Verify the Configuration Backup


After creating a backup of your library configuration, verify that the
backup was successful as soon as possible after you create it.

For a Manual Backup Saved to a USB Drive


1. Plug the USB drive into a PC that is not connected to the library.
2. Examine the list of files on the USB drive and locate the \SavedConfigs
folder.
3. Open the SavedConfigs folder and verify that a folder corresponding to
the date and time you created the backup is present.
4. Open the date-time folder and confirm that a number of files of the
format cnnnnnn.cfg, where n is a number between 0 and 9, are
present. Make sure the files are more than 0 bytes in size.

288
User Guide 91090000
Backing Up the Library Configuration

5. If the configuration files are present and are more than 0 bytes in size,
the backup was successful. Store the USB drive in a safe location.
6. If the configuration files are not present, repeat the backup process
(Back Up the Library Configuration Manually on page 286) using a
different USB drive.

For a Zip FIle Sent as an Email Attachment


1. Open the email and confirm that it contains a zip file attachment.
2. Open the zip file and confirm that it contains a number of configuration
files of the format cnnnnnn.cfg, where n is a number between 0 and 9,
are present. Make sure the files are more than 0 bytes in size.
3. If the configuration files are present and is more than 0 bytes in size, the
configuration backup was successful. Save the email attachment to a
safe location from which you can copy it to a USB drive, if needed.
Note: If necessary, rename the zip file to indicate the date of the
backup.
4. If the email attachment does not contain the configuration files or one
or more files are 0 bytes in size, repeat the backup process (Back Up the
Library Configuration Manually on page 286) to send the email again.

289
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

SETTING THE CAMERA IP ADDRESS


The BlueScale Vision camera installed in the library uses an IP address that
is separate from the IP address used by the library.
Use the following steps to set the camera’s IP address.
1. Connect an Ethernet cable from camera’s Ethernet port on the back of
the library to a network that is accessible to a Windows-based
computer. The camera Ethernet connector is located to the right of the
LCM on the back of the library.
Note: In order to comply with EMC requirements, use a shielded
Ethernet cable to connect the camera to your network.

BlueScale Vision
camera connector

Figure 177 Location of the camera Ethernet port.

2. Start a web browser session on the computer that is connected to the


camera.

290
User Guide 91090000
Setting the Camera IP Address

3. Enter the camera’s current IP address in the browser’s Address field.


The start page for the BlueScale Vision viewer opens in a new web
page.

Figure 178 The BlueScale Vision viewer start page.

Notes: ƒ The camera’s default IP address is 10.10.10.11. If the IP


address was changed as part of the library installation, enter
the current IP address.
ƒ If the default IP address was not changed and depending on
how the computer you are using is configured, you may need
to temporarily change the computer’s network settings so
that it can access the camera’s default 10.10.10.11 IP address.
ƒ If your network uses DHCP or if the default IP address has
been changed and you do not know the current fixed IP
address for the camera, use the Network Camera Setup
Wizard to determine what the current IP address is and make
any desired changes. See Using the Network Camera Setup
Wizard on page 342 for information about using the wizard.

291
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

4. Select Administration. The login screen for the application displays.

10.10.10.11

Figure 179 The Administration


login screen.

5. Log in using administrator (all lower case, case-sensitive) for the user
name; leave the password field blank, and select OK. The System
Settings screen displays.

Figure 180 The Administration screen.

292
User Guide 91090000
Setting the Camera IP Address

6. Select Network. The IP address configuration screen displays.

Figure 181 The Administration network screen.

7. Set the desired IP, subnet mask, and gateway addresses as required for
your network and select Save. The factory defaults are:
IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway
10.10.10.11 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1

293
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

CONFIGURING EMULATION (OPTIONAL)


The library identifies itself with an Inquiry string of “SPECTRA
PYTHON.” If your backup software or operating system does not
specifically support one the Spectra Logic libraries that uses an Inquiry
string of “SPECTRA PYTHON,” you can configure one or more partitions
to emulate another type of library. Because most backup applications are
certified for one or more of these libraries, using the emulation mode may
allow these applications to support the library.

Using emulation is not the preferred method of operation and should only be used
Caution when recommended by SpectraGuard Support.

Important If you have been using the STK L700 emulation with an earlier version of the
BlueScale software, be aware that the format of the data reported for the element
addresses has changed (see Configuring the Library for Use with StorNext
Software (Optional) on page 301). Check the configuration of your software to
determine if you need to make changes to reflect the new element address format.

Notes: ƒ Configuring emulation changes how the identifies itself to


the operating system or backup application.
ƒ The following describes an advanced partition configuration
option used only in the context of creating or editing a
partition. The screens for configuring emulation are only
accessible after you complete the initial configuration steps
for the partition (see Enter the Initial Partition Settings on
page 211).
To define a library emulation, follow these steps:
1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions. The Shared
Library Services screen displays.
3. Select Edit to modify an existing partition or New to create a new
partition.
4. Select Next to advance to the Name and Media Type screen (Figure 115
on page 211).

294
User Guide 91090000
Configuring Emulation (Optional)

5. Select Advanced. The Advanced Partition Settings screen displays.

Figure 182 Specifying the emulation type.

6. Select the type of library you want to emulate:


ƒ Select a preconfigured emulation from the Use preset drop-down
list
ƒ Create a custom emulation. Select User Define, then enter the
Vendor and Model in the appropriate fields.
Note: The default setting is SPECTRA PYTHON.
7. Select Next. The Robotic Control Path screen displays listing the QIPs
and/or direct-attach drives currently installed in the library.
This is the beginning of the series of configuration screens. The
sequence of steps and screens matches those described in Configuring a
New Data Partition on page 209.

295
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

CONFIGURING AND USING OBSERVATORY (OPTIONAL)


The BlueScale Observatory application lets you to monitor and manage
multiple Spectra Logic libraries from a single remote location. Observatory
arrives on a software CD for you to install on your computer system.
Observatory includes two keyed options to enable Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) and Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
functionality.

Enabling and Configuring Observatory


The instruction booklet included with the Observatory installation CD
provides basic installation and configuration instructions. Additional
information is available from the Observatory online help. After you install
Observatory, configure it with the IP address for each Spectra Logic library
you want to display in Observatory.

Enable SNMP and SSL


If you want to use the SNMP and SSL options, use the following steps to
enter the option keys on each library you want to monitor.

Important Enabling SSL configures the BlueScale web interface to uses a secure Internet
connection. You must prefix the IP address with https:// instead of just entering
the IP address when accessing the BlueScale web interface.

Note: It is not necessary to enter the Observatory option key if you do


not want to use the SNMP and SSL options.
1. Enter the Observatory option keys as described in Enter the Activation
or BlueScale Software Support Key on page 271).
2. Scroll down the System Configuration screen to the Other Settings pane
and set the Web Server Port.

Do not set the web server port to 443 when using SSL. Using this port number will
Caution cause the front panel display to become unstable.

3. Click Save.
4. Close all browsers accessing the library, then reset the LCM (see
Resetting the LCM on page 338).

Failure to reset the LCM will result in communication errors when you access the
Caution user interface

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for each additional library you want to


monitor.

296
User Guide 91090000
Configuring and Using Observatory (Optional)

Add Libraries to Observatory


1. Install Observatory on a Windows-based computer that is connected to
the same network as the libraries you want to monitor using
Observatory.
2. When the software install is complete, Observatory opens in a web
browser.
3. Select Login (no password) on the Observatory log in page to access the
Overview page.
4. Select the Setup icon and follow the instructions in the instruction
booklet included with the Observatory installation CD to add the
libraries you want to monitor using Observatory.

Using Observatory
When you start Observatory, the Overview screen shows the status of all
libraries being monitored. The individual libraries are grouped by site, in
the center of the Overview screen.
Note: You can run no more than two simultaneous Observatory
sessions.

Figure 183 The Observatory Overview screen.

1. Select Login next to the library you want view to establish a remote
connection to the library and display the library’s login screen.
2. Enter the appropriate user name and password to log into the library.

297
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

CONFIGURING A FIRMWARE PACKAGE SERVER (OPTIONAL)


Under most circumstances, the most straight forward method for updating
the library firmware is to configure each library with internet access, which
provides to the firmware download page on Spectra Logic web site. You
can also download the firmware to a USB drive and use the downloaded
file to perform the update.
If you cannot use either of these methods, you can set up and use one or
more local servers to store library firmware packages downloaded from
Spectra Logic. Using a firmware package server is only useful in the
following situations:
ƒ Corporate polices do not permit you to connect the library to the
internet.
ƒ You are unable to connect to the Spectra Logic web site for firmware
downloads.
Note: For additional information about firmware packages and how to
use them, see Updating Library Firmware on page 388.
Use the following steps to configure, modify, or delete a local package
server.
1. Identify the server or servers you want to use for storing Spectra Logic
library firmware packages. Make sure that these servers can access the
Internet and that they are on the same network as the libraries you want
to update.
Note: Both Microsoft’s Internet Information Services (IIS) and the
Unix-based Apache server work as package servers.
2. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
3. Select Maintenance > Package Update. The Package Update screen
displays.

Figure 184 The Package Update screen.

298
User Guide 91090000
Configuring a Firmware Package Server (Optional)

4. Select Manage Package Servers. The Manage Package Servers screen


displays.

Server configuration
Server Name settings

Figure 185 The Manage Package Servers screen.

The Package Servers portion of the screen lists the following


information for each currently configured package server:
ƒ Server Name
ƒ Configuration settings: IP Address, Proxy, and Directory where
firmware packages are stored
5. The Add/Update Server portion of the Manage Package Servers screen
provides options for adding, modifying, or deleting a package server.
ƒ To add a package server, fill in the information required in the
Name, Address, Proxy, and Directory fields, then select Save. The
screen refreshes and lists the new server in the Package Servers
portion of the screen.
Note: Make sure you specify the directory, including the full path,
where the firmware packages will be stored.
ƒ To edit a server, select Edit next to that server’s name and details.
Change the server information as necessary, then select Save.
ƒ To delete a server, select Delete next to that server’s name and
details.

Important There is no confirmation when you delete a package server. After you select
Delete, the server is removed from the list of available package servers.

299
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

CONFIGURING ROTATION MANAGER (OPTIONAL)


If your site uses NetBackup’s Vault Manager or Symantec Netbackup, you
can purchase the Rotation Manager option to simplify identifying tapes
moved off site. With Rotation Manager installed, the library sends an email
containing the bar code information for every piece of media and its
off-site location to a specified email recipient.
Administrators can use this email to import identifying information for
every bar-code labeled cartridge going off site into the backup software.
Along with listing every bar-code labeled cartridge, the information also
lists the bar-code of the TeraPack magazine holding the cartridge, which
simplifies finding groups of cartridges using a single bar code. Refer to the
documentation that accompanied your software for instructions.
Note: Before you can use Rotation Manager, you must enter the option
key to enable it as described in Enter the Activation or BlueScale
Software Support Key on page 271.
After enabling the option as described in Enabling Options and Upgrades
on page 270, use the following steps to configure the Rotation Manager.
1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import Export > Rotation
Manager. The Rotation Manager Configuration screen displays.

Figure 186 The Rotation Manager Configuration screen.

3. Symantec NetBackup is the only vendor supported by Rotation Manager


and is selected automatically.
4. Select the Mail To email address to use for sending notifications.
Only previously configured mail recipients are listed. To send the
notification to someone who is not already listed as a library user, you
must first configure that person as an email recipient (see Configuring
Mail Users on page 280).
5. Select Save.

300
User Guide 91090000
Configuring the Library for Use with StorNext Software (Optional)

CONFIGURING THE LIBRARY FOR USE WITH STORNEXT


SOFTWARE (OPTIONAL)
StorNext® does not currently provide native support for Spectra T-Series
libraries. Before you can use the library with StorNext you must configure
one or more data partitions (virtual libraries) to emulate a Sun StorageTek
L700 library.
Notes: ƒ Only data partitions configured to use the STK L700
emulation mode are recognized by the StorNext software.
ƒ Support for using the STK L700 emulation mode with
StorNext software requires BlueScale 11 or later. The
BlueScale software version is displayed in the center of the
status bar at the bottom of each BlueScale screen.

BlueScale
software version
Figure 187 The BlueScale software version shown on the status bar.

Configuring a partition to emulate the L700 library results in the following


changes to the SCSI data it reports:
ƒ The INQUIRY command returns STK L700 as the product identification.
ƒ The READ ELEMENT STATUS command reports the element addresses
(the element addresses for the robotics, drives, and magazine slots)
using the format defined for the Sun StorageTek L700 library.

Important If you have been using the STK L700 emulation with an earlier version of the
BlueScale firmware, be aware that the format of the data reported for the element
addresses has changed. Check the configuration of your software to determine if
you need to make changes to reflect the new element address format.

301
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

Configure the Partition


Use the following steps to configure a partition for use with StorNext.

Important Make sure that the exporting QIP and the drives in the partition are connected and
configured on the same zone or storage area network (SAN) as the StorNext server.

1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.


To change user types, select Security > Switch User from the toolbar
menu, then log in as a user with the required privileges.
2. Create or modify the partition to be used with StorNext. See
Chapter 9 – Using Partitions for detailed information about configuring
and using partitions.
Note: StorNext treats each data partition as an independent library.
a. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions to display
the Shared Library Services screen.

Figure 188 The Shared Library Services screen.

b. Select New to create a new partition or Edit to modify an existing


partition. The Name and Media Type screen displays.

Figure 189 The Name and Media Type screen.

302
User Guide 91090000
Configuring the Library for Use with StorNext Software (Optional)

c. Enter a name for the partition and select the type of media that it
will use.
d. Select Advanced to display the Advanced Partition screen.

Figure 190 Specify the emulation mode.

e. Select STK L700 from the Use preset drop-down list.


f. Select Next. The Robotic Control Path screen displays listing the
QIPs and/or direct-attach drives currently installed in the library.
This is the beginning of the series of configuration screens. The
sequence of steps and screens matches those described in
Configuring a New Data Partition on page 209.

Configure StorNext
The online help for the StorNext software includes all of the software
documentation. This documentation provides detailed instructions for
configuring and using the software to operate the library when it is
emulating the Sun StorageTek L700 library.

303
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

Notes

304
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 12
Configuring and Using Encryption
This chapter describes configuring and using BlueScale Encryption Basic
Edition, which is included with your library purchase. For information
about using BlueScale Professional Edition, see the BlueScale Encryption
User Guide.

Topic Described on...


BlueScale Encryption Overview page 306
Site-Specific Decisions page 307
Site Security Example: Low Security Site page 311
Configuring Encryption page 312
Before You Begin page 312
Log Into the Encryption Application page 313
Configure the Encryption Initialization page 314
Mode and Password
Create an Encryption Key page 315
Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition page 317
Enable Encryption Using an F-QIP page 318
Enable Drive-Based Encryption page 319
Exporting and Protecting Keys page 320
Export the Encryption Key page 320
Verify Backups of Encryption Keys page 323
Protect the Encryption Key page 324
Restoring Encrypted Data page 326
The Required Key is Stored in the Library page 326
The Required Key is Not Stored in the page 327
Library
Using the Endura Decryption Utility page 329
Deleting an Encryption Key page 330
Recycling Encrypted Media page 331

305
Chapter 12 — Configuring and Using Encryption

BLUESCALE ENCRYPTION OVERVIEW


BlueScale Encryption is tightly integrated into your Spectra library.
Encryption can be handled through the library’s encryption-enabled QIPs,
if any are in use, or through encryption-capable LTO-4 drives using LTO-4
media. BlueScale encryption key management is provided through the
library’s user interface.
Notes: ƒ LTO-2 or LTO-3 tape drives cannot be used in partition
configured to use drive-based encryption. However, you can
use QIP-based encryption with these drives.
ƒ Encryption-enabled LTO-4 drives in a partition configured to
use drive-based encryption can read, but not write to LTO-2
or LTO-3 media.
ƒ The encryption performed by encryption-capable LTO-4 tape
drives is not compatible with the encryption performed by an
encryption-enabled F-QIP. If an encryption-enabled F-QIP
and an encryption-capable LTO-4 drive are in the same
partition, you must choose one type of encryption or the
other. You cannot use both types in the same partition.
The BlueScale Encryption system has two major components:
ƒ The encryption chip in the F-QIP or LTO-4 drive. Using hardware
encryption makes encryption extremely fast and places no burden on
your network.
ƒ BlueScale Key Management software accessed through the library’s
user interface, either using the touch screen or a remote connection
through a web browser. Optionally, you can secure the web browser
using SSL, which is included with Observatory.
Together, these components let you easily implement the strongest
encryption available, as recognized by the federal government: AES
encryption using a 256-bit key. BlueScale Encryption incorporates multiple
layers of security, some of which are discussed in this chapter. Others are
technically implemented and invisible to the user.

306
User Guide 91090000
BlueScale Encryption Overview

Site-Specific Decisions
To determine a BlueScale Encryption strategy appropriate for your site and
your data, decide on the security level appropriate for your site, and the
amount and kinds of data to encrypt. Then you can make some choices
about how best to implement BlueScale Encryption. The following sections
describe considerations that affect how you configure encryption.

BlueScale Encryption: Standard Edition vs. Professional


Edition
All data encrypted using BlueScale Encryption and Key Management—
Standard and Professional Editions, and LTO-4 drive-based encryption—is
secured by the strongest available encryption method, AES-256. Through
BlueScale Encryption and Key Management, you have additional choices
in defining the level of security you can implement in your data center.
Whether to implement BlueScale Standard Edition or Professional Edition
is your first choice.

Feature Standard Edition Professional Edition


Keys ƒ Included as a standard feature in ƒ Multiple simultaneous encryption
the library. keys (maximum is 30 keys)
ƒ Single encryption key on a library at ƒ More secure, with a key for each of
a time multiple data sets
ƒ Easier to manage and track
Encryption Login ƒ Single encryption password ƒ Choice of either one encryption
Passwords ƒ Easier to manage and track password or three
ƒ More secure, with the option of
requiring multiple users to export
and import keys, etc.
Key Export and ƒ Import and export functions require ƒ Choice of single password or M-of-
Import a single password N shares with multiple passwords
ƒ Easier to manage to export/import keys
ƒ More secure
Compression a ƒ Drive-based compression only ƒ QIP- or drive-based compression
Compatibility ƒ Data encrypted using either version can be decrypted by a library running
between Versions the other version.
ƒ Data encrypted and compressed by a library using LTO-4 drives,
Professional Edition, or both, can be decrypted and decompressed by a
library running Standard Edition.
Summary ƒ Less secure, but more simple ƒ Fewer tapes through compression
management ƒ More secure, but more complex
management
a. If you are using drive-based encryption, compression is handled through the drive. Further references to compression in this manual
apply to library-based, not drive-based, encryption.

307
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 12 — Configuring and Using Encryption

BlueScale Standard Edition For sites with a primary goal of securing data
while it is transported to a remote site and stored there, or only for data
that will be stored for a long period of time, BlueScale Standard Edition
works well. See Site Security Example: Low Security Site on page 311 for
an example of setting up encryption using BlueScale Standard Edition.
For information about configuring and using BlueScale Encryption
Standard Edition, see the remainder of this chapter.
BlueScale Professional Edition For sites that want to implement
compression along with greater flexibility and security, to protect data
wherever it’s stored and regardless of the retention period, BlueScale
Encryption Professional Edition works well.
The Professional Edition of BlueScale Encryption lets you choose whether
to support one encryption password, or three encryption passwords that
enforce another level of security. The Professional Edition also lets you use
QIP-based compression.
For information about installing, configuring, and using BlueScale
Encryption Professional Edition, see the BlueScale Encryption User Guide.

Security on Initialization
Security options determine whether encryption is enabled when the
library starts up:
ƒ Standard mode—Data encryption is enabled when the library starts
up. No further action required.
ƒ Secure initialization mode—Data encryption is not enabled when the
library starts up. Encryption is only available and backups only run
after a superuser has logged in and the encryption password is entered.

Data to Encrypt
When setting up encryption, first decide whether to encrypt all data or a
subset, then determine whether the encrypted data can be grouped
together or if it must be isolated into sets. For example, your site may store
financial data as one set, separate from consumer identity information.
If all data can be encrypted together, the library requires only a single,
encryption-enabled partition. Otherwise, create multiple encryption-
enabled partitions, one for each set of data, and one or more partitions for
data that is not to be encrypted.
Note: Implementing encryption after the library has been configured
to handle encryption simply requires creating backup jobs with
your backup software, which sends data to the proper partitions.
Data is automatically encrypted as it is backed up.

308
User Guide 91090000
BlueScale Encryption Overview

Encryption Methods
Choose how to encrypt data. You can use encryption-enabled QIPs or
encryption-capable LTO-4 drives to encrypt data in a partition. With
encryption-enabled QIPs, data can be encrypted and written to tape using
drives that do not directly support encryption (for example, LTO-2). With
encryption-capable LTO-4 drives, the drive performs the encryption as it
writes the data to LTO-4 tapes.
Note: If a partition uses LTO-4 drive-based encryption, the library can
load LTO-3 media into that partition. However, attempts to write
encrypted data to LTO-3 media fail. Note that LTO-4 drives can
successfully read data from LTO-3 tapes.
The encryption performed by encryption-capable LTO-4 tape drives is not
compatible with the encryption performed by an encryption-enabled
F-QIP. You cannot use both types of encryption in the same partition. If an
encryption-enabled F-QIP and an encryption-capable LTO-4 drive share a
partition, you must choose one type of encryption or the other. You cannot
use both.
To decrypt data encrypted using a QIP, use a partition configured with
QIP-based encryption. To decrypt data encrypted using an LTO-4 drive,
use a partition configured with drive-based encryption.
Only one encryption key is allowed per LTO-4 tape. If you lose the
encryption key for the tape or if you want to use a different key, you must
recycle the tape before you can re-use it in an encryption-enabled LTO-4
drive. Similarly, if the data on a tape was encrypted using a QIP, you must
recycle the tape before you can re-use it with an encryption-capable LTO-4
drive. Recycling media is easily managed through BlueScale Encryption
Key Management (see Recycling Encrypted Media on page 331).

309
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 12 — Configuring and Using Encryption

Passwords and Other Identifiers


BlueScale Encryption requires that you supply passwords and monikers
(key names). Your site may want to consider whether specific rules govern
these.
Superuser Login/Encryption Passwords Passwords are the standard
method of user security that restricts access. To use Spectra Logic BlueScale
Encryption, you must first log into the library with superuser privileges,
then enter an encryption password. The encryption password lets you
access the library’s encryption features. This password must be entered
after the superuser login. Select Security > Encryption to display the
encryption password screen.

The BlueScale encryption password is separate from the password used to log into
Caution the library. You must use this password to access the encryption settings for the
library. If you lose this password, you will not be able to configure encryption nor
will you be able to import/export encryption keys that have already been assigned
and used on encrypted tapes.

Password(s) for Key Import and Export Passwords are also used to encrypt
keys for export and when importing previously exported keys. This
feature is only available after you log into the library as a superuser and
enter the encryption password. Your site may want to consider whether to
create different rules for these passwords, such as requiring that these
passwords are longer than the encryption access password(s), and
therefore more secure.
Monikers Your site may want to create rules governing naming
conventions for key monikers, an alphanumeric identifier used to refer to
the never-revealed true key value, which is a 256-bit key.
Password and Naming Standards Examples Create password and naming
standards, in part again depending on your site’s security requirements.
For example, your site may require a high level of security for access to
encryption partitions, in which case you need to require some combination
of the following:
ƒ A long password
ƒ A combination that requires alphabetic and numeric characters
ƒ No password that corresponds to a dictionary entry
ƒ Passwords to be reset at predefined schedules

310
User Guide 91090000
BlueScale Encryption Overview

Site Security Example: Low Security Site


The following table describes the security considerations and encryption
configuration for a small company with 75 employees.

Security
Considerations Goal
Security goals Protecting company from legal liability associated with unauthorized access to
data stored on tape, both onsite and offsite, including transport to the offsite
location.
Encryption IT administrator, company president, corporate legal counsel.
principals
Data to encrypt Financial and consumer identity data.
Level of security to BlueScale Standard Edition: single key per library is sufficient.
implement Standard initialization mode: encryption partitions are enabled at all times.
Data sets requiring None. A single partition for encrypted data is sufficient.
isolation
Key escrow Staff at company will escrow keys at a site remote from the data storage
method location.
Copies of each key Keep three copies of each key: one with the senior IT administrator, one with
to store and their the company president, one in a corporate safety deposit box.
locations
Key rotation plan Create a new key every six months.
Tracking key On a non-networked computer that supports encryption, create one or more
monikers and charts or lists with this data, including key moniker, dates used, encryption and
passwords superuser passwords, and password used to encrypt exported key. (Because
BlueScale prompts for the required encryption key moniker when restoring
encrypted data, this company chose not to track monikers and their
relationship to media.)
Multiple Deemed unnecessary given the users already identified as those responsible for
encryption teams encryption.
(optional)
Schedule and run Formalized approach deemed unnecessary. Instead, incorporate review of data
drills decryption into standard six-month check to make sure that backups and
restores are working properly. This now includes a test involving data
decryption.
Passwords ƒ Password to access encryption features: minimum of 12 characters,
including at least one number and one letter.
ƒ Password to export and import encryption keys: minimum of 30 characters,
including at least one number and one letter.

311
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 12 — Configuring and Using Encryption

CONFIGURING ENCRYPTION
Encryption is handled either through the F-QIPs in the library or through
LTO-4 drives. Configuring encryption and managing encryption keys are
handled through the library’s user interface. Encryption configuration
entails selecting an encryption mode and creating an encryption password.
The encryption password enables you to access the encryption features.

BlueScale encryption requires a separate password to access the encryption


Caution settings for the library. If you lose this password, you will not be able to configure
encryption nor will you be able to import/export encryption keys that have already
been assigned and used on encrypted tapes.

Before You Begin


Before you begin, make sure that you have the appropriate library
hardware installed. Each partition that will use encryption requires the
following:
ƒ Encryption-capable LTO-4 tape drives. Use encryption-capable Fibre
Channel or SCSI LTO-4 drives. LTO-4 media must be loaded in the
partition.
—OR—
ƒ SCSI drives connected to an F-QIP. Use this configuration to encrypt
data with non-encryption capable drives. Load the media type
corresponding to the drives assigned to the partition.

Important Connecting SCSI drives through a QIP is only supported as a legacy solution.

312
User Guide 91090000
Configuring Encryption

Log Into the Encryption Application


1. Log in as a superuser, then select Security > Encryption. The
Encryption User Login screen displays.
Note: No login or password is required the first time you log into the
Encryption application.

Figure 191 The Encryption User Login screen.

2. Enter the Encryption password and then select OK. The Encryption
Configuration screen displays a list of the current encryption monikers.
Note: If you are configuring encryption for the first time, an encryption
key has not been created, so there is no encryption key moniker
to display.

Figure 192 The initial Encryption Configuration screen.

3. Proceed to Configure the Encryption Initialization Mode and Password.

313
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 12 — Configuring and Using Encryption

Configure the Encryption Initialization Mode and Password


1. From the Encryption Configuration screen, select Configure. The
Encryption Settings screen displays.
Note: If the partition does not include either an encryption-enabled
F-QIP or encryption-enabled LTO drives, you will not see the
Encryption screen described in this section.

Figure 193 The Encryption Settings screen.

2. Select or clear the Enable Secure Initialization checkbox to determine the


initialization mode used when backing up data to a partition:
Mode When the library is powered on during startup...
Standard mode Data can be backed up to partitions that support encryption without entering
an encryption password. To use Standard Mode, make sure that Enable Secure
Initialization is not selected.
Secure Initialization Partitions dedicated to encryption are not available, so backups sent to them
mode cannot run. To initialize the encryption partitions, someone must log in as a
superuser, then enter the encryption password. To use Secure Initialization
Mode, select Enable Secure Initialization.

314
User Guide 91090000
Configuring Encryption

3. In the New Encryption User Password field, type in a password, using


any combination of the numbers 0–9, lower and upper case alphabetic
characters (a–z and A–Z), and the at sign (@), dash (–), underscore (_),
and colon (:) characters.

Make sure you keep a record of this password. If you lose this password, you will
Caution not be able to configure encryption nor will you be able to import/export
encryption keys that have already been assigned and used on encrypted tapes.

Note: Security is greatly enhanced when the user who knows the
encryption password is different from the one logging into the
system during normal operations.
4. Re-enter the password in the Retype Password field, then select OK. The
Encryption Configuration screen again displays.
5. Proceed to Create an Encryption Key.

Create an Encryption Key


1. From the Encryption Configuration screen, select Add Key. The New
Encryption Key screen displays.

Figure 194 The New Encryption Key screen.

2. Enter a name for the encryption key in the Moniker field. This moniker
is the name that you will use to reference the key.

When using LTO-4 drive-based encryption, make sure that the moniker you choose
Caution when creating the BlueScale encryption key contains no more than 32 characters.
If you lose an encryption key that has a moniker greater than 32 characters, data
cannot be recovered using Spectra Logic’s optional Endura Decryption Utility
(EDU).

315
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 12 — Configuring and Using Encryption

Make sure to use a name that has not been used for any other
encryption key, and that uses any combination of the numbers 0–9,
lower and upper case alphabetic characters (a–z and A–Z), and the at
sign (@), dash (–), underscore (_), and colon (:) characters. To improve
readability, use an underscore to separate words. Do not use any space
characters.
ƒ Each moniker must be a unique string of characters, independent of
case.
ƒ Make a habit of using a single case (all upper or all lower) for
monikers. After export, case is ignored, so that keys associated with
the monikers Moniker1, moniker1, and MONIKER1 are interpreted
as a single key. If you have two monikers that are identical except
for case, then you may not be able to retrieve some of your data after
importing such a key.
Note: The actual value of an encryption key is never displayed. The
moniker helps to protect data encrypted using the key by
eliminating the need to display or type the actual key value.
3. Select OK. The Encryption Configuration screen displays with a
confirmation showing the moniker for the newly created encryption
key and a message reminding you to create a copy of the key for
safekeeping.

Figure 195 The Encryption Configuration screen with new


encryption key moniker.

ƒ If the key is not yet assigned to a partition, None displays in the


Primary Key For column.
ƒ The BlueScale Encryption Standard Edition only supports using one
encryption key. The Import Key and Add Key selections no longer
display after you create a key. If you delete the existing key, they
display again. BlueScale Encryption Professional Edition is required
if you want to store multiple encryption keys in the library.

316
User Guide 91090000
Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition

4. Export the newly created encryption key and save it to a secure location
(see Export the Encryption Key on page 320).

If you lose the encryption key, data encrypted using the key cannot be recovered.
Caution For this reason, promptly copying the key and storing it safely (that is, away from
the data encrypted using the key) is extremely important to data decryption and
recovery. See Exporting and Protecting Keys on page 320 for additional
information.

5. If desired, proceed to Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition.

ASSIGNING THE ENCRYPTION KEY TO A PARTITION


After creating an encryption key, you can assign it to one or more library
partitions. If a partition can support encryption, the encryption choices that
display and are available depend on the hardware assigned to the
partition. Possible choices are:
ƒ No encryption
ƒ LTO-4 drive-based encryption
ƒ QIP-based encryption
Use the following steps to assign a key to a partition and encrypt all data
sent to the partition:
1. Log in as a superuser, then select Security > Encryption. The
Encryption User Login screen displays.
2. Enter the encryption password, then select OK.
3. Select Configuration > Partitions. The Shared Library Services screen
displays.
4. Select New to add a partition, or select Edit to modify the settings for an
existing partition.
5. Navigate through the partition configuration screens by selecting Next
until the Encryption screen displays.
The Encryption screen lets you enable encryption features for the
partition. It only displays if you are logged into the encryption
application and have already created an encryption key as described in
Create an Encryption Key on page 315.
Depending on whether you want to use an encryption-enabled F-QIP
or a encryption-capable tape drive to perform the data encryption,
select the desired encryption settings as described in the following
sections.
ƒ Enable Encryption Using an F-QIP on page 318
ƒ Enable Drive-Based Encryption on page 319

317
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 12 — Configuring and Using Encryption

Enable Encryption Using an F-QIP


The current version (Revision 2) of Spectra Logic’s Endura Decryption Utility (EDU)
Caution does not support recovering data that is encrypted using an F-QIP. If you need to
recover data that was encrypted using an F-QIP contact SpectraGuard Support for
assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).

Use the following steps to configure F-QIP-based encryption for a


partition.
1. From the Chambers and Drives screen in the partition configuration
sequence (see Configuring an F-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition on
page 222), select Next. The Encryption screen displays.
Notes: ƒ If the partition can support encryption, the available
encryption choices depend on the hardware assigned to the
partition.
ƒ The encryption performed by encryption-enabled LTO-4 tape
drives is not compatible with the encryption performed by an
encryption-enabled F-QIP.
If an encryption-enabled F-QIP and an encryption-capable
LTO-4 drive are in the same partition, you must choose one
type of encryption or the other. You cannot use both types in
the same partition.

Figure 196 The Encryption screen for QIP-based encryption.

2. Select QIP-based Encryption.

318
User Guide 91090000
Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition

3. To reserve a portion of the media at the beginning tape for unencrypted


data, select Enable Clear File at BOT.
If you choose this option, the tape headers are unencrypted so that any
compatible drive can read the header information on an encrypted
tape. Using unencrypted headers is a useful option for sites with a large
number of tapes to manage.
4. Navigate through the remaining partition configuration screens by
selecting Next.
5. When you reach the Save Partition screen, select Save and proceed as
described in Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 239.

Enable Drive-Based Encryption


Use the following steps to configure drive-based encryption for a partition.
Note: Drive-based encryption is only available for partitions that
contain encryption-capable LTO-4 drives.
1. From the Chambers and Drives screen in the partition configuration
sequence, select Next. The Encryption screen displays.
Note: If the partition can support encryption, the encryption choices
that display and are available depend on the hardware for the
partition.

Figure 197 The Encryption screen for drive-based encryption.

2. Select Drive-based Encryption.


Note: With drive-based encryption, only one key is allowed per LTO-4
tape. To use a new encryption key on a tape previously
encrypted with a different encryption key, you must first recycle
the tape through BlueScale Encryption, as described in Recycling
Encrypted Media on page 331.

319
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 12 — Configuring and Using Encryption

3. Navigate through the remaining partition configuration screens by


selecting Next.
4. When you reach the Save Partition screen, select Save and proceed as
described in Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 239.

EXPORTING AND PROTECTING KEYS


Data cannot be recovered without the encryption key used to encrypt the
data, so protecting encryption keys is extremely important to data
decryption and recovery. To decrypt and restore encrypted data, you need
the data, the encryption key, and the encryption password used to protect
the exported key and data.
Keeping valid backup copies of your encryption keys is extremely
important. To ensure that the keys are protected, use the Export Key option
described in this section to export encryption keys to a USB drive as soon
as possible after you create them.

Data cannot be recovered without the encryption key used to encrypt the data, so
Caution protecting encryption keys is extremely important to data decryption and recovery.
To decrypt and restore encrypted data, you need the data, the encryption key, and
the encryption key password used to protect the exported key and data.

Spectra Logic recommends that you export each key to at least two
different USB drives. Remember, lost encryption keys cannot be recreated;
you should keep them as secure (and as backed up) as your data.

Export the Encryption Key


Note: These instructions are for BlueScale Encryption Standard
Edition. If you have BlueScale Professional Edition, refer to the
BlueScale Encryption User Guide for additional information.
For safe-keeping and security, export the encryption key and store it in a
safe, secure location so that you can import it back into the library if
needed. To export the current encryption key:
1. Log in as a superuser, then select Security > Encryption. The
Encryption User Login screen displays.

320
User Guide 91090000
Exporting and Protecting Keys

2. Enter the encryption password, and then select OK. The Encryption
Configuration screen displays.

Figure 198 The Encryption Configuration screen.

3. Select Export Key. The Export Type screen displays.

Figure 199 Exporting an Encryption Key.

321
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 12 — Configuring and Using Encryption

4. Select either Export Single File to USB or Email Exported Key.


ƒ If you select Export Single File to USB, plug a USB drive into the USB
port on the LCM before continuing.
ƒ If you select Email Exported Key, use the “Mail single key file to:”
drop-down list to select the recipient. The exported key file is sent as
an email attachment to the specified mail recipient.

As a matter of best practice, Spectra Logic recommends exporting encryption keys


Caution to a USB drive instead of using email.
Although emailing encryption keys is supported by the library, using email
presents security issues, including the following:
ƒ Copies of encryption keys may be left on the email servers used for sending
and receiving email and are thus subject to compromise.
ƒ The difficulty in verifying where all the copies of emailed encryption keys may
be located can make security audits more challenging.

Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com


email recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed files
unless they are specifically requested for troubleshooting.
ƒ To send the key to a recipient who is not already listed as mail
recipient, you must first configure the user as a mail recipient (see
Configuring Mail Users on page 280).
5. After you either insert the USB drive or select an email recipient, select
Next.
6. Enter a password, which is used to encrypt the key itself.
7. Make a record of the encryption key password, which you will need to
import the key back into the library. Without the password, you cannot
import the key, and the data encrypted using the key will be
inaccessible.

Do not lose the encryption key password. Without it, you cannot reimport an
Caution encryption key after it is deleted from the library, and the data encrypted using the
key will be inaccessible.

322
User Guide 91090000
Exporting and Protecting Keys

8. Select Next.
ƒ If you exported the encryption key to a USB drive—Immediately
confirm that the encrypted key copied correctly by selecting Check
Key Files. Use the steps in Verify Backups of Encryption Keys to
provide a second confirmation.

Figure 200 Use Check Key Files to confirm successful export.

If the confirmation indicates the key did not copy correctly, delete
all data from the USB drive so that no trace of the failed key
attachment remains, then export the key again using a different USB
drive, beginning with Step 2 on page 321.
ƒ If you exported the key using email—Confirm the receipt of the
attachment by contacting the user to whom you sent the encrypted
key file. Have them confirm that the email attachment contains a
key file as described in Verify Backups of Encryption Keys.

Verify Backups of Encryption Keys


After creating the backups of your encryption keys, verify that the backup
was successful as soon as possible after you create it.

When Saved to a USB Drive


1. Plug the USB drive into a PC that is not connected to the library.
2. Examine the list of files on the USB drive to verify that it contains a list
of files.
3. If a file called name.bsk or name.bss, where name is the moniker you
assigned to the key when it was created, is present and is more than
0 bytes in size, the encryption key was successfully exported and is
usable. Store the USB in a safe location.
4. If the exported key file is not present or if is 0 bytes in size, repeat the
export process (Export the Encryption Key on page 320) using a
different USB drive.

323
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 12 — Configuring and Using Encryption

When Sent as an Email Attachment


1. Open the email attachment and verify that it contains at least one file.
2. If a file called name.bsk or name.bss, where name is the moniker you
assigned to the key when it was created, is present and is more than
0 bytes in size, the encryption key was successfully exported and is
usable. Save the email attachment to a safe location from which you can
copy it to a USB drive, if needed.
3. If the email attachment does not contain the exported key file or if is
0 bytes in size, repeat the export process (Export the Encryption Key on
page 320) to send the email again.

Protect the Encryption Key


Make sure you track, in conformance with your security plan, where you
store the key and who received an email message with the key. Also keep
track of the password used when you exported the key.

Make sure you keep a record of the password created when exporting the key. You
Caution need this password and the encrypted file containing the key to import the
encryption key. Without the key password, you will not be able to import the
encryption key.

The following guidelines outline the essential tasks required to protect


encryption keys:
ƒ Save one or more copies of every key using the Key Export option on
the Encryption Configuration screen (see Export the Encryption Key on
page 320. Two methods are available for key export: copying the
encrypted key to a USB drive or emailing an encrypted version of the
key as an attachment to a user who has been configured as a mail user
through the library (see Configuring Mail Users on page 280).

As a matter of best practice, Spectra Logic recommends exporting encryption keys


Caution to a USB drive instead of using email.
Although emailing encryption keys is supported by the library, doing so presents
security issues, including the following:
ƒ Copies of encryption keys may be left on the email servers used for sending
and receiving email and are thus subject to compromise.
ƒ The difficulty in verifying where all the copies of emailed encryption keys may
be located can make security audits more challenging.

324
User Guide 91090000
Exporting and Protecting Keys

If you choose to store only a single copy of a key, and then something
happens to the device storing the key, you’ve lost both your key and all
data encrypted using the key.

Important To emphasize: If you lose the key, your data is unrecoverable. You need to balance
the number of copies of the key to store to guarantee access to the encrypted data
against the security risk associated with storing multiple keys. Make sure that the
key has been successfully stored prior to removing a key from the library.

ƒ Store keys offsite in a location other than the site used for media
storage. Confirm that the key is stored correctly on the USB drive or has
been received by the intended recipient before deleting the key from
your system. If you delete the key, you must import the key to decrypt
the data that used the key during encryption. Importing keys is
described in The Required Key is Not Stored in the Library on page 327.
You may want to make two copies of a key, storing each in a secure
location. Note the location of these keys, so that you can easily find the
key when you need to restore or delete data.
ƒ Maintain a list of every password associated with each key and securely
store the list. Never keep this list as cleartext on a networked computer,
or send it through email as cleartext. For added security, encrypt the file
containing the list of passwords.
ƒ Track every copy of each key. This is critical to meet requirements that
may govern data retention and data destruction. Destroying all keys
associated with encrypted data is sufficient to satisfy data destruction
requirements, since encrypted data cannot be accessed without the key
used to encrypt it.
Spectra Logic recommends tracking the information listed in the
following table for every key that you create. For added security,
encrypt the file containing the tracking information.
Key Moniker:
Number of key copies
Location of each copy:
Password(s) associated with exported copy of
the moniker:
Location of data stored on mobile media,
which has been encrypted using this moniker:
Moniker creation date:
Proposed expiration date:

325
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 12 — Configuring and Using Encryption

RESTORING ENCRYPTED DATA


Restoring encrypted data from tape follows the standard data restore
processes that you use with your backup software. The only difference is
that the key used to encrypt the data being restored needs to be on the
library and assigned to the partition in which the encrypted media is
loaded. If the key is available, the data is automatically decrypted as it is
read from tape; standard restore procedures simply work.
If the encryption key required for a specific set of encrypted data has been
exported from the library and then deleted, the library prompts you with
the moniker of the key that is required to decrypt the data. You can use the
key moniker to identify the key, then import the key into the library as
described in this section.

Important You need the passwords for both the exported key file and the encrypted file
containing the key to import the encryption key. Without the key password, you
will not be able to import the encryption key.

Endura Decryption Utility (EDU) is an optional command-line encryption


utility which provides a method that lets you restore drive-encrypted data
without loading the media into the library. See Using the Endura
Decryption Utility on page 329 for detailed information about using this
utility.

The Required Key is Stored in the Library


If the key used to encrypt the data is currently stored in the library, use the
following steps to decrypt and restore the data.
1. Load the tape to be decrypted into the library.
2. Assign the key to the partition containing the tape if it is not already
assigned to it.
3. Use your backup software to automatically decrypt and restore data.
If the required key is not available, the library prompts you with the
moniker of the key that is required to decrypt the data. You must
import the key as described in the following section before the data can
be restored.

326
User Guide 91090000
Restoring Encrypted Data

The Required Key is Not Stored in the Library


If the encryption key required for a specific set of encrypted data has been
exported from the library and then deleted, you must import the key
before you can access the encrypted data. After you assign the imported
key to the partition with the encrypted media, it is available for decrypting
data.
Note: If you are using BlueScale Encryption Basic Edition and there is
already an encryption key stored in the library, you must first
delete that key as described in Deleting an Encryption Key on
page 330. You can then import another key.
As described in the following sections, you can import the encryption key
from a USB drive or from a remote computer through a web browser
connection to the library’s user interface.
ƒ Import the Key from a USB Drive, below
ƒ Import the Key Using the BlueScale Web Interface Connection to the
Library on page 328

Import the Key from a USB Drive


Use the following steps to import a key stored on a USB drive:
1. Log in as a superuser, then select Security > Encryption. The
Encryption User Login screen displays.
2. Enter the encryption password, then select OK. The Encryption
Configuration screen displays.
3. Insert the USB drive into the LCM’s USB port.
4. Select Import Key. The Import Key Selection screen displays.
5. Choose the key to import from the Key List field, then select Next. The
Import Password screen displays.
6. Enter the password that was used to encrypt the key when it was
exported, then select Next.
The Encryption Configuration Import Password screen displays,
showing the moniker of the newly imported key.
7. Assign the imported key to the partition with the encrypted media (see
Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition on page 317).
8. Use your backup software to restore the data.

327
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Chapter 12 — Configuring and Using Encryption

Import the Key Using the BlueScale Web Interface


Connection to the Library
Use the following steps to import a key from a remote computer using the
library’s BlueScale web interface (the RLC).
Note: The key must be accessible to the computer you are using to
access the BlueScale web interface.
1. Log in as a superuser, then select Security > Encryption. The
Encryption User Login screen displays.
2. Enter the encryption password, then select OK. The Encryption
Configuration screen displays.
3. Select Import Key. The Encryption Key Files Source screen displays.
Note: The Import key from RLC option is only available if you are
accessing the library using the BlueScale web interface.

Figure 201 The Encryption Key Files Source screen.

4. Select Import key from RLC, then select Next. The RLC Encryption Key
Upload screen displays.

Figure 202 The RLC Encryption Key Upload screen

328
User Guide